4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM

4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
DDR3L SDRAM
MT41K1G4 – 128 Meg x 4 x 8 banks
MT41K512M8 – 64 Meg x 8 x 8 banks
MT41K256M16 – 32 Meg x 16 x 8 banks
Description
•
•
•
•
•
DDR3L SDRAM (1.35V) is a low voltage version of the
DDR3 (1.5V) SDRAM. Refer to DDR3 (1.5V) SDRAM
(Die Rev :E) data sheet specifications when running in
1.5V compatible mode.
Self refresh temperature (SRT)
Automatic self refresh (ASR)
Write leveling
Multipurpose register
Output driver calibration
Options
Features
Marking
• Configuration
– 1 Gig x 4
– 512 Meg x 8
– 256 Meg x 16
• FBGA package (Pb-free) – x4, x8
– 78-ball (9mm x 10.5mm) Rev. E
– 78-ball (7.5mm x 10.6mm) Rev. N
– 78-ball (8mm x 10.5mm) Rev. P
• FBGA package (Pb-free) – x16
– 96-ball (9mm x 14mm) Rev. E
– 96-ball (7.5mm x 13.5mm) Rev. N
– 96-ball (8mm x 14mm) Rev. P
• Timing – cycle time
– 938ps @ CL = 14 (DDR3-2133)
– 1.07ns @ CL = 13 (DDR3-1866)
– 1.25ns @ CL = 11 (DDR3-1600)
• Operating temperature
– Commercial (0°C ≤ T C ≤ +95°C)
– Industrial (–40°C ≤ T C ≤ +95°C)
• Revision
• VDD = V DDQ = 1.35V (1.283–1.45V)
• Backward compatible to V DD = V DDQ = 1.5V ±0.075V
– Supports DDR3L devices to be backward compatible in 1.5V applications
• Differential bidirectional data strobe
• 8n-bit prefetch architecture
• Differential clock inputs (CK, CK#)
• 8 internal banks
• Nominal and dynamic on-die termination (ODT)
for data, strobe, and mask signals
• Programmable CAS (READ) latency (CL)
• Programmable posted CAS additive latency (AL)
• Programmable CAS (WRITE) latency (CWL)
• Fixed burst length (BL) of 8 and burst chop (BC) of 4
(via the mode register set [MRS])
• Selectable BC4 or BL8 on-the-fly (OTF)
• Self refresh mode
• TC of 0°C to +95°C
– 64ms, 8192-cycle refresh at 0°C to +85°C
– 32ms at +85°C to +95°C
1G4
512M8
256M16
RH
RG
DA
HA
LY
TW
-093
-107
-125
None
IT
:E/:N/:P
Table 1: Key Timing Parameters
Speed Grade
Data Rate (MT/s)
Target tRCD-tRP-CL
-093 1, 2
2133
14-14-14
tRCD
(ns)
13.09
tRP
(ns)
13.09
CL (ns)
13.09
-107 1
1866
13-13-13
13.91
13.91
13.91
-125
1600
11-11-11
13.75
13.75
13.75
Notes:
1. Backward compatible to 1600, CL = 11 (-125).
2. Backward compatible to 1866, CL = 13 (-107).
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Products and specifications discussed herein are subject to change by Micron without notice.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
Table 2: Addressing
Parameter
1 Gig x 4
512 Meg x 8
256 Meg x 16
Configuration
128 Meg x 4 x 8 banks
64 Meg x 8 x 8 banks
32 Meg x 16 x 8 banks
Refresh count
8K
8K
8K
64K (A[15:0])
64K (A[15:0])
32K (A[14:0])
Row address
Bank address
Column address
8 (BA[2:0])
8 (BA[2:0])
8 (BA[2:0])
2K (A[11, 9:0])
1K (A[9:0])
1K (A[9:0])
1KB
1KB
2KB
Page size
Figure 1: DDR3L Part Numbers
Example Part Number:
MT41K512M8DA-107:P
-
Configuration
Package
Revision
Speed
{
MT41K
:
:E/:N/:P Revision
Configuration
1 Gig x 4
1G4
512 Meg x 8
512M8
Temperature
256 Meg x 16
256M16
Commercial
Industrial temperature
Package
78-ball 9mm x 10.5mm FBGA
Note:
Rev.
E
Mark
RH
78-ball 7.5mm x 10.6mm FBGA
N
RG
78-ball 8mm x 10.5mm FBGA
96-ball 9mm x 14mm FBGA
P
E
DA
HA
96-ball 7.5mm x 13.5mm FBGA
N
LY
96-ball 8mm x 14mm FBGA
P
TW
None
IT
Speed Grade
-093
tCK
= .938ns, CL = 14
-107
tCK
= 1.07ns, CL = 13
-125
tCK
= 1.25ns, CL = 11
1. Not all options listed can be combined to define an offered product. Use the part catalog search on
http://www.micron.com for available offerings.
FBGA Part Marking Decoder
Due to space limitations, FBGA-packaged components have an abbreviated part marking that is different from the
part number. For a quick conversion of an FBGA code, see the FBGA Part Marking Decoder on Micron’s Web site:
http://www.micron.com.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
2
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
Contents
State Diagram ................................................................................................................................................ 11
Functional Description ................................................................................................................................... 12
Industrial Temperature ............................................................................................................................... 12
General Notes ............................................................................................................................................ 12
Functional Block Diagrams ............................................................................................................................. 14
Ball Assignments and Descriptions ................................................................................................................. 16
Package Dimensions ....................................................................................................................................... 22
Electrical Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 28
Absolute Ratings ......................................................................................................................................... 28
Input/Output Capacitance .......................................................................................................................... 29
Thermal Characteristics .................................................................................................................................. 30
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions ........................................................................... 32
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications .................................................................................. 43
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC .............................................................................................................. 48
DC Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 48
Input Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................................ 49
DDR3L 1.35V AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification ................................................................................ 53
DDR3L 1.35V Slew Rate Definitions for Single-Ended Input Signals .............................................................. 56
DDR3L 1.35V Slew Rate Definitions for Differential Input Signals ................................................................. 58
ODT Characteristics ....................................................................................................................................... 59
1.35V ODT Resistors ................................................................................................................................... 60
ODT Sensitivity .......................................................................................................................................... 61
ODT Timing Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 61
Output Driver Impedance ............................................................................................................................... 65
34 Ohm Output Driver Impedance .............................................................................................................. 66
DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver ................................................................................................................................ 67
DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity .................................................................................................... 68
DDR3L Alternative 40 Ohm Driver ............................................................................................................... 69
DDR3L 40 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity .................................................................................................... 69
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions ............................................................................................ 71
Reference Output Load ............................................................................................................................... 74
Slew Rate Definitions for Single-Ended Output Signals ................................................................................. 74
Slew Rate Definitions for Differential Output Signals .................................................................................... 76
Speed Bin Tables ............................................................................................................................................ 77
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 82
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating .......................................................................................... 102
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating ...................................................................................................................... 109
Commands – Truth Tables ............................................................................................................................. 117
Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 120
DESELECT ................................................................................................................................................ 120
NO OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................ 120
ZQ CALIBRATION LONG ........................................................................................................................... 120
ZQ CALIBRATION SHORT .......................................................................................................................... 120
ACTIVATE ................................................................................................................................................. 120
READ ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
WRITE ...................................................................................................................................................... 121
PRECHARGE ............................................................................................................................................. 122
REFRESH .................................................................................................................................................. 122
SELF REFRESH .......................................................................................................................................... 123
DLL Disable Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 124
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
3
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
Input Clock Frequency Change ...................................................................................................................... 128
Write Leveling ............................................................................................................................................... 130
Write Leveling Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 132
Write Leveling Mode Exit Procedure ........................................................................................................... 134
Initialization ................................................................................................................................................. 135
Voltage Initialization / Change ....................................................................................................................... 137
VDD Voltage Switching ............................................................................................................................... 138
Mode Registers .............................................................................................................................................. 139
Mode Register 0 (MR0) ................................................................................................................................... 140
Burst Length ............................................................................................................................................. 140
Burst Type ................................................................................................................................................. 141
DLL RESET ................................................................................................................................................ 142
Write Recovery .......................................................................................................................................... 143
Precharge Power-Down (Precharge PD) ...................................................................................................... 143
CAS Latency (CL) ....................................................................................................................................... 143
Mode Register 1 (MR1) ................................................................................................................................... 145
DLL Enable/DLL Disable ........................................................................................................................... 145
Output Drive Strength ............................................................................................................................... 146
OUTPUT ENABLE/DISABLE ...................................................................................................................... 146
TDQS Enable ............................................................................................................................................. 146
On-Die Termination .................................................................................................................................. 147
WRITE LEVELING ..................................................................................................................................... 147
POSTED CAS ADDITIVE Latency ................................................................................................................ 147
Mode Register 2 (MR2) ................................................................................................................................... 148
CAS WRITE Latency (CWL) ........................................................................................................................ 149
AUTO SELF REFRESH (ASR) ....................................................................................................................... 149
SELF REFRESH TEMPERATURE (SRT) ........................................................................................................ 150
SRT vs. ASR ............................................................................................................................................... 150
DYNAMIC ODT ......................................................................................................................................... 150
Mode Register 3 (MR3) ................................................................................................................................... 151
MULTIPURPOSE REGISTER (MPR) ............................................................................................................ 151
MPR Functional Description ...................................................................................................................... 152
MPR Register Address Definitions and Bursting Order ................................................................................. 153
MPR Read Predefined Pattern .................................................................................................................... 159
MODE REGISTER SET (MRS) Command ........................................................................................................ 159
ZQ CALIBRATION Operation ......................................................................................................................... 160
ACTIVATE Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 161
READ Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 163
WRITE Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 174
DQ Input Timing ....................................................................................................................................... 182
PRECHARGE Operation ................................................................................................................................. 184
SELF REFRESH Operation .............................................................................................................................. 184
Extended Temperature Usage ........................................................................................................................ 186
Power-Down Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 187
RESET Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 195
On-Die Termination (ODT) ............................................................................................................................ 197
Functional Representation of ODT ............................................................................................................. 197
Nominal ODT ............................................................................................................................................ 197
Dynamic ODT ............................................................................................................................................... 200
Dynamic ODT Special Use Case ................................................................................................................. 200
Functional Description .............................................................................................................................. 200
Synchronous ODT Mode ................................................................................................................................ 206
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
4
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
ODT Latency and Posted ODT .................................................................................................................... 206
Timing Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 206
ODT Off During READs .............................................................................................................................. 209
Asynchronous ODT Mode .............................................................................................................................. 211
Synchronous to Asynchronous ODT Mode Transition (Power-Down Entry) .................................................. 213
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (Power-Down Exit) ........................................................ 215
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (Short CKE Pulse) ...................................................... 217
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
5
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
List of Figures
Figure 1: DDR3L Part Numbers ........................................................................................................................ 2
Figure 2: Simplified State Diagram ................................................................................................................. 11
Figure 3: 1 Gig x 4 Functional Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 14
Figure 4: 512 Meg x 8 Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................................. 15
Figure 5: 256 Meg x 16 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 15
Figure 6: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (Top View) ...................................................................................................... 16
Figure 7: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (Top View) ......................................................................................................... 17
Figure 8: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (RH) ............................................................................................................... 22
Figure 9: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (RG) ............................................................................................................... 23
Figure 10: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (DA) ............................................................................................................. 24
Figure 11: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (HA) ................................................................................................................. 25
Figure 12: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (LY) .................................................................................................................. 26
Figure 13: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (TW) ................................................................................................................ 27
Figure 14: Thermal Measurement Point ......................................................................................................... 30
Figure 15: DDR3L 1.35V Input Signal .............................................................................................................. 52
Figure 16: Overshoot ..................................................................................................................................... 53
Figure 17: Undershoot ................................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 18: V IX for Differential Signals .............................................................................................................. 54
Figure 19: Single-Ended Requirements for Differential Signals ........................................................................ 54
Figure 20: Definition of Differential AC-Swing and tDVAC ............................................................................... 55
Figure 21: Nominal Slew Rate Definition for Single-Ended Input Signals .......................................................... 57
Figure 22: DDR3L 1.35V Nominal Differential Input Slew Rate Definition for DQS, DQS# and CK, CK# .............. 58
Figure 23: ODT Levels and I-V Characteristics ................................................................................................ 59
Figure 24: ODT Timing Reference Load .......................................................................................................... 62
Figure 25: tAON and tAOF Definitions ............................................................................................................ 63
Figure 26: tAONPD and tAOFPD Definitions ................................................................................................... 63
Figure 27: tADC Definition ............................................................................................................................. 64
Figure 28: Output Driver ................................................................................................................................ 65
Figure 29: DQ Output Signal .......................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 30: Differential Output Signal .............................................................................................................. 73
Figure 31: Reference Output Load for AC Timing and Output Slew Rate ........................................................... 74
Figure 32: Nominal Slew Rate Definition for Single-Ended Output Signals ....................................................... 75
Figure 33: Nominal Differential Output Slew Rate Definition for DQS, DQS# .................................................... 76
Figure 34: Nominal Slew Rate and tVAC for tIS (Command and Address – Clock) ............................................. 105
Figure 35: Nominal Slew Rate for tIH (Command and Address – Clock) ........................................................... 106
Figure 36: Tangent Line for tIS (Command and Address – Clock) .................................................................... 107
Figure 37: Tangent Line for tIH (Command and Address – Clock) .................................................................... 108
Figure 38: Nominal Slew Rate and tVAC for tDS (DQ – Strobe) ......................................................................... 113
Figure 39: Nominal Slew Rate for tDH (DQ – Strobe) ...................................................................................... 114
Figure 40: Tangent Line for tDS (DQ – Strobe) ................................................................................................ 115
Figure 41: Tangent Line for tDH (DQ – Strobe) ............................................................................................... 116
Figure 42: Refresh Mode ............................................................................................................................... 123
Figure 43: DLL Enable Mode to DLL Disable Mode ........................................................................................ 125
Figure 44: DLL Disable Mode to DLL Enable Mode ........................................................................................ 126
Figure 45: DLL Disable tDQSCK .................................................................................................................... 127
Figure 46: Change Frequency During Precharge Power-Down ........................................................................ 129
Figure 47: Write Leveling Concept ................................................................................................................. 130
Figure 48: Write Leveling Sequence ............................................................................................................... 133
Figure 49: Write Leveling Exit Procedure ....................................................................................................... 134
Figure 50: Initialization Sequence ................................................................................................................. 136
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
6
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
Figure 51: V DD Voltage Switching .................................................................................................................. 138
Figure 52: MRS to MRS Command Timing ( tMRD) ......................................................................................... 139
Figure 53: MRS to nonMRS Command Timing ( tMOD) .................................................................................. 140
Figure 54: Mode Register 0 (MR0) Definitions ................................................................................................ 141
Figure 55: READ Latency .............................................................................................................................. 144
Figure 56: Mode Register 1 (MR1) Definition ................................................................................................. 145
Figure 57: READ Latency (AL = 5, CL = 6) ....................................................................................................... 148
Figure 58: Mode Register 2 (MR2) Definition ................................................................................................. 149
Figure 59: CAS WRITE Latency ...................................................................................................................... 149
Figure 60: Mode Register 3 (MR3) Definition ................................................................................................. 151
Figure 61: Multipurpose Register (MPR) Block Diagram ................................................................................. 152
Figure 62: MPR System Read Calibration with BL8: Fixed Burst Order Single Readout ..................................... 155
Figure 63: MPR System Read Calibration with BL8: Fixed Burst Order, Back-to-Back Readout .......................... 156
Figure 64: MPR System Read Calibration with BC4: Lower Nibble, Then Upper Nibble .................................... 157
Figure 65: MPR System Read Calibration with BC4: Upper Nibble, Then Lower Nibble .................................... 158
Figure 66: ZQ CALIBRATION Timing (ZQCL and ZQCS) ................................................................................. 160
Figure 67: Example: Meeting tRRD (MIN) and tRCD (MIN) ............................................................................. 161
Figure 68: Example: tFAW ............................................................................................................................. 162
Figure 69: READ Latency .............................................................................................................................. 163
Figure 70: Consecutive READ Bursts (BL8) .................................................................................................... 165
Figure 71: Consecutive READ Bursts (BC4) .................................................................................................... 165
Figure 72: Nonconsecutive READ Bursts ....................................................................................................... 166
Figure 73: READ (BL8) to WRITE (BL8) .......................................................................................................... 166
Figure 74: READ (BC4) to WRITE (BC4) OTF .................................................................................................. 167
Figure 75: READ to PRECHARGE (BL8) .......................................................................................................... 167
Figure 76: READ to PRECHARGE (BC4) ......................................................................................................... 168
Figure 77: READ to PRECHARGE (AL = 5, CL = 6) ........................................................................................... 168
Figure 78: READ with Auto Precharge (AL = 4, CL = 6) ..................................................................................... 168
Figure 79: Data Output Timing – tDQSQ and Data Valid Window .................................................................... 170
Figure 80: Data Strobe Timing – READs ......................................................................................................... 171
Figure 81: Method for Calculating tLZ and tHZ ............................................................................................... 172
Figure 82: tRPRE Timing ............................................................................................................................... 172
Figure 83: tRPST Timing ............................................................................................................................... 173
Figure 84: tWPRE Timing .............................................................................................................................. 175
Figure 85: tWPST Timing .............................................................................................................................. 175
Figure 86: WRITE Burst ................................................................................................................................ 176
Figure 87: Consecutive WRITE (BL8) to WRITE (BL8) ..................................................................................... 177
Figure 88: Consecutive WRITE (BC4) to WRITE (BC4) via OTF ........................................................................ 177
Figure 89: Nonconsecutive WRITE to WRITE ................................................................................................. 178
Figure 90: WRITE (BL8) to READ (BL8) .......................................................................................................... 178
Figure 91: WRITE to READ (BC4 Mode Register Setting) ................................................................................. 179
Figure 92: WRITE (BC4 OTF) to READ (BC4 OTF) ........................................................................................... 180
Figure 93: WRITE (BL8) to PRECHARGE ........................................................................................................ 181
Figure 94: WRITE (BC4 Mode Register Setting) to PRECHARGE ...................................................................... 181
Figure 95: WRITE (BC4 OTF) to PRECHARGE ................................................................................................ 182
Figure 96: Data Input Timing ........................................................................................................................ 183
Figure 97: Self Refresh Entry/Exit Timing ...................................................................................................... 185
Figure 98: Active Power-Down Entry and Exit ................................................................................................ 189
Figure 99: Precharge Power-Down (Fast-Exit Mode) Entry and Exit ................................................................. 189
Figure 100: Precharge Power-Down (Slow-Exit Mode) Entry and Exit .............................................................. 190
Figure 101: Power-Down Entry After READ or READ with Auto Precharge (RDAP) ........................................... 190
Figure 102: Power-Down Entry After WRITE .................................................................................................. 191
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
7
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
Figure 103:
Figure 104:
Figure 105:
Figure 106:
Figure 107:
Figure 108:
Figure 109:
Figure 110:
Figure 111:
Figure 112:
Figure 113:
Figure 114:
Figure 115:
Figure 116:
Figure 117:
Figure 118:
Figure 119:
Figure 120:
Figure 121:
Figure 122:
Figure 123:
Power-Down Entry After WRITE with Auto Precharge (WRAP) ...................................................... 191
REFRESH to Power-Down Entry .................................................................................................. 192
ACTIVATE to Power-Down Entry ................................................................................................. 192
PRECHARGE to Power-Down Entry ............................................................................................. 193
MRS Command to Power-Down Entry ......................................................................................... 193
Power-Down Exit to Refresh to Power-Down Entry ....................................................................... 194
RESET Sequence ......................................................................................................................... 196
On-Die Termination ................................................................................................................... 197
Dynamic ODT: ODT Asserted Before and After the WRITE, BC4 .................................................... 203
Dynamic ODT: Without WRITE Command .................................................................................. 203
Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted Together with WRITE Command for 6 Clock Cycles, BL8 ............ 204
Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted with WRITE Command for 6 Clock Cycles, BC4 .......................... 205
Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted with WRITE Command for 4 Clock Cycles, BC4 .......................... 205
Synchronous ODT ...................................................................................................................... 207
Synchronous ODT (BC4) ............................................................................................................. 208
ODT During READs .................................................................................................................... 210
Asynchronous ODT Timing with Fast ODT Transition .................................................................. 212
Synchronous to Asynchronous Transition During Precharge Power-Down (DLL Off) Entry ............ 214
Asynchronous to Synchronous Transition During Precharge Power-Down (DLL Off) Exit ............... 216
Transition Period for Short CKE LOW Cycles with Entry and Exit Period Overlapping ..................... 218
Transition Period for Short CKE HIGH Cycles with Entry and Exit Period Overlapping ................... 218
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
8
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
List of Tables
Table 1: Key Timing Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 1
Table 2: Addressing ......................................................................................................................................... 2
Table 3: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 Ball Descriptions .............................................................................................. 18
Table 4: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 Ball Descriptions ................................................................................................. 20
Table 5: Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................................. 28
Table 6: DDR3L Input/Output Capacitance .................................................................................................... 29
Table 7: Thermal Characteristics .................................................................................................................... 30
Table 8: Thermal Impedance ......................................................................................................................... 31
Table 9: Timing Parameters Used for I DD Measurements – Clock Units ............................................................ 32
Table 10: IDD0 Measurement Loop .................................................................................................................. 33
Table 11: IDD1 Measurement Loop .................................................................................................................. 34
Table 12: IDD Measurement Conditions for Power-Down Currents ................................................................... 35
Table 13: IDD2N and IDD3N Measurement Loop ................................................................................................ 36
Table 14: IDD2NT Measurement Loop .............................................................................................................. 36
Table 15: IDD4R Measurement Loop ................................................................................................................ 37
Table 16: IDD4W Measurement Loop ............................................................................................................... 38
Table 17: IDD5B Measurement Loop ................................................................................................................ 39
Table 18: IDD Measurement Conditions for IDD6, IDD6ET, and IDD8 .................................................................... 40
Table 19: IDD7 Measurement Loop .................................................................................................................. 41
Table 20: IDD Maximum Limits Die Rev. E for 1.35/1.5V Operation ................................................................... 43
Table 21: IDD Maximum Limits Die Rev. N for 1.35V/1.5V Operation ................................................................ 44
Table 22: IDD Maximum Limits Die Rev. P for 1.35V/1.5V Operation ................................................................. 46
Table 23: DDR3L 1.35V DC Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions .............................................. 48
Table 24: DDR3L 1.35V DC Electrical Characteristics and Input Conditions ..................................................... 49
Table 25: DDR3L 1.35V Input Switching Conditions – Command and Address ................................................. 50
Table 26: DDR3L 1.35V Differential Input Operating Conditions (CK, CK# and DQS, DQS#) .............................. 51
Table 27: DDR3L Control and Address Pins ..................................................................................................... 53
Table 28: DDR3L 1.35V Clock, Data, Strobe, and Mask Pins ............................................................................. 53
Table 29: DDR3L 1.35V – Minimum Required Time tDVAC for CK/CK#, DQS/DQS# Differential for AC Ringback ...
55
Table 30: Single-Ended Input Slew Rate Definition .......................................................................................... 56
Table 31: DDR3L 1.35V Differential Input Slew Rate Definition ........................................................................ 58
Table 32: On-Die Termination DC Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................ 59
Table 33: 1.35V RTT Effective Impedance ........................................................................................................ 60
Table 34: ODT Sensitivity Definition .............................................................................................................. 61
Table 35: ODT Temperature and Voltage Sensitivity ........................................................................................ 61
Table 36: ODT Timing Definitions .................................................................................................................. 62
Table 37: DDR3L(1.35V) Reference Settings for ODT Timing Measurements .................................................... 62
Table 38: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver Impedance Characteristics ........................................................................... 66
Table 39: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver Pull-Up and Pull-Down Impedance Calculations ........................................... 67
Table 40: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver IOH/IOL Characteristics: V DD = V DDQ = DDR3L@1.35V ..................................... 67
Table 41: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver IOH/IOL Characteristics: V DD = V DDQ = DDR3L@1.45V ..................................... 67
Table 42: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver IOH/IOL Characteristics: V DD = V DDQ = DDR3L@1.283 ..................................... 68
Table 43: DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity Definition ........................................................................ 68
Table 44: DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Voltage and Temperature Sensitivity .................................................. 68
Table 45: DDR3L 40 Ohm Driver Impedance Characteristics ........................................................................... 69
Table 46: DDR3L 40 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity Definition ........................................................................ 69
Table 47: 40 Ohm Output Driver Voltage and Temperature Sensitivity .............................................................. 70
Table 48: DDR3L Single-Ended Output Driver Characteristics ......................................................................... 71
Table 49: DDR3L Differential Output Driver Characteristics ............................................................................ 72
Table 50: DDR3L Differential Output Driver Characteristics V OX(AC) ................................................................. 73
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
9
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Description
Table 51:
Table 52:
Table 53:
Table 54:
Table 55:
Table 56:
Table 57:
Table 58:
Table 59:
Table 60:
Table 61:
Table 62:
Table 63:
Table 64:
Table 65:
Table 66:
Table 67:
Table 68:
Table 69:
Table 70:
Table 71:
Table 72:
Table 73:
Table 74:
Table 75:
Table 76:
Table 77:
Table 78:
Table 79:
Table 80:
Table 81:
Table 82:
Table 83:
Table 84:
Table 85:
Table 86:
Table 87:
Table 88:
Table 89:
Table 90:
Table 91:
Table 92:
Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Definition ....................................................................................... 74
Differential Output Slew Rate Definition .......................................................................................... 76
DDR3L-1066 Speed Bins .................................................................................................................. 77
DDR3L-1333 Speed Bins .................................................................................................................. 78
DDR3L-1600 Speed Bins .................................................................................................................. 79
DDR3L-1866 Speed Bins .................................................................................................................. 80
DDR3L-2133 Speed Bins .................................................................................................................. 81
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions .................................................................... 82
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions .................................... 92
DDR3L Command and Address Setup and Hold Values 1 V/ns Referenced – AC/DC-Based ............... 102
DDR3L-800/1066 Derating Values tIS/tIH – AC160/DC90-Based ....................................................... 103
DDR3L-800/1066/1333/1600 Derating Values for tIS/tIH – AC135/DC90-Based ................................ 103
DDR3L-1866/2133 Derating Values for tIS/tIH – AC125/DC90-Based ................................................ 103
DDR3L Minimum Required Time tVAC Above V IH(AC) (Below V IL[AC]) for Valid ADD/CMD Transition . 104
DDR3L Data Setup and Hold Values at 1 V/ns (DQS, DQS# at 2 V/ns) – AC/DC-Based ....................... 109
DDR3L Derating Values for tDS/tDH – AC160/DC90-Based .............................................................. 110
DDR3L Derating Values for tDS/tDH – AC135/DC90-Based .............................................................. 110
DDR3L Derating Values for tDS/tDH – AC130/DC90-Based at 2V/ns ................................................. 111
DDR3L Minimum Required Time tVAC Above V IH(AC) (Below V IL(AC)) for Valid DQ Transition ............. 112
Truth Table – Command ................................................................................................................. 117
Truth Table – CKE .......................................................................................................................... 119
READ Command Summary ............................................................................................................ 121
WRITE Command Summary .......................................................................................................... 121
READ Electrical Characteristics, DLL Disable Mode ......................................................................... 127
Write Leveling Matrix ..................................................................................................................... 131
Burst Order .................................................................................................................................... 142
MPR Functional Description of MR3 Bits ........................................................................................ 152
MPR Readouts and Burst Order Bit Mapping ................................................................................... 153
Self Refresh Temperature and Auto Self Refresh Description ............................................................ 186
Self Refresh Mode Summary ........................................................................................................... 186
Command to Power-Down Entry Parameters .................................................................................. 187
Power-Down Modes ....................................................................................................................... 188
Truth Table – ODT (Nominal) ......................................................................................................... 198
ODT Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 198
Write Leveling with Dynamic ODT Special Case .............................................................................. 200
Dynamic ODT Specific Parameters ................................................................................................. 201
Mode Registers for RTT,nom ............................................................................................................. 201
Mode Registers for RTT(WR) ............................................................................................................. 202
Timing Diagrams for Dynamic ODT ................................................................................................ 202
Synchronous ODT Parameters ........................................................................................................ 207
Asynchronous ODT Timing Parameters for All Speed Bins ............................................................... 212
ODT Parameters for Power-Down (DLL Off) Entry and Exit Transition Period ................................... 214
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
10
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
State Diagram
State Diagram
Figure 2: Simplified State Diagram
CKE L
Power
applied
MRS, MPR,
write
leveling
Initialization
Reset
procedure
Power
on
Self
refresh
SRE
ZQCL
From any
state
RESET
ZQ
calibration
MRS
SRX
REF
ZQCL/ZQCS
Refreshing
Idle
PDE
ACT
PDX
Active
powerdown
Precharge
powerdown
Activating
PDX
CKE L
CKE L
PDE
Bank
active
WRITE
WRITE
READ
WRITE AP
Writing
READ
READ AP
READ
WRITE
WRITE AP
Reading
READ AP
WRITE AP
READ AP
PRE, PREA
Writing
PRE, PREA
PRE, PREA
Reading
Precharging
Automatic
sequence
Command
sequence
ACT = ACTIVATE
MPR = Multipurpose register
MRS = Mode register set
PDE = Power-down entry
PDX = Power-down exit
PRE = PRECHARGE
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
PREA = PRECHARGE ALL
READ = RD, RDS4, RDS8
READ AP = RDAP, RDAPS4, RDAPS8
REF = REFRESH
RESET = START RESET PROCEDURE
SRE = Self refresh entry
11
SRX = Self refresh exit
WRITE = WR, WRS4, WRS8
WRITE AP = WRAP, WRAPS4, WRAPS8
ZQCL = ZQ LONG CALIBRATION
ZQCS = ZQ SHORT CALIBRATION
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Functional Description
Functional Description
DDR3 SDRAM uses a double data rate architecture to achieve high-speed operation.
The double data rate architecture is an 8n-prefetch architecture with an interface designed to transfer two data words per clock cycle at the I/O pins. A single read or write
operation for the DDR3 SDRAM effectively consists of a single 8n-bit-wide, four-clockcycle data transfer at the internal DRAM core and eight corresponding n-bit-wide, onehalf-clock-cycle data transfers at the I/O pins.
The differential data strobe (DQS, DQS#) is transmitted externally, along with data, for
use in data capture at the DDR3 SDRAM input receiver. DQS is center-aligned with data
for WRITEs. The read data is transmitted by the DDR3 SDRAM and edge-aligned to the
data strobes.
The DDR3 SDRAM operates from a differential clock (CK and CK#). The crossing of CK
going HIGH and CK# going LOW is referred to as the positive edge of CK. Control, command, and address signals are registered at every positive edge of CK. Input data is registered on the first rising edge of DQS after the WRITE preamble, and output data is referenced on the first rising edge of DQS after the READ preamble.
Read and write accesses to the DDR3 SDRAM are burst-oriented. Accesses start at a selected location and continue for a programmed number of locations in a programmed
sequence. Accesses begin with the registration of an ACTIVATE command, which is then
followed by a READ or WRITE command. The address bits registered coincident with
the ACTIVATE command are used to select the bank and row to be accessed. The address bits registered coincident with the READ or WRITE commands are used to select
the bank and the starting column location for the burst access.
The device uses a READ and WRITE BL8 and BC4. An auto precharge function may be
enabled to provide a self-timed row precharge that is initiated at the end of the burst
access.
As with standard DDR SDRAM, the pipelined, multibank architecture of DDR3 SDRAM
allows for concurrent operation, thereby providing high bandwidth by hiding row precharge and activation time.
A self refresh mode is provided, along with a power-saving, power-down mode.
Industrial Temperature
The industrial temperature (IT) device requires that the case temperature not exceed
–40°C or 95°C. JEDEC specifications require the refresh rate to double when T C exceeds
85°C; this also requires use of the high-temperature self refresh option. Additionally,
ODT resistance and the input/output impedance must be derated when T C is < 0°C or
>95°C.
General Notes
• The functionality and the timing specifications discussed in this data sheet are for the
DLL enable mode of operation (normal operation).
• Throughout this data sheet, various figures and text refer to DQs as “DQ.” DQ is to be
interpreted as any and all DQ collectively, unless specifically stated otherwise.
• The terms “DQS” and “CK” found throughout this data sheet are to be interpreted as
DQS, DQS# and CK, CK# respectively, unless specifically stated otherwise.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
12
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Functional Description
• Complete functionality may be described throughout the document; any page or diagram may have been simplified to convey a topic and may not be inclusive of all requirements.
• Any specific requirement takes precedence over a general statement.
• Any functionality not specifically stated is considered undefined, illegal, and not supported, and can result in unknown operation.
• Row addressing is denoted as A[n:0]. For example, 1Gb: n = 12 (x16); 1Gb: n = 13 (x4,
x8); 2Gb: n = 13 (x16) and 2Gb: n = 14 (x4, x8); 4Gb: n = 14 (x16); and 4Gb: n = 15 (x4,
x8).
• Dynamic ODT has a special use case: when DDR3 devices are architected for use in a
single rank memory array, the ODT ball can be wired HIGH rather than routed. Refer
to the Dynamic ODT Special Use Case section.
• A x16 device's DQ bus is comprised of two bytes. If only one of the bytes needs to be
used, use the lower byte for data transfers and terminate the upper byte as noted:
–
–
–
–
Connect UDQS to ground via 1kΩ* resistor.
Connect UDQS# to V DD via 1kΩ* resistor.
Connect UDM to V DD via 1kΩ* resistor.
Connect DQ[15:8] individually to either V SS, V DD, or V REF via 1kΩ resistors,* or float
DQ[15:8].
*If ODT is used, 1kΩ resistor should be changed to 4x that of the selected ODT.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
13
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Functional Block Diagrams
Functional Block Diagrams
DDR3 SDRAM is a high-speed, CMOS dynamic random access memory. It is internally
configured as an 8-bank DRAM.
Figure 3: 1 Gig x 4 Functional Block Diagram
ODT
control
ODT
ZQ
RZQ
ZQCL, ZQCS
CKE
VSSQ
To pull-up/pull-down
networks
ZQ CAL
RESET#
Control
logic
A12
CK, CK#
VDDQ/2
BC4 (burst chop)
Command
decode
CS#
RAS#
CAS#
WE#
Bank 7
Bank 6
Bank 5
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
OTF
Mode registers
Refresh
counter
19
Columns 0, 1, and 2
Bank 7
Bank 6
Bank 5
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
16
16
Bank 0
rowaddress
latch
and
decoder
65,536
DLL
(1 . . . 4)
Bank 0
memory
array
(65,536 x 256 x 32)
32
READ
FIFO
and
data
MUX
4
DQ[3:0]
READ
drivers
BC4
RTT,nom
8,192
BC4
OTF
A[15:0]
BA[2:0]
19
Address
register
3
sw1
sw2
DM
(1, 2)
Columnaddress
counter/
latch
DQS, DQS#
VDDQ/2
32
Data
interface
Column
decoder
4
Data
WRITE
drivers
and
input
logic
8
RTT,nom
sw1
RTT(WR)
sw2
DM
3
Columns 0, 1, and 2
CK, CK#
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
RTT(WR)
Bank
control
logic
256
(x32)
11
DQ[3:0]
DQS, DQS#
VDDQ/2
32
I/O gating
DM mask logic
sw2
sw1
Sense amplifiers
3
RTT(WR)
CK, CK#
16
Rowaddress
MUX
RTT,nom
14
Column 2
(select upper or
lower nibble for BC4)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Functional Block Diagrams
Figure 4: 512 Meg x 8 Functional Block Diagram
ODT
control
ODT
ZQ
RZQ
Control
logic
CKE
VSSQ
To ODT/output drivers
ZQ CAL
RESET#
ZQCL, ZQCS
A12
VDDQ/2
CK, CK#
BC4 (burst chop)
Command
decode
CS#
RAS#
CAS#
WE#
Bank 7
Bank 6
Bank 5
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
OTF
Mode registers
Refresh
counter
CK, CK#
sw1
(1 . . . 8)
19
Bank 0
Memory
array
(65,536 x 128 x 64)
Bank 0
rowaddress
65,536
latch
and
decoder
16
16
Sense amplifiers
sw2
DLL
16
Rowaddress
MUX
64
DQ8
READ
FIFO
and
data
MUX
8
19
Address
register
DQ[7:0]
DQS, DQS#
VDDQ/2
64
BC4
OTF
RTT,nom
sw1
RTT(WR)
sw2
I/O gating
DM mask logic
3
A[15:0]
BA[2:0]
TDQS#
DQ[7:0]
Read
drivers
BC4
8,192
RTT(WR)
RTT,nom
Columns 0, 1, and 2
Bank 7
Bank 6
Bank 5
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
(1, 2)
Bank
control
logic
3
VDDQ/2
(128
x64)
64
8
Data
interface
Data
Column
decoder
Columnaddress
counter/
latch
10
DQS/DQS#
Write
drivers
and
input
logic
RTT,nom
sw1
RTT(WR)
sw2
7
DM/TDQS
(shared pin)
3
Columns 0, 1, and 2
CK, CK#
Column 2
(select upper or
lower nibble for BC4)
Figure 5: 256 Meg x 16 Functional Block Diagram
ODT
control
ODT
ZQ
RZQ
ZQ CAL
RESET#
Control
logic
CKE
VSSQ
To ODT/output drivers
ZQCL, ZQCS
A12
VDDQ/2
CK, CK#
BC4 (burst chop)
Command
decode
CS#
RAS#
CAS#
WE#
Bank 7
Bank 6
Bank 5
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
OTF
Mode registers
Refresh
counter
18
Bank 7
Bank 6
Bank 5
Bank 4
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
15
15
Bank 0
rowaddress
latch
and
decoder
32,768
DLL
(1 . . . 16)
128
READ
FIFO
and
data
MUX
16
DQ[15:0]
READ
drivers
LDQS, LDQS#, UDQS, UDQS#
BC4
128
18
Address
register
3
sw2
LDQS, LDQS#
Bank
control
logic
(1 . . . 4)
Columnaddress
counter/
latch
UDQS, UDQS#
VDDQ/2
128
Data
interface
Column
decoder
16
Data
WRITE
drivers
and
input
logic
RTT,nom
sw1
RTT(WR)
sw2
7
(1, 2)
LDM/UDM
3
Columns 0, 1, and 2
CK, CK#
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
RTT(WR)
I/O gating
DM mask logic
(128
x128)
10
RTT,nom
sw1
BC4
OTF
3
DQ[15:0]
VDDQ/2
Sense amplifiers
A[14:0]
BA[2:0]
sw2
sw1
Bank 0
memory
array
(32,768 x 128 x 128)
16,384
RTT(WR)
CK, CK#
13
Rowaddress
MUX
RTT,nom
Column 0, 1, and 2
15
Column 2
(select upper or
lower nibble for BC4)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Figure 6: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (Top View)
1
2
3
VSS
VDD
VSS
VDDQ
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
NF, NF/TDQS#
VSS
VDD
VSSQ
DQ0
DM, DM/TDQS
VSSQ
VDDQ
DQ2
DQS
DQ1
DQ3
VSSQ
NF, DQ6 DQS#
VDD
VSS
VSSQ
A
B
C
D
VSSQ
E
VREFDQ
NF, DQ7 NF, DQ5
VDDQ NF, DQ4
VDDQ
F
NC
VSS
RAS#
CK
VSS
NC
ODT
VDD
CAS#
CK#
VDD
CKE
NC
CS#
WE#
A10/AP
ZQ
NC
VSS
BA0
BA2
A15
VREFCA
VSS
VDD
A3
A0
A12/BC#
BA1
VDD
VSS
A5
A2
A1
A4
VSS
VDD
A7
A9
A11
A6
VDD
VSS
RESET#
A13
A14
A8
VSS
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Ball descriptions listed in Table 3 (page 18) are listed as “x4, x8” if unique; otherwise,
x4 and x8 are the same.
2. A comma separates the configuration; a slash defines a selectable function.
Example D7 = NF, NF/TDQS#. NF applies to the x4 configuration only. NF/TDQS# applies
to the x8 configuration only—selectable between NF or TDQS# via MRS (symbols are defined in Table 3).
16
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Figure 7: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (Top View)
1
2
3
VDDQ
DQ13
VSSQ
4
5
6
7
8
9
DQ15
DQ12
VDDQ
VSS
VDD
VSS
UDQS#
DQ14
VSSQ
VDDQ
DQ11
DQ9
UDQS
DQ10
VDDQ
VSSQ
VDDQ
UDM
DQ8
VSSQ
VDD
VSS
VSSQ
DQ0
LDM
VSSQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQ2
LDQS
DQ1
DQ3
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ6
LDQS#
VDD
VSS
VSSQ
VREFDQ
VDDQ
DQ4
DQ7
DQ5
VDDQ
NC
VSS
RAS#
CK
VSS
NC
ODT
VDD
CAS#
CK#
VDD
CKE
NC
CS#
WE#
A10/AP
ZQ
NC
VSS
BA0
BA2
NC
VREFCA
VSS
VDD
A3
A0
A12/BC#
BA1
VDD
VSS
A5
A2
A1
A4
VSS
VDD
A7
A9
A11
A6
VDD
VSS
RESET#
A13
A14
A8
VSS
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
T
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Ball descriptions listed in Table 4 (page 20) are listed as “x4, x8” if unique; otherwise,
x4 and x8 are the same.
2. A comma separates the configuration; a slash defines a selectable function.
Example D7 = NF, NF/TDQS#. NF applies to the x4 configuration only. NF/TDQS# applies
to the x8 configuration only—selectable between NF or TDQS# via MRS (symbols are defined in Table 3).
17
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Table 3: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 Ball Descriptions
Symbol
Type
Description
A[15:13], A12/BC#,
A11, A10/AP, A[9:0]
Input
Address inputs: Provide the row address for ACTIVATE commands, and the column
address and auto precharge bit (A10) for READ/WRITE commands, to select one
location out of the memory array in the respective bank. A10 sampled during a
PRECHARGE command determines whether the PRECHARGE applies to one bank
(A10 LOW, bank selected by BA[2:0]) or all banks (A10 HIGH). The address inputs also
provide the op-code during a LOAD MODE command. Address inputs are referenced
to VREFCA. A12/BC#: When enabled in the mode register (MR), A12 is sampled during
READ and WRITE commands to determine whether burst chop (on-the-fly) will be
performed (HIGH = BL8 or no burst chop, LOW = BC4). See Table 70 (page 117).
BA[2:0]
Input
Bank address inputs: BA[2:0] define the bank to which an ACTIVATE, READ,
WRITE, or PRECHARGE command is being applied. BA[2:0] define which mode
register (MR0, MR1, MR2, or MR3) is loaded during the LOAD MODE command.
BA[2:0] are referenced to VREFCA.
CK, CK#
Input
Clock: CK and CK# are differential clock inputs. All control and address input signals
are sampled on the crossing of the positive edge of CK and the negative edge of
CK#. Output data strobe (DQS, DQS#) is referenced to the crossings of CK and CK#.
CKE
Input
Clock enable: CKE enables (registered HIGH) and disables (registered LOW)
internal circuitry and clocks on the DRAM. The specific circuitry that is enabled/
disabled is dependent upon the DDR3 SDRAM configuration and operating mode.
Taking CKE LOW provides PRECHARGE POWER-DOWN and SELF REFRESH operations
(all banks idle), or active power-down (row active in any bank). CKE is synchronous
for power-down entry and exit and for self refresh entry. CKE is asynchronous for
self refresh exit. Input buffers (excluding CK, CK#, CKE, RESET#, and ODT) are
disabled during POWER-DOWN. Input buffers (excluding CKE and RESET#) are disabled during SELF REFRESH. CKE is referenced to VREFCA.
CS#
Input
Chip select: CS# enables (registered LOW) and disables (registered HIGH) the
command decoder. All commands are masked when CS# is registered HIGH. CS#
provides for external rank selection on systems with multiple ranks. CS# is considered
part of the command code. CS# is referenced to VREFCA.
DM
Input
Input data mask: DM is an input mask signal for write data. Input data is masked
when DM is sampled HIGH along with the input data during a write access.
Although the DM ball is input-only, the DM loading is designed to match that of the
DQ and DQS balls. DM is referenced to VREFDQ. DM has an optional use as TDQS on
the x8.
ODT
Input
On-die termination: ODT enables (registered HIGH) and disables (registered LOW)
termination resistance internal to the DDR3 SDRAM. When enabled in normal
operation, ODT is only applied to each of the following balls: DQ[7:0], DQS, DQS#,
and DM for the x8; DQ[3:0], DQS, DQS#, and DM for the x4. The ODT input is
ignored if disabled via the LOAD MODE command. ODT is referenced to VREFCA.
RAS#, CAS#, WE#
Input
Command inputs: RAS#, CAS#, and WE# (along with CS#) define the command
being entered and are referenced to VREFCA.
RESET#
Input
Reset: RESET# is an active LOW CMOS input referenced to VSS. The RESET# input receiver is a CMOS input defined as a rail-to-rail signal with DC HIGH ≥ 0.8 × VDD and
DC LOW ≤ 0.2 × VDDQ. RESET# assertion and desertion are asynchronous.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
18
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Table 3: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 Ball Descriptions (Continued)
Symbol
Type
DQ[3:0]
I/O
Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for the x4 configuration. DQ[3:0] are
referenced to VREFDQ.
DQ[7:0]
I/O
Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus for the x8 configuration. DQ[7:0] are
referenced to VREFDQ.
DQS, DQS#
I/O
Data strobe: Output with read data. Edge-aligned with read data. Input with write
data. Center-aligned to write data.
TDQS, TDQS#
Output
Termination data strobe: Applies to the x8 configuration only. When TDQS is
enabled, DM is disabled, and the TDQS and TDQS# balls provide termination
resistance.
VDD
Supply
Power supply: 1.5V ±0.075V.
VDDQ
Supply
DQ power supply: 1.5V ±0.075V. Isolated on the device for improved noise immunity.
VREFCA
Supply
Reference voltage for control, command, and address: VREFCA must be
maintained at all times (including self refresh) for proper device operation.
VREFDQ
Supply
Reference voltage for data: VREFDQ must be maintained at all times (excluding self
refresh) for proper device operation.
VSS
Supply
Ground.
VSSQ
Supply
DQ ground: Isolated on the device for improved noise immunity.
ZQ
Reference
NC
–
No connect: These balls should be left unconnected (the ball has no connection to
the DRAM or to other balls).
NF
–
No function: When configured as a x4 device, these balls are NF. When configured
as a x8 device, these balls are defined as TDQS#, DQ[7:4].
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Description
External reference ball for output drive calibration: This ball is tied to an
external 240Ω resistor (RZQ), which is tied to VSSQ.
19
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Table 4: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 Ball Descriptions
Symbol
Type
Description
A[14:13], A12/BC#,
A11, A10/AP, A[9:0]
Input
Address inputs: Provide the row address for ACTIVATE commands, and the column
address and auto precharge bit (A10) for READ/WRITE commands, to select one
location out of the memory array in the respective bank. A10 sampled during a
PRECHARGE command determines whether the PRECHARGE applies to one bank
(A10 LOW, bank selected by BA[2:0]) or all banks (A10 HIGH). The address inputs also
provide the op-code during a LOAD MODE command. Address inputs are referenced
to VREFCA. A12/BC#: When enabled in the mode register (MR), A12 is sampled during
READ and WRITE commands to determine whether burst chop (on-the-fly) will be
performed (HIGH = BL8 or no burst chop, LOW = BC4). See Table 70 (page 117).
BA[2:0]
Input
Bank address inputs: BA[2:0] define the bank to which an ACTIVATE, READ,
WRITE, or PRECHARGE command is being applied. BA[2:0] define which mode
register (MR0, MR1, MR2, or MR3) is loaded during the LOAD MODE command.
BA[2:0] are referenced to VREFCA.
CK, CK#
Input
Clock: CK and CK# are differential clock inputs. All control and address input signals
are sampled on the crossing of the positive edge of CK and the negative edge of
CK#. Output data strobe (DQS, DQS#) is referenced to the crossings of CK and CK#.
CKE
Input
Clock enable: CKE enables (registered HIGH) and disables (registered LOW) internal
circuitry and clocks on the DRAM. The specific circuitry that is enabled/disabled is dependent upon the DDR3 SDRAM configuration and operating mode. Taking CKE
LOW provides PRECHARGE POWER-DOWN and SELF REFRESH operations (all banks
idle),or active power-down (row active in any bank). CKE is synchronous for powerdown entry and exit and for self refresh entry. CKE is asynchronous for self refresh
exit. Input buffers (excluding CK, CK#, CKE, RESET#, and ODT) are disabled during
POWER-DOWN. Input buffers (excluding CKE and RESET#) are disabled during SELF
REFRESH. CKE is referenced to VREFCA.
CS#
Input
Chip select: CS# enables (registered LOW) and disables (registered HIGH) the
command decoder. All commands are masked when CS# is registered HIGH. CS# provides for external rank selection on systems with multiple ranks. CS# is considered
part of the command code. CS# is referenced to VREFCA.
LDM
Input
Input data mask: LDM is a lower-byte, input mask signal for write data. Lower-byte
input data is masked when LDM is sampled HIGH along with the input data during a
write access. Although the LDM ball is input-only, the LDM loading is
designed to match that of the DQ and DQS balls. LDM is referenced to VREFDQ.
ODT
Input
On-die termination: ODT enables (registered HIGH) and disables (registered LOW)
termination resistance internal to the DDR3 SDRAM. When enabled in normal
operation, ODT is only applied to each of the following balls: DQ[15:0], LDQS,
LDQS#, UDQS, UDQS#, LDM, and UDM for the x16; DQ0[7:0], DQS, DQS#, DM/TDQS,
and NF/TDQS# (when TDQS is enabled) for the x8; DQ[3:0], DQS, DQS#, and DM for
the x4. The ODT input is ignored if disabled via the LOAD MODE command. ODT is
referenced to VREFCA.
RAS#, CAS#, WE#
Input
Command inputs: RAS#, CAS#, and WE# (along with CS#) define the command
being entered and are referenced to VREFCA.
RESET#
Input
Reset: RESET# is an active LOW CMOS input referenced to VSS. The RESET# input receiver is a CMOS input defined as a rail-to-rail signal with DC HIGH ≥ 0.8 × VDD and
DC LOW ≤ 0.2 × VDDQ. RESET# assertion and desertion are asynchronous.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
20
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Ball Assignments and Descriptions
Table 4: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 Ball Descriptions (Continued)
Symbol
Type
UDM
Input
DQ[7:0]
I/O
Data input/output: Lower byte of bidirectional data bus for the x16 configuration.
DQ[7:0] are referenced to VREFDQ.
DQ[15:8]
I/O
Data input/output: Upper byte of bidirectional data bus for the x16 configuration.
DQ[15:8] are referenced to VREFDQ.
LDQS, LDQS#
I/O
Lower byte data strobe: Output with read data. Edge-aligned with read data.
Input with write data. Center-aligned to write data.
UDQS, UDQS#
I/O
Upper byte data strobe: Output with read data. Edge-aligned with read data.
Input with write data. DQS is center-aligned to write data.
VDD
Supply
Power supply: 1.5V ±0.075V.
VDDQ
Supply
DQ power supply: 1.5V ±0.075V. Isolated on the device for improved noise immunity.
VREFCA
Supply
Reference voltage for control, command, and address: VREFCA must be
maintained at all times (including self refresh) for proper device operation.
VREFDQ
Supply
Reference voltage for data: VREFDQ must be maintained at all times (excluding self
refresh) for proper device operation.
VSS
Supply
Ground.
VSSQ
Supply
DQ ground: Isolated on the device for improved noise immunity.
ZQ
Reference
NC
–
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Description
Input data mask: UDM is an upper-byte, input mask signal for write data. Upperbyte input data is masked when UDM is sampled HIGH along with that input data
during a WRITE access. Although the UDM ball is input-only, the UDM loading is
designed to match that of the DQ and DQS balls. UDM is referenced to VREFDQ.
External reference ball for output drive calibration: This ball is tied to an
external 240Ω resistor (RZQ), which is tied to VSSQ.
No connect: These balls should be left unconnected (the ball has no connection to
the DRAM or to other balls).
21
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Package Dimensions
Figure 8: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (RH)
0.155
Seating plane
A
78X Ø0.45
Dimensions apply
to solder balls postreflow on Ø0.35 SMD
ball pads.
0.12 A
1.8 CTR
Nonconductive
overmold
Ball A1 ID
(covered by SR)
9
8
7
3
2
Ball A1 ID
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
10.5 ±0.1
G
9.6 CTR
H
J
K
L
M
N
0.8 TYP
0.8 TYP
1.1 ±0.1
6.4 CTR
0.25 MIN
9 ±0.1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
2. Solder ball material: SAC305 (96.5% Sn, 3% Ag, 0.5% Cu).
22
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 9: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (RG)
0.155
Seating plane
A
0.12 A
1.8 CTR
nonconductive
overmold
78X Ø0.47
Dimensions apply
to solder balls postreflow on Ø0.42 SMD
ball pads.
Ball A1 ID
(covered by SR)
9 8 7
Ball A1 ID
3 2 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
10.6 ±0.1
9.6 CTR
0.8 TYP
1.1 ±0.1
0.8 TYP
6.4 CTR
0.25 MIN
7.5 ±0.1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
2. Solder ball material: SAC302 (96.8% Sn, 3% Ag, 0.2% Cu).
23
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 10: 78-Ball FBGA – x4, x8 (DA)
0.155
Seating plane
A
0.12 A
1.8 CTR
Nonconductive
overmold
78X Ø0.47
Dimensions apply
to solder balls postreflow on Ø0.42 SMD
ball pads.
Ball A1 ID
(covered by SR)
9 8 7
Ball A1 ID
3 2 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
10.5 ±0.1
9.6 CTR
0.8 TYP
1.1 ±0.1
0.8 TYP
6.4 CTR
0.29 MIN
8 ±0.1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
2. Solder ball material: SAC302 (96.8% Sn, 3% Ag, 0.2% Cu).
24
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 11: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (HA)
0.155
Seating plane
1.8 CTR
Nonconductive
overmold
96X Ø0.45
Dimensions
apply to solder
balls post-reflow
on Ø0.35 SMD
ball pads.
9
8
7
3
A
2
0.12 A
Ball A1 Index
(covered by SR)
1
Ball A1 Index
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
12 CTR
J
14 ±0.1
K
L
M
N
P
R
0.8 TYP
T
0.8 TYP
1.1 ±0.1
6.4 CTR
0.25 MIN
9 ±0.1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
2. Solder ball material: SAC305 (96.5% Sn, 3% Ag, 0.5% Cu).
25
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 12: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (LY)
0.155
Seating plane
A
0.12 A
1.8 CTR
Nonconductive
overmold
96X Ø0.47
Dimensions apply
to solder balls postreflow on Ø0.42
SMD ball pads.
Ball A1 ID
(covered by SR)
9 8 7
Ball A1 ID
3 2 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
T
13.5 ±0.1
12 CTR
0.8 TYP
1.1 ±0.1
0.8 TYP
6.4 CTR
0.29 MIN
7.5 ±0.1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
2. Solder ball material: SAC302 (96.8% Sn, 3% Ag, 0.2% Cu).
26
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Package Dimensions
Figure 13: 96-Ball FBGA – x16 (TW)
0.155
Seating plane
0.12 A
A
1.8 CTR
Nonconductive
overmold
96X Ø0.47
Dimensions apply
to solder balls postreflow on Ø0.42 SMD
ball pads.
Ball A1 ID
(covered by SR)
9 8 7
Ball A1 ID
3 2 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
T
14 ±0.1
12 CTR
0.8 TYP
1.1 ±0.1
0.8 TYP
6.4 CTR
0.34 ±0.05
8 ±0.1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. All dimensions are in millimeters.
2. Material composition: Pb-free SAC302 (96.8% Sn, 3% Ag, 0.2% Cu).
27
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Absolute Ratings
Stresses greater than those listed may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a
stress rating only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions outside those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may adversely affect reliability.
Table 5: Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
1
VDD
VDD supply voltage relative to VSS
–0.4
1.975
V
VDDQ
VDD supply voltage relative to VSSQ
–0.4
1.975
V
VIN, VOUT
Voltage on any pin relative to VSS
–0.4
1.975
V
0
95
°C
2, 3
Operating case temperature – Industrial
–40
95
°C
2, 3
Storage temperature
–55
150
°C
TC
TSTG
Operating case temperature – Commercial
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. VDD and VDDQ must be within 300mV of each other at all times, and VREF must not be
greater than 0.6 × VDDQ. When VDD and VDDQ are <500mV, VREF can be ≤300mV.
2. MAX operating case temperature. TC is measured in the center of the package.
3. Device functionality is not guaranteed if the DRAM device exceeds the maximum TC during operation.
28
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications
Input/Output Capacitance
Table 6: DDR3L Input/Output Capacitance
Note 1 applies to the entire table
DDR3L
-800
Capacitance
DDR3L
-1066
DDR3L
-1333
DDR3L
-1600
DDR3L
-1866
DDR3L
-2133
Parameters
Sym
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
CK and CK#
CCK
0.8
1.6
0.8
1.6
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.3
0.8
1.3
pF
ΔC: CK to CK#
CDCK
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
pF
CIO
1.4
2.5
1.4
2.5
1.4
2.3
1.4
2.2
1.4
2.1
1.4
2.1
pF
Single-end
I/O: DQ, DM
Differential
I/O: DQS,
DQS#, TDQS,
TDQS#
CIO
ΔC: DQS to
DQS#, TDQS,
TDQS#
CDDQS
ΔC: DQ to
DQS
Max Unit Notes
2
3
CDIO
Inputs (CTRL,
CMD, ADDR)
CI
ΔC: CTRL to
CK
CDI_CTRL
ΔC:
CMD_ADDR
to CK
CDI_CMD
ZQ pin
capacitance
CZQ
Reset pin
capacitance
CRE
1.4
2.5
1.4
2.5
1.4
2.3
1.4
2.2
1.4
2.1
1.4
2.1
0.0
0.2
0.0
0.2
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.15
pF
3
pF
–0.5
0.3
–0.5
0.3
–0.5
0.3
–0.5
0.3
–0.5
0.3
–0.5
0.3
0.75
1.3
0.75
1.3
0.75
1.3
0.75
1.2
0.75
1.2
0.75
1.2
–0.5
0.3
–0.5
0.3
–0.4
0.2
–0.4
0.2
–0.4
0.2
–0.4
0.2
–0.5
0.5
–0.5
0.5
–0.4
0.4
–0.4
0.4
–0.4
0.4
–0.4
0.4
pF
pF
pF
4
5
6
7
pF
_ADDR
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
–
3.0
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
pF
pF
1. VDD = 1.35V (1.283–1.45V), VDDQ = VDD, VREF = VSS, f = 100 MHz, TC = 25°C. VOUT(DC) = 0.5
× VDDQ, VOUT = 0.1V (peak-to-peak).
2. DM input is grouped with I/O pins, reflecting the fact that they are matched in loading.
3. Includes TDQS, TDQS#. CDDQS is for DQS vs. DQS# and TDQS vs. TDQS# separately.
4. CDIO = CIO(DQ) - 0.5 × (CIO(DQS) + CIO(DQS#)).
5. Excludes CK, CK#; CTRL = ODT, CS#, and CKE; CMD = RAS#, CAS#, and WE#; ADDR =
A[n:0], BA[2:0].
6. CDI_CTRL = CI(CTRL) - 0.5 × (CCK(CK) + CCK(CK#)).
7. CDI_CMD_ADDR = CI(CMD_ADDR) - 0.5 × (CCK(CK) + CCK(CK#)).
29
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Thermal Characteristics
Thermal Characteristics
Table 7: Thermal Characteristics
Notes 1–3 apply to entire table
Parameter
Operating temperature
Symbol
Value
Units
TC
0 to 85
°C
0 to 95
°C
Notes
4
1. MAX operating case temperature TC is measured in the center of the package, as shown
below.
2. A thermal solution must be designed to ensure that the device does not exceed the
maximum TC during operation.
3. Device functionality is not guaranteed if the device exceeds maximum TC during
operation.
4. If TC exceeds 85°C, the DRAM must be refreshed externally at 2x refresh, which is a 3.9μs
interval refresh rate. The use of self refresh temperature (SRT) or automatic self refresh
(ASR), must be enabled.
Notes:
Figure 14: Thermal Measurement Point
(L/2)
Tc test point
L
(W/2)
W
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
30
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Thermal Characteristics
Table 8: Thermal Impedance
Die Rev.
Package
78-ball
E
96-ball
78-ball
N
96-ball
78-ball
P
96-ball
Θ JA (°C/W)
Airflow =
0m/s
Θ JA (°C/W)
Airflow =
1m/s
Θ JA (°C/W)
Airflow =
2m/s
Θ JB (°C/W)
Θ JC (°C/W)
Low conductivity
63.7
49.6
44.0
N/A
4.0
High conductivity
42.3
35.7
32.9
29.7
N/A
Low conductivity
50.4
39.2
35.1
N/A
3.9
High conductivity
31.3
26.1
24.3
19.2
N/A
Low conductivity
61.7
47.6
42.6
N/A
5.7
High conductivity
40.6
33.4
31.2
19.1
N/A
Low conductivity
52.1
42.1
38.4
N/A
5.6
High conductivity
32.6
27.9
26.5
12.6
N/A
Low conductivity
88.3
70.6
64.1
N/A
10.8
High conductivity
56.5
48.4
45.7
25.5
N/A
Low conductivity
54.3
42.1
37.3
N/A
4.6
High conductivity
34.8
29.0
26.9
16.9
N/A
Substrate
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Thermal resistance data is based on a number of samples from multiple lots and should
be viewed as a typical number.
31
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
Within the following IDD measurement tables, the following definitions and conditions
are used, unless stated otherwise:
LOW: V IN ≤ V IL(AC)max; HIGH: V IN ≥ V IH(AC)min.
Midlevel: Inputs are V REF = V DD/2.
RON set to RZQ/7 (34Ω).
RTT,nom set to RZQ/6 (40Ω).
RTT(WR) set to RZQ/2 (120Ω).
QOFF is enabled in MR1.
ODT is enabled in MR1 (RTT,nom) and MR2 (RTT(WR)).
TDQS is disabled in MR1.
External DQ/DQS/DM load resistor is 25Ω to V DDQ/2.
Burst lengths are BL8 fixed.
AL equals 0 (except in IDD7).
IDD specifications are tested after the device is properly initialized.
Input slew rate is specified by AC parametric test conditions.
Optional ASR is disabled.
Read burst type uses nibble sequential (MR0[3] = 0).
Loop patterns must be executed at least once before current measurements begin.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Table 9: Timing Parameters Used for IDD Measurements – Clock Units
DDR3L
-800
IDD
Parameter
tCK
DDR3L
-1066
DDR3L
-1333
-25E
-25
-187E
-187
-15E
5-5-5
6-6-6
7-7-7
8-8-8
9-9-9
(MIN) IDD
2.5
1.875
DDR3L
-1600
-15
-125E
-125
DDR3L
-1866
DDR3L
-2133
-107
-093
10-10-10 10-10-10 11-11-11 13-13-13 14-14-14 Unit
1.5
1.25
1.07
0.938
ns
CL IDD
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
13
14
CK
tRCD
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
13
14
CK
20
21
27
28
33
34
38
39
45
50
CK
15
15
20
20
24
24
28
28
32
36
CK
tRC
(MIN) IDD
tRAS
tRP
(MIN) IDD
(MIN) IDD
(MIN)
tFAW
tRRD
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
13
14
CK
x4, x8
16
16
20
20
20
20
24
24
26
27
CK
x16
20
20
27
27
30
30
32
32
33
38
CK
x4, x8
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
CK
IDD
x16
4
4
6
6
5
5
6
6
6
7
CK
tRFC
1Gb
44
44
59
59
74
74
88
88
103
118
CK
2Gb
64
64
86
86
107
107
128
128
150
172
CK
4Gb
104
104
139
139
174
174
208
208
243
279
CK
8Gb
140
140
187
187
234
234
280
280
328
375
CK
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
32
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
0
0
–
0
0
0
–
2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
4
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
Data
0
0
A[2:0]
0
0
A[6:3]
0
0
A[9:7]
0
0
A[10]
0
0
A[15:11]
1
0
BA[2:0]
1
0
ODT
0
1
WE#
0
D
CAS#
ACT
1
RAS#
Command
0
CS#
Cycle
Number
SubLoop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 10: IDD0 Measurement Loop
Repeat cycles 1 through 4 until nRAS - 1; truncate if needed
nRAS
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
Repeat cycles 1 through 4 until nRC - 1; truncate if needed
Static HIGH
0
Toggling
PRE
nRC
ACT
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 1
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 4
Repeat cycles nRC + 1 through nRC + 4 until nRC - 1 + nRAS -1; truncate if needed
nRC + nRAS
PRE
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
Repeat cycles nRC + 1 through nRC + 4 until 2 × RC - 1; truncate if needed
1
2 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 1
2
4 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2
3
6 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 3
4
8 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4
5
10 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 5
6
12 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6
7
14 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 7
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel.
2. DM is LOW.
3. Only selected bank (single) active.
33
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
0
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
–
2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
4
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
Data2
A[2:0]
0
0
A[6:3]
0
0
A[9:7]
0
0
A[10]
0
0
A[15:11]
1
0
BA[2:0]
1
0
ODT
0
1
WE#
0
D
CAS#
ACT
1
RAS#
Command
0
CS#
Cycle
Number
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 11: IDD1 Measurement Loop
Repeat cycles 1 through 4 until nRCD - 1; truncate if needed
nRCD
RD
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000
Repeat cycles 1 through 4 until nRAS - 1; truncate if needed
nRAS
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
Repeat cycles 1 through 4 until nRC - 1; truncate if needed
Static HIGH
0
Toggling
PRE
nRC
ACT
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 1
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRC + 4
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
Repeat cycles nRC + 1 through nRC + 4 until nRC + nRCD - 1; truncate if needed
nRC + nRCD
RD
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
00110011
Repeat cycles nRC + 1 through nRC + 4 until nRC + nRAS - 1; truncate if needed
nRC + nRAS
PRE
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
Repeat cycle nRC + 1 through nRC + 4 until 2 × nRC - 1; truncate if needed
1
2 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 1
2
4 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2
3
6 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 3
4
8 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4
5
10 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 5
6
12 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6
7
14 × nRC
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 7
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1.
2.
3.
4.
DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel unless driven as required by the RD command.
DM is LOW.
Burst sequence is driven on each DQ signal by the RD command.
Only selected bank (single) active.
34
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
Table 12: IDD Measurement Conditions for Power-Down Currents
Name
IDD2P0 Precharge
Power-Down
Current (Slow Exit)1
IDD2P1 Precharge
Power-Down
Current (Fast Exit)1
IDD2Q Precharge
Quiet
Standby Current
IDD3P Active
Power-Down
Current
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Timing pattern
CKE
External clock
tCK
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
Toggling
Toggling
Toggling
Toggling
tCK
tRC
(MIN) IDD
N/A
tCK
(MIN) IDD
N/A
tCK
(MIN) IDD
N/A
tCK
(MIN) IDD
N/A
tRAS
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRCD
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRRD
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRC
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CL
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
AL
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CS#
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
Command inputs
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
Row/column addr
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
Bank addresses
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
DM
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Data I/O
Output buffer DQ, DQS
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled, off
Enabled, off
Enabled, off
Enabled, off
Burst length
8
8
8
8
Active banks
None
None
None
All
ODT2
Idle banks
All
All
All
None
Special notes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. MR0[12] defines DLL on/off behavior during precharge power-down only; DLL on (fast
exit, MR0[12] = 1) and DLL off (slow exit, MR0[12] = 0).
2. “Enabled, off” means the MR bits are enabled, but the signal is LOW.
35
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
Static HIGH
Toggling
Command
CS#
RAS#
CAS#
WE#
ODT
BA[2:0]
A[15:11]
A[10]
A[9:7]
A[6:3]
A[2:0]
Data
0
Cycle
Number
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 13: IDD2N and IDD3N Measurement Loop
0
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
1
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
2
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
1
4–7
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 1
2
8–11
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2
3
12–15
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 3
4
16–19
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4
5
20–23
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 5
6
24–27
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6
7
28–31
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 7
Notes:
1. DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel.
2. DM is LOW.
3. All banks closed during IDD2N; all banks open during IDD3N.
Static HIGH
Toggling
Command
CS#
RAS#
CAS#
WE#
ODT
BA[2:0]
A[15:11]
A[10]
A[9:7]
A[6:3]
A[2:0]
Data
0
Cycle
Number
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 14: IDD2NT Measurement Loop
0
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
1
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
2
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
1
4–7
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 1; ODT = 0
2
8–11
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2; ODT = 1
3
12–15
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 3; ODT = 1
4
16–19
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4; ODT = 0
5
20–23
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 5; ODT = 0
6
24–27
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6; ODT = 1
7
28–31
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 7; ODT = 1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel.
2. DM is LOW.
3. All banks closed.
36
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
A[2:0]
Data3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
2
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
4
RD
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
00110011
5
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
6
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
7
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
1
8–15
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 1
2
16–23
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2
3
24–31
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 3
4
32–39
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4
5
40–47
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 5
6
48–55
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6
7
56–63
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 7
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1.
2.
3.
4.
A[6:3]
1
0
A[9:7]
0
0
A[10]
1
1
A[15:11]
CAS#
0
D
BA[2:0]
RAS#
RD
1
ODT
CS#
0
WE#
Command
Static HIGH
Toggling
0
Cycle
Number
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 15: IDD4R Measurement Loop
DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel when not driving in burst sequence.
DM is LOW.
Burst sequence is driven on each DQ signal by the RD command.
All banks open.
37
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
A[2:0]
Data4
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
2
D#
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
4
WR
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
F
0
00110011
5
D
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
6
D#
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
7
D#
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
1
8–15
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 1
2
16–23
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2
3
24–31
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 3
4
32–39
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4
5
40–47
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 5
6
48–55
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6
7
56–63
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 7
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1.
2.
3.
4.
A[6:3]
0
0
A[9:7]
0
0
A[10]
1
1
A[15:11]
CAS#
0
D
BA[2:0]
RAS#
WR
1
ODT
CS#
0
WE#
Command
Static HIGH
Toggling
0
Cycle
Number
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 16: IDD4W Measurement Loop
DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel when not driving in burst sequence.
DM is LOW.
Burst sequence is driven on each DQ signal by the WR command.
All banks open.
38
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
0
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
–
2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
3
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
4
D#
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
Static HIGH
Toggling
1a
1b
5–8
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 1
1c
9–12
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 2
1d
13–16
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 3
1e
17–20
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 4
1f
21–24
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 5
1g
25–28
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 6
1h
29–32
Repeat sub-loop 1a, use BA[2:0] = 7
2
33–nRFC - 1
Repeat sub-loop 1a through 1h until nRFC - 1; truncate if needed
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Data
0
0
A[2:0]
0
0
A[6:3]
0
0
A[9:7]
0
0
A[10]
1
0
A[15:11]
0
0
BA[2:0]
0
1
ODT
0
D
WE#
REF
1
CAS#
Command
0
RAS#
Cycle
Number
0
CS#
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 17: IDD5B Measurement Loop
1. DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel.
2. DM is LOW.
39
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
Table 18: IDD Measurement Conditions for IDD6, IDD6ET, and IDD8
IDD Test
CKE
External clock
IDD6: Self Refresh Current
Normal Temperature Range
TC = 0°C to +85°C
IDD6ET: Self Refresh Current
Extended Temperature Range
TC = 0°C to +95°C
IDD8: Reset2
LOW
LOW
Midlevel
Off, CK and CK# = LOW
Off, CK and CK# = LOW
Midlevel
tCK
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRC
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRAS
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRCD
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRRD
N/A
N/A
N/A
tRC
N/A
N/A
N/A
CL
N/A
N/A
N/A
AL
N/A
N/A
N/A
CS#
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Command inputs
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Row/column addresses
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Bank addresses
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Data I/O
Midlevel
Midlevel
Midlevel
Output buffer DQ, DQS
Enabled
Enabled
Midlevel
Enabled, midlevel
Enabled, midlevel
Midlevel
Burst length
N/A
N/A
N/A
Active banks
N/A
N/A
None
Idle banks
N/A
N/A
All
SRT
Disabled (normal)
Enabled (extended)
N/A
ASR
Disabled
Disabled
N/A
ODT1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. “Enabled, midlevel” means the MR command is enabled, but the signal is midlevel.
2. During a cold boot RESET (initialization), current reading is valid after power is stable
and RESET has been LOW for 1ms; During a warm boot RESET (while operating), current
reading is valid after RESET has been LOW for 200ns + tRFC.
40
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
Command
CS#
RAS#
CAS#
WE#
ODT
BA[2:0]
A[15:11]
A[10]
A[9:7]
A[6:3]
A[2:0]
Data3
0
Cycle
Number
Sub-Loop
CKE
CK, CK#
Table 19: IDD7 Measurement Loop
0
ACT
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
1
RDA
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
00000000
2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
3
1
Static HIGH
nRRD
ACT
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
F
0
–
nRRD + 1
RDA
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
F
0
00110011
nRRD + 2
D
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
F
0
–
0
–
nRRD + 3
Repeat cycle nRRD + 2 until 2 × nRRD - 1
2
2 × nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 2
3
3 × nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 1, use BA[2:0] = 3
4 × nRRD
4
Toggling
Repeat cycle 2 until nRRD - 1
D
1
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
F
4 × nRRD + 1
Repeat cycle 4 × nRRD until nFAW - 1, if needed
5
nFAW
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 4
6
nFAW + nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 1, use BA[2:0] = 5
7
nFAW + 2 × nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 0, use BA[2:0] = 6
8
nFAW + 3 × nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 1, use BA[2:0] = 7
nFAW + 4 × nRRD
9
D
1
nFAW + 4 × nRRD + 1
10
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
F
0
–
Repeat cycle nFAW + 4 × nRRD until 2 × nFAW - 1, if needed
2 × nFAW
ACT
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
2 × nFAW + 1
RDA
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
F
0
00110011
2 × nFAW + 2
D
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
–
2 × nFAW + 3
11
0
Repeat cycle 2 × nFAW + 2 until 2 × nFAW + nRRD - 1
2 × nFAW + nRRD
ACT
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
–
2 × nFAW + nRRD + 1
RDA
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
00000000
2 × nFAW + nRRD + 2
D
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
–
2 × nFAW + nRRD + 3
Repeat cycle 2 × nFAW + nRRD + 2 until 2 × nFAW + 2 × nRRD - 1
12
2 × nFAW + 2 × nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 10, use BA[2:0] = 2
13
2 × nFAW + 3 × nRRD
Repeat sub-loop 11, use BA[2:0] = 3
14
2 × nFAW + 4 × nRRD
D
1
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
2 × nFAW + 4 × nRRD + 1
Repeat cycle 2 × nFAW + 4 × nRRD until 3 × nFAW - 1, if needed
3 × nFAW
Repeat sub-loop 10, use BA[2:0] = 4
15
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
41
–
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – I DD Specifications and Conditions
3 × nFAW + 4 × nRRD + 1
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1.
2.
3.
4.
Data3
A[6:3]
A[2:0]
19
3 × nFAW + 4 × nRRD
A[9:7]
3 × nFAW + 3 × nRRD
A[10]
18
A[15:11]
Repeat sub-loop 10, use BA[2:0] = 6
BA[2:0]
3 × nFAW + 2 × nRRD
ODT
17
WE#
Repeat sub-loop 11, use BA[2:0] = 5
CAS#
3 × nFAW + nRRD
RAS#
16
CS#
Cycle
Number
Command
Sub-Loop
CKE
Static HIGH
Toggling
CK, CK#
Table 19: IDD7 Measurement Loop (Continued)
0
–
Repeat sub-loop 11, use BA[2:0] = 7
D
1
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
Repeat cycle 3 × nFAW + 4 × nRRD until 4 × nFAW - 1, if needed
DQ, DQS, DQS# are midlevel unless driven as required by the RD command.
DM is LOW.
Burst sequence is driven on each DQ signal by the RD command.
AL = CL-1.
42
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications
Table 20: IDD Maximum Limits Die Rev. E for 1.35/1.5V Operation
Speed Bin
Symbol
Width
DDR3/3L
-1066
Operating current 0: One bank
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE
IDD0
x4, x8
44
47
55
62
mA
1, 2
x16
55
58
66
73
mA
1, 2
Operating current 1: One bank
ACTIVATE-to-READ-to-PRECHARGE
IDD1
x4
53
57
61
65
mA
1, 2
x8
59
62
66
70
mA
1, 2
Parameter
DDR3/3L
-1333
DDR3/3L
-1600
DDR3/3L
-1866
Units
Notes
x16
80
84
87
91
mA
1, 2
Precharge power-down current:
Slow exit
IDD2P0
All
18
18
18
18
mA
1, 2
Precharge power-down current:
Fast exit
IDD2P1
All
26
28
32
37
mA
1, 2
Precharge quiet standby current
IDD2Q
All
27
28
32
35
mA
1, 2
Precharge standby current
IDD2N
All
28
29
32
35
mA
1, 2
Precharge standby ODT current
IDD2NT
x4, x8
32
35
39
42
mA
1, 2
x16
35
39
42
45
mA
1, 2
Active power-down current
IDD3P
All
32
35
38
41
mA
1, 2
Active standby current
IDD3N
x4, x8
32
35
38
41
mA
1, 2
x16
41
45
47
49
mA
1, 2
x4
113
130
147
164
mA
1, 2
x8
123
140
157
174
mA
1, 2
x16
185
202
235
252
mA
1, 2
x4
87
103
118
133
mA
1, 2
x8
95
110
125
141
mA
1, 2
x16
137
152
171
190
mA
1, 2
Burst read operating current
IDD4R
Burst write operating current
IDD4W
Burst refresh current
IDD5B
All
224
228
235
242
mA
1, 2
Room temperature self refresh
IDD6
All
20
20
20
20
mA
1, 2, 3
Extended temperature self refresh
IDD6ET
All
25
25
25
25
mA
2, 4
All banks interleaved read current
IDD7
x4, x8
160
190
220
251
mA
1, 2
Reset current
IDD8
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
x16
198
217
243
274
mA
1, 2
All
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
mA
1, 2
TC = 85°C; SRT and ASR are disabled.
Enabling ASR could increase IDDx by up to an additional 2mA.
Restricted to TC (MAX) = 85°C.
TC = 85°C; ASR and ODT are disabled; SRT is enabled.
The IDD values must be derated (increased) on IT-option devices when operated outside
of the range 0°C ≤ TC ≤ +85°C:
5a. When TC < 0°C: IDD2P0, IDD2P1 and IDD3P must be derated by 4%; IDD4R and IDD4W must
be derated by 2%; and IDD6, IDD6ET and IDD7 must be derated by 7%.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
43
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications
5b. When TC > 85°C: IDD0, IDD1, IDD2N, IDD2NT, IDD2Q, IDD3N, IDD3P, IDD4R, IDD4W, and IDD5B
must be derated by 2%; IDD2Px must be derated by 30%.
Table 21: IDD Maximum Limits Die Rev. N for 1.35V/1.5V Operation
Speed Bin
Parameter
DDR3/3L DDR3/3L DDR3/3L DDR3/3L DDR3/3L
Units Notes
-1066
-1333
-1600
-1866
-2133
Symbol Width
Operating current 0: One bank
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE
IDD0
Operating current 1: One bank
ACTIVATE-to-READ-to-PRECHARGE
IDD1
x4, x8
42
45
47
49
51
mA
1, 2
x16
52
55
57
59
61
mA
1, 2
x4
50
53
56
59
62
mA
1, 2
x8
55
58
61
64
67
mA
1, 2
x16
75
78
81
84
87
mA
1, 2
Precharge power-down current: Slow exit
IDD2P0
All
8
8
8
8
8
mA
1, 2
Precharge power-down current: Fast exit
IDD2P1
All
10
12
14
16
18
mA
1, 2
Precharge quiet standby current
IDD2Q
All
20
22
24
26
28
mA
1, 2
Precharge standby current
IDD2N
All
20
22
24
26
28
mA
1, 2
Precharge standby ODT current
IDD2NT
x4, x8
24
26
28
30
32
mA
1, 2
x16
27
29
31
33
35
mA
1, 2
Active power-down current
IDD3P
All
22
24
26
28
30
mA
1, 2
Active standby current
IDD3N
x4, x8
26
28
30
32
34
mA
1, 2
x16
34
36
38
40
42
mA
1, 2
x4
65
75
85
95
105
mA
1, 2
x8
75
85
95
105
115
mA
1, 2
x16
135
145
155
165
175
mA
1, 2
x4
65
75
85
95
105
mA
1, 2
x8
75
85
95
105
115
mA
1, 2
x16
135
145
155
165
175
mA
1, 2
Burst read operating current
IDD4R
Burst write operating current
IDD4W
Burst refresh current
IDD5B
All
165
170
175
180
185
mA
1, 2
Room temperature self refresh
IDD6
All
12
12
12
12
12
mA
1, 2, 3
Extended temperature self refresh
IDD6ET
All
16
16
16
16
16
mA
All banks interleaved read current
IDD7
x4, x8
110
120
130
140
150
mA
Reset current
IDD8
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1.
2.
3.
4.
2, 4
1, 2
x16
170
180
190
200
210
mA
1, 2
All
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
IDD2P +
2mA
mA
1, 2
TC = 85°C; SRT and ASR are disabled.
Enabling ASR could increase IDDx by up to an additional 2mA.
Restricted to TC (MAX) = 85°C.
TC = 85°C; ASR and ODT are disabled; SRT is enabled.
44
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications
5. The IDD values must be derated (increased) on IT-option devices when operated outside
of the range 0°C ≤ TC ≤ 85°C:
5a. When TC < 0°C: IDD2P0, IDD2P1 and IDD3P must be derated by 4%; IDD4R and IDD4W must
be derated by 2%; and IDD6, IDD6ET and IDD7 must be derated by 7%.
5b. When TC > 85°C: IDD0, IDD1, IDD2N, IDD2NT, IDD2Q, IDD3N, IDD3P, IDD4R, IDD4W, and IDD5B
must be derated by 2%; IDD2Px must be derated by 30%.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
45
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications
Table 22: IDD Maximum Limits Die Rev. P for 1.35V/1.5V Operation
Speed Bin
Parameter
DDR3/3L
-1600
DDR3/3L
-1866
DDR3/3L
-2133
Symbol
Width
Operating current 0: One bank ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE
IDD0
x4, x8
28
29
TBD
X16
TBD
TBD
TBD
Operating current 1: One bank ACTIVATE-to-READ-to-PRECHARGE
IDD1
x4, x8
43
44
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
Precharge power-down current: Slow
exit
IDD2P0
Precharge power-down current: Fast
exit
IDD2P1
Precharge quiet standby current
IDD2Q
Precharge standby current
IDD2N
Precharge standby ODT current
IDD2NT
Active power-down current
IDD3P
Active standby current
IDD3N
Burst read operating current
IDD4R
Burst write operating current
IDD4W
Burst refresh current
IDD5B
Self refresh
IDD6
Extended temperature self refresh
All banks interleaved read current
Reset current
IDD7
IDD8
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
IDD6ET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All
10
11
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x8, x8
11
11
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
15
15
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
16
17
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
20
22
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4,x8
15
15
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
20
21
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
90
102
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
101
113
TBD
16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
152
152
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
All
15
15
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
All
23
23
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
x4, x8
130
146
TBD
x16
TBD
TBD
TBD
All
IDD2P + 2mA IDD2P + 2mA IDD2P + 2mA
Units
mA
mA
Notes
1, 2
1, 2
mA
1, 2
mA
1, 2
mA
1, 2
mA
1, 2
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2, 3
2, 4
1, 2
1, 2
TC = 85°C; SRT and ASR are disabled.
Enabling ASR could increase IDDx by up to an additional 2mA.
Restricted to TC (MAX) = 85°C.
TC = 85°C; ASR and ODT are disabled; SRT is enabled.
The IDD values must be derated (increased) on IT-option devices when operated outside
of the range 0°C ≤ TC ≤ +85°C:
46
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics – Operating IDD Specifications
5a. When TC < 0°C: IDD2P0, IDD2P1 and IDD3P must be derated by 4%; IDD4R and IDD4W must
be derated by 2%; and IDD6, IDD6ET and IDD7 must be derated by 7%.
5b. When TC > 85°C: IDD0, IDD1, IDD2N, IDD2NT, IDD2Q, IDD3N, IDD3P, IDD4R, IDD4W, and IDD5B
must be derated by 2%; IDD2Px must be derated by 30%.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
47
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
DC Operating Conditions
Table 23: DDR3L 1.35V DC Electrical Characteristics and Operating Conditions
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter/Condition
Symbol
Min
Nom
Max
Unit
Notes
Supply voltage
VDD
1.283
1.35
1.45
V
1–7
I/O supply voltage
VDDQ
1.283
1.35
1.45
V
1–7
II
–2
–
2
μA
IVREF
–1
–
1
μA
Input leakage current
Any input 0V ≤ VIN ≤ VDD, VREF pin 0V ≤ VIN ≤ 1.1V
(All other pins not under test = 0V)
VREF supply leakage current
VREFDQ = VDD/2 or VREFCA = VDD/2
(All other pins not under test = 0V)
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
8, 9
1. VDD and VDDQ must track one another. VDDQ must be ≤ VDD. VSS = VSSQ.
2. VDD and VDDQ may include AC noise of ±50mV (250 kHz to 20 MHz) in addition to the
DC (0 Hz to 250 kHz) specifications. VDD and VDDQ must be at same level for valid AC
timing parameters.
3. Maximum DC value may not be greater than 1.425V. The DC value is the linear average
of VDD/VDDQ(t) over a very long period of time (for example, 1 second).
4. Under these supply voltages, the device operates to this DDR3L specification.
5. If the maximum limit is exceeded, input levels shall be governed by DDR3 specifications.
6. Under 1.5V operation, this DDR3L device operates in accordance with the DDR3 specifications under the same speed timings as defined for this device.
7. Once initialized for DDR3L operation, DDR3 operation may only be used if the device is
in reset while VDD and VDDQ are changed for DDR3 operation (see VDD Voltage Switching (page 138)).
8. The minimum limit requirement is for testing purposes. The leakage current on the VREF
pin should be minimal.
9. VREF (see Table 24).
48
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Input Operating Conditions
Table 24: DDR3L 1.35V DC Electrical Characteristics and Input Conditions
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter/Condition
Symbol
Min
Nom
Max
Unit
VIN low; DC/commands/address busses
VIL
VSS
N/A
See Table 25
V
VIN high; DC/commands/address busses
VIH
See Table 25
N/A
VDD
V
Notes
Input reference voltage command/address bus
VREFCA(DC)
0.49 × VDD
0.5 × VDD
0.51 × VDD
V
1, 2
I/O reference voltage DQ bus
VREFDQ(DC)
0.49 × VDD
0.5 × VDD
0.51 × VDD
V
2, 3
I/O reference voltage DQ bus in SELF REFRESH
VREFDQ(SR)
VSS
0.5 × VDD
VDD
V
4
VTT
–
0.5 × VDDQ
–
V
5
Command/address termination voltage
(system level, not direct DRAM input)
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. VREFCA(DC) is expected to be approximately 0.5 × VDD and to track variations in the DC
level. Externally generated peak noise (non-common mode) on VREFCA may not exceed
±1% × VDD around the VREFCA(DC) value. Peak-to-peak AC noise on VREFCA should not exceed ±2% of VREFCA(DC).
2. DC values are determined to be less than 20 MHz in frequency. DRAM must meet specifications if the DRAM induces additional AC noise greater than 20 MHz in frequency.
3. VREFDQ(DC) is expected to be approximately 0.5 × VDD and to track variations in the DC
level. Externally generated peak noise (non-common mode) on VREFDQ may not exceed
±1% × VDD around the VREFDQ(DC) value. Peak-to-peak AC noise on VREFDQ should not exceed ±2% of VREFDQ(DC).
4. VREFDQ(DC) may transition to VREFDQ(SR) and back to VREFDQ(DC) when in SELF REFRESH,
within restrictions outlined in the SELF REFRESH section.
5. VTT is not applied directly to the device. VTT is a system supply for signal termination resistors. Minimum and maximum values are system-dependent.
49
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Table 25: DDR3L 1.35V Input Switching Conditions – Command and Address
Parameter/Condition
Symbol
DDR3L-800/1066
DDR3L-1333/1600
DDR3L-1866/2133
Units
Command and Address
5
160
160
–
mV
VIH(AC135),min5
135
135
135
mV
–
–
125
mV
VIH(DC90),min
90
90
90
mV
Input low DC voltage: Logic 0
VIL(DC90),min
–90
–90
–90
mV
Input low AC voltage: Logic 0
VIL(AC125),min5
–
–
–125
mV
VIL(AC135),min5
–135
–135
–135
mV
5
–160
–160
–
mV
Input high AC voltage: Logic 1
VIH(AC160),min
VIH(AC125),min
Input high DC voltage: Logic 1
VIL(AC160),min
5
DQ and DM
Input high AC voltage: Logic 1
VIH(AC160),min5
160
160
–
mV
5
135
135
135
mV
5
–
–
130
mV
VIH(AC135),min
VIH(AC125),min
Input high DC voltage: Logic 1
VIH(DC90),min
90
90
90
mV
Input low DC voltage: Logic 0
VIL(DC90),min
–90
–90
–90
mV
Input low AC voltage: Logic 0
VIL(AC125),min5
VIL(AC135),min
–
–
–130
mV
5
–135
–135
–135
mV
5
–160
–160
–
mV
VIL(AC160),min
Notes:
1. All voltages are referenced to VREF. VREF is VREFCA for control, command, and address. All
slew rates and setup/hold times are specified at the DRAM ball. VREF is VREFDQ for DQ
and DM inputs.
2. Input setup timing parameters (tIS and tDS) are referenced at VIL(AC)/VIH(AC), not VREF(DC).
3. Input hold timing parameters (tIH and tDH) are referenced at VIL(DC)/VIH(DC), not VREF(DC).
4. Single-ended input slew rate = 1 V/ns; maximum input voltage swing under test is
900mV (peak-to-peak).
5. When two VIH(AC) values (and two corresponding VIL(AC) values) are listed for a specific
speed bin, the user may choose either value for the input AC level. Whichever value is
used, the associated setup time for that AC level must also be used. Additionally, one
VIH(AC) value may be used for address/command inputs and the other VIH(AC) value may
be used for data inputs.
For example, for DDR3-800, two input AC levels are defined: VIH(AC160),min and
VIH(AC135),min (corresponding VIL(AC160),min and VIL(AC135),min). For DDR3-800, the address/
command inputs must use either VIH(AC160),min with tIS(AC160) of 210ps or VIH(AC150),min
with tIS(AC135) of 365ps; independently, the data inputs must use either VIH(AC160),min
with tDS(AC160) of 75ps or VIH(AC150),min with tDS(AC150) of 125ps.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
50
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Table 26: DDR3L 1.35V Differential Input Operating Conditions (CK, CK# and DQS, DQS#)
Parameter/Condition
Symbol
Min
Max
Units
Notes
Differential input logic high – slew
VIH,diff(AC)slew
180
N/A
mV
4
Differential input logic low – slew
VIL,diff(AC)slew
N/A
–180
mV
4
Differential input logic high
VIH,diff(AC)
2 × (VIH(AC) - VREF)
VDD/VDDQ
mV
5
Differential input logic low
VIL,diff(AC)
VSS/VSSQ
2 × (VIL(AC) - VREF)
mV
6
VIX
VREF(DC) - 150
VREF(DC) + 150
mV
5, 7, 9
VIX (175)
VREF(DC) - 175
VREF(DC) + 175
mV
5, 7–9
VDDQ/2 + 160
VDDQ
mV
5
VDD/2 + 160
VDD
mV
5
VSSQ
VDDQ/2 - 160
mV
6
VSS
VDD/2 - 160
mV
6
Differential input crossing voltage
relative to VDD/2 for DQS, DQS#; CK,
CK#
Differential input crossing voltage
relative to VDD/2 for CK, CK#
Single-ended high level for strobes
Single-ended high level for CK, CK#
Single-ended low level for strobes
Single-ended low level for CK, CK#
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
VSEH
VSEL
Clock is referenced to VDD and VSS. Data strobe is referenced to VDDQ and VSSQ.
Reference is VREFCA(DC) for clock and VREFDQ(DC) for strobe.
Differential input slew rate = 2 V/ns.
Defines slew rate reference points, relative to input crossing voltages.
Minimum DC limit is relative to single-ended signals; overshoot specifications are applicable.
Maximum DC limit is relative to single-ended signals; undershoot specifications are applicable.
The typical value of VIX(AC) is expected to be about 0.5 × VDD of the transmitting device,
and VIX(AC) is expected to track variations in VDD. VIX(AC) indicates the voltage at which
differential input signals must cross.
The VIX extended range (±175mV) is allowed only for the clock; this VIX extended range
is only allowed when the following conditions are met: The single-ended input signals
are monotonic, have the single-ended swing VSEL, VSEH of at least VDD/2 ±250mV, and
the differential slew rate of CK, CK# is greater than 3 V/ns.
VIX must provide 25mV (single-ended) of the voltages separation.
51
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Figure 15: DDR3L 1.35V Input Signal
VIL and VIH levels with ringback
VDDQ + 0.4V
Overshoot
VDD + 0.4V
Narrow pulse width
Minimum VIL and VIH levels
VIH MIN(AC)
VIH MIN(DC)
VIH(AC)
VIH(DC)
VIL MIN(AC)
VDDQ
VREF + 125/135/160mV
VIH(AC)
VREF + 90mV
VIH(DC)
VREF DC MAX + 1%
.51 x VDD
VREF = VDD/2
.49 x VDD
VREF DC MIN - 1% VDD
MAX 2% Total
VREF DC MAX
VREF
DC MIN
MAX 2% Total
VIL MIN(DC)
VDD
VIL(DC)
VREFDQ + AC noise
VREFDQ + DC error
VREFDQ - DC error
VREFDQ - AC noise
VREF - 90mV
VIL(DC)
VREF - 125/135/160mV
VIL(AC)
VIL(AC)
0.0V
VSS
VSS - 0.40V
Undershoot
VSS - 0.40V
Narrow pulse width
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Numbers in diagrams reflect nominal values.
52
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
DDR3L 1.35V AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification
Table 27: DDR3L Control and Address Pins
Parameter
DDR3L-800
DRR3L-1066
DDR3L-1333
DDR3L-1600
DDR3L-1866
DDR3L-2133
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for overshoot area
(see Figure 16)
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for undershoot area
(see Figure 17)
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
Maximum overshoot area
above VDD (see Figure 16)
0.67 V/ns
0.5 V/ns
0.4 V/ns
0.33 V/ns
0.28 V/ns
0.25 V/ns
Maximum undershoot
area below VSS (see Figure 17)
0.67 V/ns
0.5 V/ns
0.4 V/ns
0.33 V/ns
0.28 V/ns
0.25 V/ns
Table 28: DDR3L 1.35V Clock, Data, Strobe, and Mask Pins
Parameter
DDR3L-800
DDR3L-1066
DDR3L-1333
DDR3L-1600
DDR3L-1866
DDR3L-2133
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for overshoot area
(see Figure 16)
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
Maximum peak amplitude allowed for undershoot area
(see Figure 17)
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
0.4V
Maximum overshoot area
above VDD/VDDQ (see Figure 16)
0.25 V/ns
0.19 V/ns
0.15 V/ns
0.13 V/ns
0.11 V/ns
0.10 V/ns
Maximum undershoot
area below VSS/VSSQ (see
Figure 17)
0.25 V/ns
0.19 V/ns
0.15 V/ns
0.13 V/ns
0.11 V/ns
0.10 V/ns
Figure 16: Overshoot
Maximum amplitude
Overshoot area
Volts (V)
VDD/VDDQ
Time (ns)
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
53
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Figure 17: Undershoot
VSS/VSSQ
Volts (V)
Undershoot area
Maximum amplitude
Time (ns)
Figure 18: VIX for Differential Signals
VDD, VDDQ
VDD, VDDQ
CK#, DQS#
CK#, DQS#
X
VIX
VIX
VDD/2, VDDQ/2
X
X
VDD/2, VDDQ/2
VIX
X
VIX
CK, DQS
CK, DQS
VSS, VSSQ
VSS, VSSQ
Figure 19: Single-Ended Requirements for Differential Signals
VDD or VDDQ
VSEH,min
VDD/2 or VDDQ/2
VSEH
CK or DQS
VSEL,max
VSEL
VSS or VSSQ
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
54
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Figure 20: Definition of Differential AC-Swing and tDVAC
tDVAC
VIH,diff(AC)min
VIH,diff,min
CK - CK#
DQS - DQS#
0.0
VIL,diff,max
VIL,diff(AC)max
tDVAC
Half cycle
Table 29: DDR3L 1.35V – Minimum Required Time tDVAC for CK/CK#, DQS/DQS# Differential for AC
Ringback
DDR3L-800/1066/1333/1600
tDVAC
tDVAC
DDR3L-1866/2133
tDVAC
tDVAC
tDVAC
Slew Rate (V/ns)
at
320mV (ps)
at
270mV (ps)
at
270mV (ps)
at
250mV (ps)
at
260mV (ps)
>4.0
189
201
163
168
176
4.0
189
201
163
168
176
3.0
162
179
140
147
154
2.0
109
134
95
105
111
1.8
91
119
80
91
97
1.6
69
100
62
74
78
1.4
40
76
37
52
55
1.2
Note 1
44
5
22
24
1.0
Note 1
<1.0
Note 1
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Rising input signal shall become equal to or greater than VIH(AC) level and Falling input
signal shall become equal to or less than VIL(AC) level.
55
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
DDR3L 1.35V Slew Rate Definitions for Single-Ended Input Signals
Setup (tIS and tDS) nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF and the first crossing of V IH(AC)min. Setup (tIS and tDS)
nominal slew rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing
of V REF and the first crossing of V IL(AC)max.
Hold (tIH and tDH) nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IL(DC)max and the first crossing of V REF. Hold (tIH and tDH)
nominal slew rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing
of V IH(DC)min and the first crossing of V REF (see Figure 21 (page 57)).
Table 30: Single-Ended Input Slew Rate Definition
Input Slew Rates
(Linear Signals)
Input
Measured
Edge
From
To
Rising
VREF
VIH(AC),min
Falling
VREF
VIL(AC),max
Rising
VIL(DC),max
VREF
Falling
VIH(DC),min
VREF
Calculation
VIH(AC),min - VREF
ΔTRSse
Setup
VREF - VIL(AC),max
ΔTFSse
VREF - VIL(DC),max
ΔTFHse
Hold
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
56
VIH(DC),min - VREF
ΔTRSHse
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
Figure 21: Nominal Slew Rate Definition for Single-Ended Input Signals
ΔTRSse
Setup
Single-ended input voltage (DQ, CMD, ADDR)
VIH(AC)min
VIH(DC)min
VREFDQ or
VREFCA
VIL(DC)max
VIL(AC)max
ΔTFSse
ΔTRHse
Hold
Single-ended input voltage (DQ, CMD, ADDR)
VIH(AC)min
VIH(DC)min
VREFDQ or
VREFCA
VIL(DC)max
VIL(AC)max
ΔTFHse
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
57
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Specifications – DC and AC
DDR3L 1.35V Slew Rate Definitions for Differential Input Signals
Input slew rate for differential signals (CK, CK# and DQS, DQS#) are defined and measured, as shown in Table 31 and Figure 22. The nominal slew rate for a rising signal is
defined as the slew rate between V IL,diff,max and V IH,diff,min. The nominal slew rate for a
falling signal is defined as the slew rate between V IH,diff,min and V IL,diff,max.
Table 31: DDR3L 1.35V Differential Input Slew Rate Definition
Differential Input
Slew Rates
(Linear Signals)
Input
CK and
DQS
reference
Measured
Edge
From
To
Calculation
Rising
VIL,diff,max
VIH,diff,min
Falling
VIH,diff,min
VIL,diff,max
VIH,diff,min - VIL,diff,max
ΔTRdiff
VIH,diff,min - VIL,diff,max
ΔTFdiff
Figure 22: DDR3L 1.35V Nominal Differential Input Slew Rate Definition for DQS, DQS# and CK, CK#
Differential input voltage (DQS, DQS#; CK, CK#)
ΔTRdiff
VIH,diff,min
0
VIL,diff,max
ΔTFdiff
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
58
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ODT Characteristics
ODT Characteristics
The ODT effective resistance RTT is defined by MR1[9, 6, and 2]. ODT is applied to the
DQ, DM, DQS, DQS#, and TDQS, TDQS# balls (x8 devices only). The ODT target values
and a functional representation are listed in Table 32 and Table 33 (page 60). The individual pull-up and pull-down resistors (RTT(PU) and RTT(PD)) are defined as follows:
• RTT(PU) = (VDDQ - VOUT)/|IOUT|, under the condition that RTT(PD) is turned off
• RTT(PD) = (VOUT)/|IOUT|, under the condition that RTT(PU) is turned off
Figure 23: ODT Levels and I-V Characteristics
Chip in termination mode
ODT
VDDQ
IPU
IOUT = IPD - IPU
RTT(PU)
To
other
circuitry
such as
RCV, . . .
DQ
IOUT
RTT(PD)
VOUT
IPD
VSSQ
Table 32: On-Die Termination DC Electrical Characteristics
Parameter/Condition
Symbol
RTT effective impedance
RTT(EFF)
ΔVM
Deviation of VM with respect to
VDDQ/2
Notes:
Min
Nom
Max
Unit
See Table 33 (page 60)
–5
5
Notes
1, 2
%
1, 2, 3
1. Tolerance limits are applicable after proper ZQ calibration has been performed at a
stable temperature and voltage (VDDQ = VDD, VSSQ = VSS). Refer to ODT Sensitivity (page
61) if either the temperature or voltage changes after calibration.
2. Measurement definition for RTT: Apply VIH(AC) to pin under test and measure current
I[VIH(AC)], then apply VIL(AC) to pin under test and measure current I[VIL(AC)]:
VIH(AC) - VIL(AC)
RTT =
I(VIH(AC)) - I(VIL(AC))
3. Measure voltage (VM) at the tested pin with no load:
ΔVM =
2 × VM
– 1 × 100
VDDQ
4. For IT and AT devices, the minimum values are derated by 6% when the device operates
between –40°C and 0°C (TC).
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
59
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ODT Characteristics
1.35V ODT Resistors
Table 33 provides an overview of the ODT DC electrical characteristics. The values provided are not specification requirements; however, they can be used as design guidelines to indicate what RTT is targeted to provide:
•
•
•
•
•
RTT 120Ω is made up of RTT120(PD240) and RTT120(PU240)
RTT 60Ω is made up of RTT60(PD120) and RTT60(PU120)
RTT 40Ω is made up of RTT40(PD80) and RTT40(PU80)
RTT 30Ω is made up of RTT30(PD60) and RTT30(PU60)
RTT 20Ω is made up of RTT20(PD40) and RTT20(PU40)
Table 33: 1.35V RTT Effective Impedance
MR1
[9, 6, 2]
RTT
Resistor
VOUT
Min
Nom
Max
Units
0, 1, 0
Ω
RTT,120PD240
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/1
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/1
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/1
RTT,120PU240
Ω
0, 0, 1
Ω
RTT,60PD120
RTT,60PU120
Ω
0, 1, 1
Ω
RTT,40PD80
RTT,40PU80
Ω
1, 0, 1
Ω
RTT,30PD60
RTT,30PU60
Ω
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/1
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/1
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/1
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
0.9
1.0
1.65
RZQ/2
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/2
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/2
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/2
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/2
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/2
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/2
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
0.9
1.0
1.65
RZQ/4
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/3
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/3
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/3
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/3
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/3
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/3
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
0.9
1.0
1.65
RZQ/6
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/4
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/4
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/4
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/4
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/4
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/4
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
0.9
1.0
1.65
RZQ/8
60
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ODT Characteristics
Table 33: 1.35V RTT Effective Impedance (Continued)
MR1
[9, 6, 2]
RTT
Resistor
VOUT
Min
Nom
Max
Units
1, 0, 0
Ω
RTT,20PD40
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/6
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/6
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
0.9
1.0
1.65
RZQ/12
RTT,20PU40
Ω
ODT Sensitivity
If either the temperature or voltage changes after I/O calibration, then the tolerance
limits listed in Table 32 and Table 33 can be expected to widen according to Table 34
and Table 35.
Table 34: ODT Sensitivity Definition
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
RTT
0.9 - dRTTdT × |DT| - dRTTdV × |DV|
1.6 + dRTTdT × |DT| + dRTTdV × |DV|
RZQ/(2, 4, 6, 8, 12)
Note:
1. ΔT = T - T(@ calibration), ΔV = VDDQ - VDDQ(@ calibration) and VDD = VDDQ.
Table 35: ODT Temperature and Voltage Sensitivity
Note:
Change
Min
Max
Unit
dRTTdT
0
1.5
%/°C
dRTTdV
0
0.15
%/mV
1. ΔT = T - T(@ calibration), ΔV = VDDQ - VDDQ(@ calibration) and VDD = VDDQ.
ODT Timing Definitions
ODT loading differs from that used in AC timing measurements. The reference load for
ODT timings is shown in Figure 24. Two parameters define when ODT turns on or off
synchronously, two define when ODT turns on or off asynchronously, and another defines when ODT turns on or off dynamically. Table 36 and Table 37 (page 62) outline
and provide definition and measurement references settings for each parameter.
ODT turn-on time begins when the output leaves High-Z and ODT resistance begins to
turn on. ODT turn-off time begins when the output leaves Low-Z and ODT resistance
begins to turn off.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
61
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ODT Characteristics
Figure 24: ODT Timing Reference Load
DUT
CK, CK#
VREF
VDDQ/2
RTT = 25Ω
DQ, DM
DQS, DQS#
TDQS, TDQS#
ZQ
VTT = VSSQ
Timing reference point
RZQ = 240Ω
VSSQ
Table 36: ODT Timing Definitions
Symbol
Begin Point Definition
End Point Definition
Figure
tAON
Rising edge of CK – CK# defined by the end
point of ODTLon
Extrapolated point at VSSQ
Figure 25 (page 63)
tAOF
Rising edge of CK – CK# defined by the end
point of ODTLoff
Extrapolated point at VRTT,nom
Figure 25 (page 63)
tAONPD
Rising edge of CK – CK# with ODT first being Extrapolated point at VSSQ
registered HIGH
Figure 26 (page 63)
tAOFPD
Rising edge of CK – CK# with ODT first being Extrapolated point at VRTT,nom
registered LOW
Figure 26 (page 63)
Rising edge of CK – CK# defined by the end Extrapolated points at VRTT(WR) and
point of ODTLcnw, ODTLcwn4, or ODTLcwn8 VRTT,nom
Figure 27 (page 64)
tADC
Table 37: DDR3L(1.35V) Reference Settings for ODT Timing Measurements
Measured
Parameter
RTT,nom Setting
RTT(WR) Setting
VSW1
VSW2
tAON
RZQ/4 (60Ω
N/A
50mV
100mV
RZQ/12 (20Ω
N/A
100mV
200mV
tAOF
tAONPD
tAOFPD
tADC
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
RZQ/4 (60Ω
N/A
50mV
100mV
RZQ/12 (20Ω
N/A
100mV
200mV
RZQ/4 (60Ω
N/A
50mV
100mV
RZQ/12 (20Ω
N/A
100mV
200mV
RZQ/4 (60Ω
N/A
50mV
100mV
RZQ/12 (20Ω
N/A
100mV
200mV
RZQ/12 (20Ω
RZQ/2 (20Ω
200mV
250mV
62
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ODT Characteristics
Figure 25: tAON and tAOF Definitions
tAON
tAOF
Begin point: Rising edge of CK - CK#
defined by the end point of ODTLoff
Begin point: Rising edge of CK - CK#
defined by the end point of ODTLon
CK
CK
VDDQ/2
CK#
CK#
tAON
tAOF
End point: Extrapolated point at VRTT,nom
TSW2
TSW1
TSW1
DQ, DM
DQS, DQS#
TDQS, TDQS#
VSW2
TSW1
VSW2
VSW1
VSW1
VSSQ
VRTT,nom
VSSQ
End point: Extrapolated point at VSSQ
Figure 26: tAONPD and tAOFPD Definitions
tAONPD
Begin point: Rising edge of CK - CK#
with ODT first registered high
tAOFPD
Begin point: Rising edge of CK - CK#
with ODT first registered low
CK
CK
VDDQ/2
CK#
CK#
tAONPD
tAOFPD
End point: Extrapolated point at VRTT,nom
TSW2
TSW2
TSW1
DQ, DM
DQS, DQS#
TDQS, TDQS#
TSW1
VSW2
VSSQ
VRTT,nom
VSW2
VSW1
VSW1
VSSQ
End point: Extrapolated point at VSSQ
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
63
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ODT Characteristics
Figure 27: tADC Definition
Begin point: Rising edge of CK - CK#
defined by the end point of ODTLcnw
Begin point: Rising edge of CK - CK# defined by
the end point of ODTLcwn4 or ODTLcwn8
CK
VDDQ/2
CK#
tADC
VRTT,nom
DQ, DM
DQS, DQS#
TDQS, TDQS#
End point:
Extrapolated
point at VRTT,nom
tADC
VRTT,nom
TSW21
TSW11
VSW2
VSW1
TSW22
TSW12
VRTT(WR)
End point: Extrapolated point at VRTT(WR)
VSSQ
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
64
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Driver Impedance
Output Driver Impedance
The output driver impedance is selected by MR1[5,1] during initialization. The selected
value is able to maintain the tight tolerances specified if proper ZQ calibration is performed. Output specifications refer to the default output driver unless specifically stated otherwise. A functional representation of the output buffer is shown below. The output driver impedance RON is defined by the value of the external reference resistor RZQ
as follows:
• RON,x = RZQ/y (with RZQ = 240Ω ±1%; x = 34Ω or 40Ω with y = 7 or 6, respectively)
The individual pull-up and pull-down resistors RON(PU) and RON(PD) are defined as follows:
• RON(PU) = (VDDQ - VOUT)/|IOUT|, when RON(PD) is turned off
• RON(PD) = (VOUT)/|IOUT|, when RON(PU) is turned off
Figure 28: Output Driver
Chip in drive mode
Output driver
VDDQ
IPU
To
other
circuitry
such as
RCV, . . .
RON(PU)
DQ
IOUT
RON(PD)
VOUT
IPD
VSSQ
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
65
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Driver Impedance
34 Ohm Output Driver Impedance
The 34Ω driver (MR1[5, 1] = 01) is the default driver. Unless otherwise stated, all timings
and specifications listed herein apply to the 34Ω driver only. Its impedance RON is defined by the value of the external reference resistor RZQ as follows: RON34 = RZQ/7 (with
nominal RZQ = 240Ω ±1%) and is actually 34.3Ω ±1%.
Table 38: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver Impedance Characteristics
MR1
[5, 1]
RON
Resistor
VOUT
Min
Nom
Max
Units
0, 1
Ω
RON,34PD
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/7
RON,34PU
Pull-up/pull-down mismatch (MMPUPD)
Notes:
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/7
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/7
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/7
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/7
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/7
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
–10
N/A
10
%
1. Tolerance limits assume RZQ of 240Ω ±1% and are applicable after proper ZQ calibration has been performed at a stable temperature and voltage: VDDQ = VDD; VSSQ = VSS).
Refer to DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity (page 68) if either the temperature
or the voltage changes after calibration.
2. Measurement definition for mismatch between pull-up and pull-down (MMPUPD). Measure both RON(PU) and RON(PD) at 0.5 × VDDQ:
RON(PU) - RON(PD)
MMPUPD =
× 100
RON,nom
3. For IT and AT (1Gb only) devices, the minimum values are derated by 6% when the device operates between –40°C and 0°C (TC).
A larger maximum limit will result in slightly lower minimum currents.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
66
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Driver Impedance
DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver
Using Table 39, the 34Ω driver’s current range has been calculated and summarized in
Table 40 (page 67) VDD = 1.35V, Table 41 for V DD = 1.45V, and Table 42 (page 68) for
VDD = 1.283V. The individual pull-up and pull-down resistors R ON34(PD) and RON34(PU)
are defined as follows:
• RON34(PD) = (VOUT)/|IOUT|; RON34(PU) is turned off
• RON34(PU) = (VDDQ - VOUT)/|IOUT|; RON34(PD) is turned off
Table 39: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver Pull-Up and Pull-Down Impedance Calculations
RON
Min
Nom
Max
Unit
RZQ = 240Ω 
237.6
240
242.4
Ω
33.9
34.3
34.6
Ω
MR1[5,1]
RON
Resistor
VOUT
Min
Nom
Max
Unit
0, 1
Ω
RON34(PD)
0.2 × VDDQ
20.4
34.3
38.1
Ω
0.5 × VDDQ
30.5
34.3
38.1
Ω
RZQ/7 = (240Ω 
RON34(PU)
0.8 × VDDQ
30.5
34.3
48.5
Ω
0.2 × VDDQ
30.5
34.3
48.5
Ω
0.5 × VDDQ
30.5
34.3
38.1
Ω
0.8 × VDDQ
20.4
34.3
38.1
Ω
Table 40: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver IOH/IOL Characteristics: VDD = VDDQ = DDR3L@1.35V
MR1[5,1]
RON
Resistor
VOUT
Max
Nom
Min
Unit
0, 1
Ω
RON34(PD)
IOL @ 0.2 × VDDQ
13.3
7.9
7.1
mA
IOL @ 0.5 × VDDQ
22.1
19.7
17.7
mA
IOL @ 0.8 × VDDQ
35.4
31.5
22.3
mA
RON34(PU)
IOH @ 0.2 × VDDQ
35.4
31.5
22.3
mA
IOH @ 0.5 × VDDQ
22.1
19.7
17.7
mA
IOH @ 0.8 × VDDQ
13.3
7.9
7.1
mA
Min
Unit
Table 41: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver IOH/IOL Characteristics: VDD = VDDQ = DDR3L@1.45V
MR1[5,1]
RON
Resistor
VOUT
Max
0, 1
Ω
RON34(PD)
IOL @ 0.2 × VDDQ
14.2
8.5
7.6
mA
IOL @ 0.5 × VDDQ
23.7
21.1
19.0
mA
IOL @ 0.8 × VDDQ
38.0
33.8
23.9
mA
IOH @ 0.2 × VDDQ
38.0
33.8
23.9
mA
IOH @ 0.5 × VDDQ
23.7
21.1
19.0
mA
IOH @ 0.8 × VDDQ
14.2
8.5
7.6
mA
RON34(PU)
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
67
Nom
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Driver Impedance
Table 42: DDR3L 34 Ohm Driver IOH/IOL Characteristics: VDD = VDDQ = DDR3L@1.283
MR1[5,1]
RON
Resistor
VOUT
Max
Nom
Min
Unit
0, 1
Ω
RON34(PD)
IOL @ 0.2 × VDDQ
12.6
7.5
6.7
mA
IOL @ 0.5 × VDDQ
21.0
18.7
16.8
mA
IOL @ 0.8 × VDDQ
33.6
29.9
21.2
mA
RON34(PU)
IOH @ 0.2 × VDDQ
33.6
29.9
21.2
mA
IOH @ 0.5 × VDDQ
21.0
18.7
16.8
mA
IOH @ 0.8 × VDDQ
12.6
7.5
6.7
mA
DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity
If either the temperature or the voltage changes after ZQ calibration, then the tolerance
limits listed in Table 38 (page 66) can be expected to widen according to Table 43 and
Table 44.
Table 43: DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity Definition
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
RON(PD) @ 0.2 × VDDQ
0.6 - dRONdTL × |ΔT| - dRONdVL × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTL × |ΔT| + dRONdVL × |ΔV|
RZQ/7
RON(PD) @ 0.5 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTM × |ΔT| - dRONdVM × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTM × |ΔT| + dRONdVM × |ΔV|
RZQ/7
RON(PD) @ 0.8 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTH × |ΔT| - dRONdVH × |ΔV|
1.4 + dRONdTH × |ΔT| + dRONdVH × |ΔV|
RZQ/7
RON(PU) @ 0.2 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTL × |ΔT| - dRONdVL × |ΔV|
1.4 + dRONdTL × |ΔT| + dRONdVL × |ΔV|
RZQ/7
RON(PU) @ 0.5 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTM × |ΔT| - dRONdVM × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTM × |ΔT| + dRONdVM × |ΔV|
RZQ/7
RON(PU) @ 0.8 × VDDQ
0.6 - dRONdTH × |ΔT| - dRONdVH × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTH × |ΔT| + dRONdVH × |ΔV|
RZQ/7
Note:
1. ΔT = T - T(@CALIBRATION)ΔV = VDDQ - VDDQ(@CALIBRATION); and VDD = VDDQ.
Table 44: DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Voltage and Temperature Sensitivity
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Change
Min
Max
Unit
dRONdTM
0
1.5
%/°C
dRONdVM
0
0.13
%/mV
dRONdTL
0
1.5
%/°C
dRONdVL
0
0.13
%/mV
dRONdTH
0
1.5
%/°C
dRONdVH
0
0.13
%/mV
68
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Driver Impedance
DDR3L Alternative 40 Ohm Driver
Table 45: DDR3L 40 Ohm Driver Impedance Characteristics
MR1
[5, 1]
RON
Resistor
VOUT
Min
Nom
Max
Units
0, 0
Ω
RON,40PD
0.2 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
0.8 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/6
0.2 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.45
RZQ/6
0.5 × VDDQ
0.9
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
0.8 × VDDQ
0.6
1.0
1.15
RZQ/6
VIL(AC) to VIH(AC)
–10
N/A
10
%
RON,40PU
Pull-up/pull-down mismatch (MMPUPD)
1. Tolerance limits assume RZQ of 240Ω ±1% and are applicable after proper ZQ calibration has been performed at a stable temperature and voltage (VDDQ = VDD; VSSQ = VSS).
Refer to DDR3L 40 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity (page 69) if either the temperature
or the voltage changes after calibration.
2. Measurement definition for mismatch between pull-up and pull-down (MMPUPD). Measure both RON(PU) and RON(PD) at 0.5 × VDDQ:
RON(PU) - RON(PD)
MMPUPD =
× 100
RON,nom
Notes:
3. For IT and AT (1Gb only) devices, the minimum values are derated by 6% when the device operates between –40°C and 0°C (TC).
A larger maximum limit will result in slightly lower minimum currents.
DDR3L 40 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity
If either the temperature or the voltage changes after I/O calibration, then the tolerance
limits listed in Table 45 can be expected to widen according to Table 46 and Table 47
(page 70).
Table 46: DDR3L 40 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity Definition
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
RON(PD) @ 0.2 × VDDQ
0.6 - dRONdTL × |ΔT| - dRONdVL × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTL × |ΔT| + dRONdVL × |ΔV|
RZQ/6
RON(PD) @ 0.5 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTM × |ΔT| - dRONdVM × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTM × |ΔT| + dRONdVM × |ΔV|
RZQ/6
RON(PD) @ 0.8 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTH × |ΔT| - dRONdVH × |ΔV|
1.4 + dRONdTH × |ΔT| + dRONdVH × |ΔV|
RZQ/6
RON(PU) @ 0.2 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTL × |ΔT| - dRONdVL × |ΔV|
1.4 + dRONdTL × |ΔT| + dRONdVL × |ΔV|
RZQ/6
RON(PU) @ 0.5 × VDDQ
0.9 - dRONdTM × |ΔT| - dRONdVM × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTM × |ΔT| + dRONdVM × |ΔV|
RZQ/6
RON(PU) @ 0.8 × VDDQ
0.6 - dRONdTH × |ΔT| - dRONdVH × |ΔV|
1.1 + dRONdTH × |ΔT| + dRONdVH × |ΔV|
RZQ/6
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. ΔT = T - T(@CALIBRATION)ΔV = VDDQ - VDDQ(@CALIBRATION); and VDD = VDDQ.
69
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Driver Impedance
Table 47: 40 Ohm Output Driver Voltage and Temperature Sensitivity
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Change
Min
Max
Unit
dRONdTM
0
1.5
%/°C
dRONdVM
0
0.15
%/mV
dRONdTL
0
1.5
%/°C
dRONdVL
0
0.15
%/mV
dRONdTH
0
1.5
%/°C
dRONdVH
0
0.15
%/mV
70
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Table 48: DDR3L Single-Ended Output Driver Characteristics
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter/Condition
Output leakage current: DQ are disabled;
0V ≤ VOUT ≤ VDDQ; ODT is disabled; ODT is HIGH
Output slew rate: Single-ended; For rising and falling edges,
measure between VOL(AC) = VREF - 0.09 × VDDQ and VOH(AC) =
VREF + 0.09 × VDDQ
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
IOZ
–5
5
μA
1
SRQse
1.75
6
V/ns
1, 2, 3, 4
Single-ended DC high-level output voltage
VOH(DC)
0.8 × VDDQ
V
1, 2, 5
Single-ended DC mid-point level output voltage
VOM(DC)
0.5 × VDDQ
V
1, 2, 5
Single-ended DC low-level output voltage
VOL(DC)
0.2 × VDDQ
V
1, 2, 5
Single-ended AC high-level output voltage
VOH(AC)
VTT + 0.1 × VDDQ
V
1, 2, 3, 6
Single-ended AC low-level output voltage
VOL(AC)
VTT - 0.1 × VDDQ
V
1, 2, 3, 6
%
1, 7
Delta RON between pull-up and pull-down for DQ/DQS
MMPUPD
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
10
Output to VTT (VDDQ/2) via 25Ω resistor
Test load for AC timing and output slew rates
Notes:
–10
3
1. RZQ of 240Ω ±1% with RZQ/7 enabled (default 34Ω driver) and is applicable after proper ZQ calibration has been performed at a stable temperature and voltage (VDDQ = VDD;
VSSQ = VSS).
2. VTT = VDDQ/2.
3. See Figure 31 (page 74) for the test load configuration.
4. The 6 V/ns maximum is applicable for a single DQ signal when it is switching either from
HIGH to LOW or LOW to HIGH while the remaining DQ signals in the same byte lane are
either all static or all switching in the opposite direction. For all other DQ signal switching combinations, the maximum limit of 6 V/ns is reduced to 5 V/ns.
5. See Figure 28 (page 65) for IV curve linearity. Do not use AC test load.
6. See Slew Rate Definitions for Single-Ended Output Signals (page 74) for output slew
rate.
7. See Figure 28 (page 65) for additional information.
8. See Figure 29 (page 72) for an example of a single-ended output signal.
71
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Figure 29: DQ Output Signal
MAX output
VOH(AC)
VOL(AC)
MIN output
Table 49: DDR3L Differential Output Driver Characteristics
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter/Condition
Output leakage current: DQ are disabled;
0V ≤ VOUT ≤ VDDQ; ODT is disabled; ODT is HIGH
DDR3L Output slew rate: Differential; For rising and falling edges, measure between VOL,diff(AC) = –0.18 × VDDQ
and VOH,diff(AC) = 0.18 × VDDQ
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
IOZ
–5
5
μA
1
SRQdiff
3.5
12
V/ns
1
V
1, 4
V
1, 4
%
1, 5
Differential high-level output voltage
VOH,diff(AC)
Differential low-level output voltage
VOL,diff(AC)
Delta Ron between pull-up and pull-down for DQ/DQS
MMPUPD
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
–0.2 × VDDQ
–10
10
Output to VTT (VDDQ/2) via 25Ω resistor
Test load for AC timing and output slew rates
Notes:
+0.2 × VDDQ
3
1. RZQ of 240Ω ±1% with RZQ/7 enabled (default 34Ω driver) and is applicable after proper ZQ calibration has been performed at a stable temperature and voltage (VDDQ = VDD;
VSSQ = VSS).
2. VREF = VDDQ/2; slew rate @ 5 V/ns, interpolate for faster slew rate.
3. See Figure 31 (page 74) for the test load configuration.
4. See Table 52 (page 76) for the output slew rate.
5. See Table 38 (page 66) for additional information.
6. See Figure 30 (page 73) for an example of a differential output signal.
72
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Table 50: DDR3L Differential Output Driver Characteristics VOX(AC)
All voltages are referenced to VSS
Parameter/
Condition
Output differential
crosspoint voltage
Parameter/
Condition
Output differential
crosspoint voltage
DDR3L- 800/1066/1333 DQS/DQS# Differential Slew Rate
Symbol
3.5V/ns 4V/ns
5V/ns
6V/ns
7V/ns
8V/ns
9V/ns
10V/ns
12V/ns
Unit
VOX(AC) Max
115
130
135
195
205
205
205
205
205
mV
Min
–115
–130
–135
–195
–205
–205
–205
–205
–205
mV
DDR3L-1600/1866/2133 DQS/DQS# Differential Slew Rate
Symbol
3.5V/ns 4V/ns
5v/ns
6V/ns
7V/ns
8V/ns
9V/ns
10V/ns
12V/ns
Unit
VOX(AC) Max
90
105
135
155
180
205
205
205
205
mV
Min
–90
–105
–135
–155
–180
–205
–205
–205
–205
mV
Notes:
1. RZQ of 240Ω ±1% with RZQ/7 enabled (default 34Ω driver) and is applicable after proper ZQ calibration has been performed at a stable temperature and voltage (VDDQ = VDD;
VSSQ = VSS).
2. See Figure 31 (page 74) for the test load configuration.
3. See Figure 30 (page 73) for an example of a differential output signal.
4. For a differential slew rate between the list values, the VOX(AC) value may be obtained
by linear interpolation.
Figure 30: Differential Output Signal
MAX output
VOH
X
X
VOX(AC)max
X
X
VOX(AC)min
VOL
MIN output
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
73
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Reference Output Load
Figure 31 (page 74) represents the effective reference load of 25Ω used in defining the
relevant device AC timing parameters (except ODT reference timing) as well as the output slew rate measurements. It is not intended to be a precise representation of a particular system environment or a depiction of the actual load presented by a production
tester. System designers should use IBIS or other simulation tools to correlate the timing reference load to a system environment.
Figure 31: Reference Output Load for AC Timing and Output Slew Rate
VDDQ/2
DUT
VREF
RTT = 25ȍ
DQ
DQS
DQS#
VTT = VDDQ/2
Timing reference point
ZQ
RZQ = 240ȍ
VSS
Slew Rate Definitions for Single-Ended Output Signals
The single-ended output driver is summarized in Table 48 (page 71). With the reference
load for timing measurements, the output slew rate for falling and rising edges is defined and measured between V OL(AC) and V OH(AC) for single-ended signals.
Table 51: Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Definition
Single-Ended Output Slew
Rates (Linear Signals)
Measured
Output
Edge
From
To
Calculation
DQ
Rising
VOL(AC)
VOH(AC)
VOH(AC) - VOL(AC)
ΔTRse
Falling
VOH(AC)
VOL(AC)
VOH(AC) - VOL(AC)
ΔTFse
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
74
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Figure 32: Nominal Slew Rate Definition for Single-Ended Output Signals
ΔTRse
VOH(AC)
VTT
VOL(AC)
ΔTFse
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
75
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions
Slew Rate Definitions for Differential Output Signals
The differential output driver is summarized in Table 49 (page 72). With the reference
load for timing measurements, the output slew rate for falling and rising edges is defined and measured between V OL(AC) and V OH(AC) for differential signals.
Table 52: Differential Output Slew Rate Definition
Differential Output Slew
Rates (Linear Signals)
Measured
Output
Edge
From
To
Calculation
DQS, DQS#
Rising
VOL,diff(AC)
VOH,diff(AC)
VOH,diff(AC) - VOL,diff(AC)
ΔTRdiff
Falling
VOH,diff(AC)
VOL,diff(AC)
VOH,diff(AC) - VOL,diff(AC)
ΔTFdiff
Figure 33: Nominal Differential Output Slew Rate Definition for DQS, DQS#
ΔTRdiff
VOH,diff(AC)
0
VOL,diff(AC)
ΔTFdiff
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
76
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Speed Bin Tables
Speed Bin Tables
Table 53: DDR3L-1066 Speed Bins
DDR3L-1066 Speed Bin
-187E
-187
CL-tRCD-tRP
7-7-7
8-8-8
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit
tAA
13.125
–
15
–
ns
tRCD
13.125
–
15
–
ns
PRECHARGE command period
tRP
13.125
–
15
–
ns
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH command
period
tRC
50.625
–
52.5
–
ns
tRAS
37.5
9 x tREFI
37.5
9 x tREFI
ns
1
3.0
3.3
3.0
3.3
ns
2
ns
3
Internal READ command to first data
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay
time
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
CL = 5
CL = 6
CL = 7
CL = 8
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
ns
2
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
3
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
3
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
2, 3
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
2.5
<2.5
Reserved
1.875
Supported CWL settings
Notes:
3.3
1.875
Supported CL settings
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Notes
<2.5
Reserved
2.5
3.3
Reserved
1.875
<2.5
ns
3
ns
2
5, 6, 7, 8
5, 6, 8
CK
5, 6
5, 6
CK
1. tREFI depends on TOPER.
2. The CL and CWL settings result in tCK requirements. When making a selection of tCK,
both CL and CWL requirement settings need to be fulfilled.
3. Reserved settings are not allowed.
77
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Speed Bin Tables
Table 54: DDR3L-1333 Speed Bins
DDR3L-1333 Speed Bin
-15E1
-152
CL-tRCD-tRP
9-9-9
10-10-10
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Max
Min
Max
Unit
tAA
13.5
–
15
–
ns
tRCD
13.5
–
15
–
ns
PRECHARGE command period
tRP
13.5
–
15
–
ns
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH command
period
tRC
49.5
–
51
–
ns
tRAS
36
9 x tREFI
36
9 x tREFI
ns
3
3.0
3.3
3.0
3.3
ns
4
ns
5
Internal READ command to first data
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay
time
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
CL = 5
CL = 6
CL = 7
CL = 8
CL = 9
CL = 10
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 6, 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4, 5
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
4
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 5, 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4, 5
CWL = 5, 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
5
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
ns
4
Reserved
2.5
<2.5
1.875
1.5
<2.5
<1.875
Reserved
1.5
Supported CWL settings
Notes:
3.3
1.875
Supported CL settings
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Notes
<1.875
Reserved
2.5
3.3
1.875
1.5
<2.5
<1.875
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
5, 6, 8, 10
CK
5, 6, 7
5, 6, 7
CK
1.
2.
3.
4.
The -15E speed grade is backward compatible with 1066, CL = 7 (-187E).
The -15 speed grade is backward compatible with 1066, CL = 8 (-187).
tREFI depends on T
OPER.
The CL and CWL settings result in tCK requirements. When making a selection of tCK,
both CL and CWL requirement settings need to be fulfilled.
5. Reserved settings are not allowed.
78
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Speed Bin Tables
Table 55: DDR3L-1600 Speed Bins
-1251
DDR3L-1600 Speed Bin
CL-tRCD-tRP
11-11-11
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
tAA
13.75
–
ns
tRCD
13.75
–
ns
PRECHARGE command period
tRP
13.75
–
ns
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH command period
tRC
48.75
–
ns
tRAS
35
9 x tREFI
ns
2
3.0
3.3
ns
3
ns
4
Internal READ command to first data
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay time
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
CL = 5
CL = 6
CL = 7
CL = 8
CL = 9
CL = 10
CL = 11
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 6, 7, 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 7, 8
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 6
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 6, 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
Supported CL settings
Supported CWL settings
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Notes
Reserved
2.5
3.3
1.875
<2.5
1.875
1.5
1.5
<2.5
<1.875
<1.875
1.25
<1.5
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
CK
5, 6, 7, 8
CK
1. The -125 speed grade is backward compatible with 1333, CL = 9 (-15E) and 1066, CL = 7
(-187E).
2. tREFI depends on TOPER.
3. The CL and CWL settings result in tCK requirements. When making a selection of tCK,
both CL and CWL requirement settings need to be fulfilled.
4. Reserved settings are not allowed.
79
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Speed Bin Tables
Table 56: DDR3L-1866 Speed Bins
-1071
DDR3L-1866 Speed Bin
CL-tRCD-tRP
13-13-13
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Max
tAA
13.91
20
tRCD
13.91
–
ns
PRECHARGE command period
tRP
13.91
–
ns
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH command period
tRC
47.91
–
ns
tRAS
34
9 x tREFI
ns
2
3.0
3.3
ns
3
ns
4
Internal READ command to first data
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay time
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
CL = 5
CL = 6
CL = 7
CL = 8
CL = 9
CL = 10
CL = 11
CL = 12
CL = 13
CWL = 5
(AVG)
CWL = 6, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 6, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 5, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 6, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5, 6, 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5, 6, 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5, 6, 7, 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 9
tCK
CWL = 5, 6, 7, 8
tCK
CWL = 9
tCK
(AVG)
Supported CWL settings
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Notes
tCK
Supported CL settings
Notes:
Unit
Reserved
2.5
3.3
1.875
<2.5
Reserved
1.875
1.5
<2.5
<1.875
Reserved
1.5
<1.875
Reserved
Reserved
ns
3
ns
4
ns
3
ns
4
ns
4
ns
3
Reserved
ns
4
Reserved
ns
4
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
ns
3
1.25
1.07
<1.5
<1.25
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13
CK
5, 6, 7, 8, 9
CK
1. The -107 speed grade is backward compatible with 1600, CL = 11 (-125) , 1333, CL = 9
(-15E) and 1066, CL = 7 (-187E).
2. tREFI depends on TOPER.
3. The CL and CWL settings result in tCK requirements. When making a selection of tCK,
both CL and CWL requirement settings need to be fulfilled.
4. Reserved settings are not allowed.
80
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Speed Bin Tables
Table 57: DDR3L-2133 Speed Bins
-0931
DDR3L-2133 Speed Bin
CL-tRCD-tRP
14-14-14
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Max
tAA
13.09
20
tRCD
13.09
–
ns
PRECHARGE command period
tRP
13.09
–
ns
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH command period
tRC
46.09
–
ns
tRAS
33
9 x tREFI
ns
2
3.0
3.3
ns
3
ns
4
Internal READ command to first data
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay time
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
CL = 5
CL = 6
CL = 7
CL = 8
CL = 9
CL = 10
CL = 11
CL = 12
CL = 13
CL = 14
CWL = 5
(AVG)
CWL = 6, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 6, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 5, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
ns
4
CWL = 6
tCK
(AVG)
ns
3
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 5, 6, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5, 6, 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5, 6, 7
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 5, 6, 7, 8
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 9
tCK
CWL = 5, 6, 7, 8
tCK
CWL = 9
tCK
(AVG)
1.07
CWL = 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
tCK
(AVG)
CWL = 10
tCK
(AVG)
Supported CWL settings
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Notes
tCK
Supported CL settings
Notes:
Unit
Reserved
2.5
3.3
1.875
<2.5
Reserved
1.875
1.5
<2.5
<1.875
Reserved
1.5
<1.875
Reserved
Reserved
ns
3
ns
4
ns
3
ns
4
ns
4
ns
3
Reserved
ns
4
Reserved
ns
4
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
(AVG)
Reserved
ns
4
<1.25
ns
3
Reserved
Reserved
ns
4
0.938
<1.07
ns
3
1.25
<1.5
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14
CK
5, 6, 7, 8, 9
CK
1. The -093 speed grade is backward compatible with 1866, CL = 13 (-107) , 1600, CL = 11
(-125) , 1333, CL = 9 (-15E) and 1066, CL = 7 (-187E).
2. tREFI depends on TOPER.
3. The CL and CWL settings result in tCK requirements. When making a selection of tCK,
both CL and CWL requirement settings need to be fulfilled.
4. Reserved settings are not allowed.
81
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
TC ≤ 85°C
82
–147
–175
–194
–209
–222
–232
–241
–249
–257
–263
–269
tERR3per
tERR4per
tERR5per
tERR6per
tERR7per
tERR8per
tERR9per
tERR10per
tERR11per
tERR12per
tERRnper
3 cycles
4 cycles
5 cycles
6 cycles
7 cycles
8 cycles
9 cycles
10 cycles
11 cycles
12 cycles
n = 13, 14 . . . 49, 50
cycles
180
tERR2per
200
tJITcc,lck
DLL locking
0.43
tJITcc
(ABS)
DLL locked
tCL
Cumulative error across 2 cycles
Cycle-to-cycle jitter
Clock absolute low pulse width
0.43
tERRnper
180
160
242
237
231
224
217
209
200
188
175
157
132
–
–
–215
–210
–205
–200
–193
–186
–177
–168
–155
–140
–118
0.43
0.43
140
160
215
210
205
200
193
186
177
168
155
140
118
–
–
–188
–184
–180
–175
–169
–163
–155
–147
–136
–122
–103
0.43
0.43
MIN = (1 + 0.68ln[n]) × tJITper MIN
MAX = (1 + 0.68ln[n]) × tJITper MAX
–242
–237
–231
–224
–217
–209
–200
–188
–175
–157
–132
0.43
0.43
tERRnper
269
263
257
249
241
232
222
209
194
175
147
–
–
140
120
70
188
184
180
175
169
163
155
147
136
122
103
–
–
60
(ABS)
–60
tCH
70
–70
0.53
Clock absolute high pulse width
–70
80
0.47
MIN = tCK (AVG) MIN + tJITper MIN; MAX = tCK (AVG) MAX + tJITper
MAX
80
–80
0.53
0.53
(ABS)
–80
90
0.47
0.47
tCK
90
–90
0.53
0.53
range allowed
7800
3900
Clock absolute period
Clock period jitter
100
0.47
0.47
8
8
–90
0.53
0.53
tCK
7800
3900
–100
0.47
0.47
See Speed Bin Tables for
0.53
8
8
tJITper,lck
Low pulse width average
7800
3900
Max
DDR3L-1600
Min
DLL locked
(AVG)
tCL
0.47
8
8
Max
DDR3L-1333
Min
DLL locking
(AVG)
3900
7800
Clock Timing
Max
DDR3L-1066
Min
tJITper
(AVG)
tCH
High pulse width average
8
8
(DLL_DIS)
Clock period average: DLL enable mode
TC = >85°C to 95°C
tCK
Max
DDR3L-800
Min
Symbol
tCK
Clock period average:
DLL disable mode
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
(AVG)
tCK
(AVG)
tCK
ps
ps
ps
CK
CK
ns
ns
ns
Unit
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
16
16
15
14
13
13
12
12
10, 11
42
9, 42
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
–
0.38
tDQSQ
tQH
83
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
490
200
110
250
90
200
40
–
DQ High-Z time from CK, CK#
400
400
–
200
–
–600
0.38
–
–400
1
0.38
0.38
tDQSCK
tDQSCK
(DLL_DIS)
tQSH
tQSL
DQS, DQS# rising to/from rising CK, CK#
DQS, DQS# rising to/from rising CK, CK#
when DLL is disabled
DQS, DQS# differential output high time
DQS, DQS# differential output low time
–
–
–
–
0.55
0.55
0.25
0.3
0.9
0.2
0.2
0.45
0.45
–0.25
–
–
10
400
0.38
0.38
1
–300
DQ Strobe Output Timing
0.3
tWPST
DQS, DQS# differential WRITE postamble
DQS, DQS# falling hold from CK, CK# rising
0.9
DQS, DQS# falling setup to CK, CK# rising
0.2
0.2
tDSS
DQS, DQS# differential input high pulse
width
tWPRE
0.45
tDQSH
DQS, DQS# differential input low pulse width
DQS, DQS# differential WRITE preamble
0.45
tDQSL
tDSH
–0.25
tDQSS
DQS, DQS# rising to CK, CK# rising
DQ Strobe Input Timing
–800
tLZDQ
tHZDQ
DQ Low-Z time from CK, CK#
DQ output hold time from DQS, DQS#
Min
DQ Output Timing
600
250
160
275
140
250
90
DQS, DQS# to DQ skew, per access
(DC90)
tDH
(AC135)
tDS
(AC160)
tDS
Max
–
–
10
300
–
–
–
–
0.55
0.55
0.25
300
300
–
150
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max
DDR3L-1066
DQ Input Timing
Min
tDIPW
VREF @ 1 V/ns
Base (specification)
VREF @ 1 V/ns
Base (specification)
VREF @ 1 V/ns
Base (specification)
Symbol
DDR3L-800
Minimum data pulse width
Data hold time from
DQS, DQS#
Data setup time to
DQS, DQS#
Data setup time to
DQS, DQS#
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions (Continued)
0.40
0.40
1
–255
0.3
0.9
0.2
0.2
0.45
0.45
–0.25
–
–500
0.38
–
400
165
75
180
45
–
–
Min
–
–
10
255
–
–
–
–
0.55
0.55
0.25
250
250
–
125
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max
DDR3L-1333
0.40
0.40
1
–225
0.3
0.9
0.18
0.18
0.45
0.45
–0.27
–
–450
0.38
–
360
145
55
160
25
–
–
Min
–
–
10
225
–
–
–
–
0.55
0.55
0.27
225
225
–
100
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max
DDR3L-1600
CK
CK
ns
ps
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
ps
ps
(AVG)
tCK
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
Unit
21
21
26
23
25
25
25
22, 23
22, 23
21
41
19, 20
18, 19
19, 20
18, 19,
44
19, 20
18, 19,
44
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
0.9
0.3
tRPST
DQS, DQS# differential READ preamble
DQS, DQS# differential READ postamble
84
VREF @ 1 V/ns
VREF @ 1 V/ns
Base (specification)
VREF @ 1 V/ns
Base (specification)
0.3
0.9
–
Note 27
Note 24
300
300
Max
–
–
–
–
–
–
620
240
150
340
205
240
80
512
–
MIN = greater of 4CK or 7.5ns; MAX = N/A
tRTP
READ-to-PRECHARGE time
–
MIN = greater of 4CK or 7.5ns; MAX = N/A
45
–
tWTR
–
30
Delay from start of internal WRITE
transaction to internal READ command
50
–
MIN = 15ns; MAX = N/A
–
37.5
Write recovery time
50
–
tWR
x16 (2KB page size)
40
40
30
–
–
MIN = greater of 4CK or 7.5ns
tFAW
Four ACTIVATE
windows
MIN = greater of 4CK or 10ns
MIN = greater of MIN = greater of MIN = greater of MIN = greater of
4CK or 10ns
4CK or 7.5ns
4CK or 6ns
4CK or 6ns
tRRD
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE x4/x8 (1KB page
size)
minimum command
period
x16 (2KB page size)
x4/x8 (1KB page
size)
See Speed Bin Tables for tRC
tRC
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE command period
560
220
130
320
185
220
60
512
Note 27
Note 24
225
See Speed Bin Tables for tRAS
tRCD
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0.3
0.9
–
225
Max
tRAS
See Speed Bin Tables for
780
300
210
425
290
300
–
–
Note 27
Note 24
250
Min
–450
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
–
–
–
–
–
–
140
512
0.3
0.9
–
250
Max
See Speed Bin Tables for tRP
900
375
285
500
365
375
–
–
Min
–500
DDR3L-1600
tRP
tRCD
tIPW
(DC90
tIH
(AC135)
tIS
Min
–600
DDR3L-1333
PRECHARGE command period
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay
Minimum CTRL, CMD, ADDR pulse width
CTRL, CMD, ADDR
setup to CK,CK#
CTRL, CMD, ADDR
setup to CK,CK#
215
tIS
DLL locking time
CTRL, CMD, ADDR
setup to CK,CK#
(AC160)
512
tDLLK
Base (specification)
Note 27
Note 24
400
400
Max
DDR3L-1066
Command and Address Timing
–
DQS, DQS# High-Z time (RL + BL/2)
tRPRE
tLZDQS
tHZDQS
Min
–800
Symbol
DQS, DQS# Low-Z time (RL - 1)
DDR3L-800
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions (Continued)
CK
CK
ns
ns
ns
CK
CK
ns
ns
ns
ns
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
CK
CK
CK
ps
ps
Unit
31, 32
31, 34
31, 32,
33,34
31
31
31
31
31, 43
31, 32
31
31
41
20, 30
29, 30,
44
20, 30
29, 30,
44
20, 30
29, 30,
44
28
23, 27
23, 24
22, 23
22, 23
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
256
64
tZQCS
85
–
64
256
–
–
–
TC > 85°C
TC ≤ 85°C
TC > 85°C
TC ≤ 85°C
Exit self refresh to commands not requiring a
locked DLL
Maximum average
periodic refresh
Maximum refresh
period
– 2Gb
– 4Gb
– 8Gb
tRFC
tRFC
tXS
tREFI
–
– 1Gb
tRFC
MIN = greater of 5CK or tRFC + 10ns; MAX = N/A
Self Refresh Timing
3.9 (32ms/8192)
7.8 (64ms/8192)
32 (2X)
64 (1X)
MIN = 350; MAX = 70,200
MIN = 260; MAX = 70,200
MIN = 160; MAX = 70,200
MIN = 110; MAX = 70,200
RESET# LOW to I/O and RTT High-Z
tRFC
MIN = N/A; MAX = 20
tIOZ
REFRESH-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH
command period
MIN = 0; MAX = 200
tRPS
RESET# LOW to power supplies stable
Refresh Timing
MIN = N/A; MAX = 200
tVDDPR
64
256
Begin power supply ramp to power supplies
stable
–
MIN = greater of 5CK or tRFC + 10ns; MAX = N/A
64
256
Exit reset from CKE HIGH to a valid command
Initialization and Reset Timing
–
tXPR
ZQCS command: Short calibration time
tZQoper
512
512
Normal operation
–
–
POWER-UP and RESET operation
ZQCL command: Long
calibration time
512
512
tZQinit
MULTIPURPOSE REGISTER READ burst end to
mode register set for multipurpose register
exit
–
MIN = 1CK; MAX = N/A
tMPRR
Calibration Timing
MIN = 4CK; MAX = N/A
MIN = greater of 12CK or 15ns; MAX = N/A
tMOD
MODE REGISTER SET command update delay
Min
tMRD
Max
MODE REGISTER SET command cycle time
Min
MIN = WR + tRP/tCK (AVG); MAX = N/A
Max
tDAL
Min
–
–
–
Max
DDR3L-1600
Auto precharge write recovery + precharge
time
Max
DDR3L-1333
MIN = 4CK; MAX = N/A
Min
DDR3L-1066
tCCD
Symbol
DDR3L-800
CAS#-to-CAS# command delay
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions (Continued)
CK
μs
μs
ms
ms
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ms
ms
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
Unit
36
36
36
36
35
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
86
CK
tANPD
+ tXPDLL
MIN = 1
tMOD
MIN = RL + 4 + 1
MIN = WL + 4 + tWR/tCK (AVG)
MIN = WL + 2 + tWR/tCK (AVG)
tREFPDEN
tMRSPDEN
tRDPDEN
tWRPDEN
tWRPDEN
PRECHARGE/PRECHARGE ALL command to
power-down entry
REFRESH command to power-down entry
MRS command to power-down entry
READ/READ with auto precharge command
to power-down entry
BL8 (OTF, MRS)
BC4OTF
BC4MRS
WRITE command to
power-down entry
(MIN)
MIN = 1
tPRPDEN
ACTIVATE command to power-down entry
MIN =
MIN = 1
tACTPDEN
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
(MIN); MAX = 9 * tREFI
CK
CK
Greater of tANPD or tRFC - REFRESH command to CKE LOW time
tCKE
Greater of 3CK
or 5ns
CK
MIN =
Greater of 3CK
or 5.625ns
MIN = 1; MAX = N/A
Greater of 3CK
or 5.625ns
CK
CK
CK
CK
Unit
WL - 1CK
Greater of 3CK
or 7.5ns
Power-Down Entry Minimum Timing
PDX
PDE
Power-down entry period: ODT either
synchronous or asynchronous
Power-down exit period: ODT either
synchronous or asynchronous
tANPD
tPD
tCPDED
(MIN)
Begin power-down period prior to CKE
registered HIGH
Power-down entry to power-down exit timing
Command pass disable delay
CKE MIN pulse width
Power-Down Timing
MIN = greater of 5CK or 10ns; MAX = N/A
tCKSRX
Valid clocks before self refresh exit,
power-down exit, or reset exit
tCKE
MIN = greater of 5CK or 10ns; MAX = N/A
Max
DDR3L-1600
Min
tCKSRE
Max
Valid clocks after self refresh entry or powerdown entry
Min
MIN = tCKE (MIN) + CK; MAX = N/A
Max
tCKESR
Min
Minimum CKE low pulse width for self refresh entry to self refresh exit timing
Max
MIN = tDLLK (MIN); MAX = N/A
Min
tXSDLL
DDR3L-1333
Symbol
DDR3L-1066
Exit self refresh to commands requiring a
locked DLL
DDR3L-800
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions (Continued)
37
28
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
87
Write leveling setup from rising CK, CK#
crossing to rising DQS, DQS# crossing
DQS, DQS# delay
First DQS, DQS# rising edge
RTT dynamic change skew
ODTLcwn8
RTT(WR)-to-RTT,nom change skew - BL8
0.7
0.3
40
25
325
tWLDQSEN
tWLS
–
–
–
245
25
40
Write Leveling Timing
0.3
–
–
–
0.7
195
25
40
0.3
6CK + ODTLoff
4CK + ODTLoff
WL - 2CK
MIN = 4; MAX = N/A
Dynamic ODT Timing
tWLMRD
tADC
ODTLcnw
ODTLcwn4
RTT(WR)-to-RTT,nom change skew - BC4
ODTH4
ODT HIGH time without WRITE command or
with WRITE command and BC4
RTT,nom-to-RTT(WR) change skew
ODTH8
ODT HIGH time with WRITE command and
BL8
MIN = 6; MAX = N/A
MIN = 2; MAX = 8.5
0.3
tAOFPD
0.7
–250
Asynchronous RTT turn-off delay
(power-down with DLL off)
0.3
300
CWL + AL - 2CK
MIN = 2; MAX = 8.5
0.7
–300
CWL + AL - 2CK
Asynchronous RTT turn-on delay
(power-down with DLL off)
0.3
tAOF
RTT turn-off from ODTL off reference
400
ODT Timing
tAONPD
–400
ODTLoff
RTT synchronous turn-off delay
tAON
ODTLon
RTT synchronous turn-on delay
Max
Min
Max
–
–
–
0.7
0.7
250
165
25
40
0.3
0.3
–225
–
–
–
0.7
0.7
225
MIN = greater of 3CK or 6ns;
MAX = N/A
Min
DDR3L-1600
MIN = greater of 10CK or 24ns; MAX = N/A
MIN = greater of 3CK or 7.5ns;
MAX = N/A
Power-Down Exit Timing
RTT turn-on from ODTL on reference
tXPDLL
tXP
Precharge power-down with DLL off to
commands requiring a locked DLL
DLL on, any valid command, or DLL off to
commands not requiring locked DLL
Max
MIN = WL + 2 + WR + 1
DEN
DEN
Min
tWRAP-
Max
MIN = WL + 4 + WR + 1
Min
tWRAP-
DDR3L-1333
Symbol
DDR3L-1066
BL8 (OTF, MRS)
WRITE with auto
precharge command to BC4OTF
power-down entry
BC4MRS
DDR3L-800
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions (Continued)
ps
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
ns
ns
CK
ps
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
Unit
39
40
38
39, 40
23, 38
40
38
28
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Min
325
0
0
Symbol
tWLH
tWLO
tWLOE
Write leveling output delay
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Write leveling output error
2
9
–
Max
DDR3L-800
Write leveling hold from rising DQS, DQS#
crossing to rising CK, CK# crossing
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
0
0
245
Min
2
9
–
Max
DDR3L-1066
Table 58: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions (Continued)
0
0
195
Min
2
9
–
Max
DDR3L-1333
0
0
165
Min
2
7.5
–
Max
DDR3L-1600
ns
ns
ps
Unit
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
88
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
AC timing parameters are valid from specified TC MIN to TC MAX values.
All voltages are referenced to VSS.
Output timings are only valid for RON34 output buffer selection.
The unit tCK (AVG) represents the actual tCK (AVG) of the input clock under operation.
The unit CK represents one clock cycle of the input clock, counting the actual clock
edges.
AC timing and IDD tests may use a VIL-to-VIH swing of up to 900mV in the test environment, but input timing is still referenced to VREF (except tIS, tIH, tDS, and tDH use the
AC/DC trip points and CK, CK# and DQS, DQS# use their crossing points). The minimum
slew rate for the input signals used to test the device is 1 V/ns for single-ended inputs
and 2 V/ns for differential inputs in the range between VIL(AC) and VIH(AC).
All timings that use time-based values (ns, μs, ms) should use tCK (AVG) to determine the
correct number of clocks (Table 58 (page 82) uses CK or tCK [AVG] interchangeably). In
the case of noninteger results, all minimum limits are to be rounded up to the nearest
whole integer, and all maximum limits are to be rounded down to the nearest whole
integer.
Strobe or DQSdiff refers to the DQS and DQS# differential crossing point when DQS is
the rising edge. Clock or CK refers to the CK and CK# differential crossing point when
CK is the rising edge.
This output load is used for all AC timing (except ODT reference timing) and slew rates.
The actual test load may be different. The output signal voltage reference point is
VDDQ/2 for single-ended signals and the crossing point for differential signals (see Figure
31 (page 74)).
When operating in DLL disable mode, Micron does not warrant compliance with normal
mode timings or functionality.
The clock’s tCK (AVG) is the average clock over any 200 consecutive clocks and tCK (AVG)
MIN is the smallest clock rate allowed, with the exception of a deviation due to clock
jitter. Input clock jitter is allowed provided it does not exceed values specified and must
be of a random Gaussian distribution in nature.
Spread spectrum is not included in the jitter specification values. However, the input
clock can accommodate spread-spectrum at a sweep rate in the range of 20–60 kHz with
an additional 1% of tCK (AVG) as a long-term jitter component; however, the spread
spectrum may not use a clock rate below tCK (AVG) MIN.
The clock’s tCH (AVG) and tCL (AVG) are the average half clock period over any 200 consecutive clocks and is the smallest clock half period allowed, with the exception of a deviation due to clock jitter. Input clock jitter is allowed provided it does not exceed values
specified and must be of a random Gaussian distribution in nature.
The period jitter (tJITper) is the maximum deviation in the clock period from the average
or nominal clock. It is allowed in either the positive or negative direction.
tCH (ABS) is the absolute instantaneous clock high pulse width as measured from one
rising edge to the following falling edge.
tCL (ABS) is the absolute instantaneous clock low pulse width as measured from one falling edge to the following rising edge.
The cycle-to-cycle jitter tJITcc is the amount the clock period can deviate from one cycle
to the next. It is important to keep cycle-to-cycle jitter at a minimum during the DLL
locking time.
The cumulative jitter error tERRnper, where n is the number of clocks between 2 and 50,
is the amount of clock time allowed to accumulate consecutively away from the average
clock over n number of clock cycles.
tDS (base) and tDH (base) values are for a single-ended 1 V/ns slew rate DQs and 2 V/ns
slew rate differential DQS, DQS#; when DQ single-ended slew rate is 2V/ns, the DQS differential slew rate is 4V/ns.
89
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
19. These parameters are measured from a data signal (DM, DQ0, DQ1, and so forth) transition edge to its respective data strobe signal (DQS, DQS#) crossing.
20. The setup and hold times are listed converting the base specification values (to which
derating tables apply) to VREF when the slew rate is 1 V/ns. These values, with a slew rate
of 1 V/ns, are for reference only.
21. When the device is operated with input clock jitter, this parameter needs to be derated
by the actual tJITper (larger of tJITper (MIN) or tJITper (MAX) of the input clock (output
deratings are relative to the SDRAM input clock).
22. Single-ended signal parameter.
23. The DRAM output timing is aligned to the nominal or average clock. Most output parameters must be derated by the actual jitter error when input clock jitter is present,
even when within specification. This results in each parameter becoming larger. The following parameters are required to be derated by subtracting tERR10per (MAX): tDQSCK
(MIN), tLZDQS (MIN), tLZDQ (MIN), and tAON (MIN). The following parameters are required to be derated by subtracting tERR10per (MIN): tDQSCK (MAX), tHZ (MAX), tLZDQS
(MAX), tLZDQ MAX, and tAON (MAX). The parameter tRPRE (MIN) is derated by subtracting tJITper (MAX), while tRPRE (MAX) is derated by subtracting tJITper (MIN).
24. The maximum preamble is bound by tLZDQS (MAX).
25. These parameters are measured from a data strobe signal (DQS, DQS#) crossing to its respective clock signal (CK, CK#) crossing. The specification values are not affected by the
amount of clock jitter applied, as these are relative to the clock signal crossing. These
parameters should be met whether clock jitter is present.
26. The tDQSCK (DLL_DIS) parameter begins CL + AL - 1 cycles after the READ command.
27. The maximum postamble is bound by tHZDQS (MAX).
28. Commands requiring a locked DLL are: READ (and RDAP) and synchronous ODT commands. In addition, after any change of latency tXPDLL, timing must be met.
29. tIS (base) and tIH (base) values are for a single-ended 1 V/ns control/command/address
slew rate and 2 V/ns CK, CK# differential slew rate.
30. These parameters are measured from a command/address signal transition edge to its
respective clock (CK, CK#) signal crossing. The specification values are not affected by
the amount of clock jitter applied as the setup and hold times are relative to the clock
signal crossing that latches the command/address. These parameters should be met
whether clock jitter is present.
31. For these parameters, the DDR3L SDRAM device supports tnPARAM (nCK) = RU(tPARAM
[ns]/tCK[AVG] [ns]), assuming all input clock jitter specifications are satisfied. For example, the device will support tnRP (nCK) = RU(tRP/tCK[AVG]) if all input clock jitter specifications are met. This means that for DDR3-800 6-6-6, of which tRP = 5ns, the device will
support tnRP = RU(tRP/tCK[AVG]) = 6 as long as the input clock jitter specifications are
met. That is, the PRECHARGE command at T0 and the ACTIVATE command at T0 + 6 are
valid even if six clocks are less than 15ns due to input clock jitter.
32. During READs and WRITEs with auto precharge, the DDR3 SDRAM will hold off the internal PRECHARGE command until tRAS (MIN) has been satisfied.
33. When operating in DLL disable mode, the greater of 4CK or 15ns is satisfied for tWR.
34. The start of the write recovery time is defined as follows:
• For BL8 (fixed by MRS or OTF): Rising clock edge four clock cycles after WL
• For BC4 (OTF): Rising clock edge four clock cycles after WL
• For BC4 (fixed by MRS): Rising clock edge two clock cycles after WL
35. RESET# should be LOW as soon as power starts to ramp to ensure the outputs are in
High-Z. Until RESET# is LOW, the outputs are at risk of driving and could result in excessive current, depending on bus activity.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
90
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
36. The refresh period is 64ms when TC is less than or equal to 85°C. This equates to an average refresh rate of 7.8125μs. However, nine REFRESH commands should be asserted at
least once every 70.3μs. When TC is greater than 85°C, the refresh period is 32ms.
37. Although CKE is allowed to be registered LOW after a REFRESH command when
tREFPDEN (MIN) is satisfied, there are cases where additional time such as tXPDLL (MIN)
is required.
38. ODT turn-on time MIN is when the device leaves High-Z and ODT resistance begins to
turn on. ODT turn-on time maximum is when the ODT resistance is fully on. The ODT
reference load is shown in Figure 24 (page 62). This output load is used for ODT timings
(see Figure 31 (page 74)).Designs that were created prior to JEDEC tightening the maximum limit from 9ns to 8.5ns will be allowed to have a 9ns maximum.
39. Half-clock output parameters must be derated by the actual tERR10per and tJITdty when
input clock jitter is present. This results in each parameter becoming larger. The parameters tADC (MIN) and tAOF (MIN) are each required to be derated by subtracting both
tERR10per (MAX) and tJITdty (MAX). The parameters tADC (MAX) and tAOF (MAX) are
required to be derated by subtracting both tERR10per (MAX) and tJITdty (MAX).
40. ODT turn-off time minimum is when the device starts to turn off ODT resistance. ODT
turn-off time maximum is when the DRAM buffer is in High-Z. The ODT reference load is
shown in Figure 24 (page 62). This output load is used for ODT timings (see Figure 31
(page 74)).
41. Pulse width of a input signal is defined as the width between the first crossing of
VREF(DC) and the consecutive crossing of VREF(DC).
42. Should the clock rate be larger than tRFC (MIN), an AUTO REFRESH command should
have at least one NOP command between it and another AUTO REFRESH command. Additionally, if the clock rate is slower than 40ns (25 MHz), all REFRESH commands should
be followed by a PRECHARGE ALL command.
43. DRAM devices should be evenly addressed when being accessed. Disproportionate accesses to a particular row address may result in a reduction of REFRESH characteristics or
product lifetime.
44. When two VIH(AC) values (and two corresponding VIL(AC) values) are listed for a specific
speed bin, the user may choose either value for the input AC level. Whichever value is
used, the associated setup time for that AC level must also be used. Additionally, one
VIH(AC) value may be used for address/command inputs and the other VIH(AC) value may
be used for data inputs.
For example, for DDR3-800, two input AC levels are defined: VIH(AC175),min and
VIH(AC150),min (corresponding VIL(AC175),min and VIL(AC150),min). For DDR3-800, the address/
command inputs must use either VIH(AC175),min with tIS(AC175) of 200ps or VIH(AC150),min
with tIS(AC150) of 350ps; independently, the data inputs must use either VIH(AC175),min
with tDS(AC175) of 75ps or VIH(AC150),min with tDS(AC150) of 125ps.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
91
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
92
120
100
tJITcc
tJITcc,lck
DLL locking
0.43
0.43
3900
7800
Max
–
–
50
60
tCK
DDR3L-2133
3900
7800
Max
–40
–50
0.47
0.43
0.43
120
100
–
–
40
50
0.53
0.53
range allowed ns
0.47
tCK
8
8
Min
MIN =
(AVG) MIN +
tJITper MIN; MAX =
tCK (AVG) MAX +
tJITper MAX ps
0.53
0.53
See Speed Bin Tables for
DLL locked
(ABS)
tCL
Clock absolute low pulse width
Cycle-to-cycle jitter
(ABS)
tCH
(ABS)
Clock absolute high pulse width
Clock absolute period
tCK
–60
–50
tJITper,lck
0.47
0.47
DLL locked
Low pulse width average
8
8
DLL locking
(AVG)
tCL
Clock period jitter
(AVG)
DDR3L-1866
Clock Timing
Min
tJITper
(AVG)
tCH
Clock period average: DLL enable mode
(DLL_DIS)
High pulse width average
TC = >85°C to 95°C
TC = 0°C to 85°C
tCK
Symbol
tCK
Clock period average:
DLL disable mode
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
ps
ps
(AVG)
tCK
(AVG)
tCK
ps
ps
CK
CK
ns
ns
Unit
16
16
15
14
13
13
12
12
10, 11
42
9, 42
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
tERR9per
tERR10per
8 cycles
9 cycles
10 cycles
11 cycles
93
0.38
–
–0.27
0.45
tDQSS
tDQSL
DQ High-Z time from CK, CK#
DQS, DQS# rising to CK, CK# rising
DQS, DQS# differential input low pulse width
195
195
–
85
–
–
–
–
–
0.55
0.27
DQ Strobe Input Timing
–390
tLZDQ
tHZDQ
DQ Low-Z time from CK, CK#
DQ output hold time from DQS, DQS#
–
tQH
DQ Output Timing
tDQSQ
320
110
75
135
70
DQS, DQS# to DQ skew, per access
(DC90)
tDH
(AC130)
161
158
154
150
145
139
133
126
117
105
88
Max
–134
–132
–128
–125
–121
–116
–111
–105
–97
–87
–74
Min
DDR3L-2133
0.45
–0.27
–
–360
0.38
–
280
105
60
120.5
55
MIN = (1 + 0.68ln[n]) × tJITper MIN
tERRnper MAX = (1 + 0.68ln[n]) × tJITper MAX
tERRnper
DDR3L-1866
DQ Input Timing
Minimum data pulse width
VREF @ 2 V/ns
Base (specification)
@ 2 V/ns
VREF @ 2 V/ns
Base (specification)
@ 2 V/ns
tDS
tDIPW
Data hold time from
DQS, DQS#
Data setup time to
DQS, DQS#
tERR8per
7 cycles
–161
–150
–154
tERR7per
6 cycles
tERRnper
–139
–145
tERR6per
5 cycles
12 cycles
–133
tERR5per
4 cycles
n = 13, 14 . . . 49, 50
cycles
–117
–126
tERR4per
3 cycles
–158
–105
tERR3per
tERR12per
–88
tERR11per
Min
Symbol
tERR2per
Parameter
Cumulative error across 2 cycles
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
0.55
0.27
180
180
–
75
–
–
–
–
–
134
132
128
125
121
116
111
105
97
87
74
Max
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions (Continued)
CK
CK
ps
ps
(AVG)
tCK
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
Unit
25
22, 23
22, 23
21
41
19, 20
18, 19
19, 20
18, 19
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
0.3
–195
1
0.40
0.40
–390
tWPST
tDQSCK
tDQSCK
(DLL_DIS)
tQSH
tQSL
tLZDQS
DQS, DQS# differential WRITE postamble
DQS, DQS# rising to/from rising CK, CK#
DQS, DQS# rising to/from rising CK, CK#
when DLL is disabled
DQS, DQS# differential output high time
DQS, DQS# differential output low time
94
0.9
0.3
tRPRE
tRPST
DQS, DQS# differential READ preamble
DQS, DQS# differential READ postamble
VREF @ 1 V/ns
Base (specification)
tRC
tRC
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE command period
See Speed Bin Tables for
See Speed Bin Tables for tRAS
tRAS
ACTIVATE-to-PRECHARGE command period
tRCD
470
195
95
260
135
195
See Speed Bin Tables for
–
–
–
–
–
–
60
512
See Speed Bin Tables for tRP
ACTIVATE to internal READ or WRITE delay
535
200
110
275
150
200
–
–
0.3
0.9
–
–360
0.40
0.40
1
–180
tRP
tRCD
Note 27
Note 24
195
195
–
–
10
195
0.3
0.9
0.18
0.18
0.45
Min
180
180
–
–
10
180
–
–
–
–
0.55
Max
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Note 27
Note 24
DDR3L-2133
PRECHARGE command period
tIPW
(DC90)
tIH
(AC125)
tIS
Minimum CTRL, CMD, ADDR pulse width
CTRL, CMD, ADDR hold Base (specification)
from CK,CK#
VREF @ 1 V/ns
CTRL, CMD, ADDR
setup to CK,CK#
VREF @ 1 V/ns
65
tIS
CTRL, CMD, ADDR
setup to CK,CK#
(AC135)
512
tDLLK
DLL locking time
Base (specification)
–
–
–
–
0.55
Max
Command and Address Timing
–
tHZDQS
DQS, DQS# High-Z time (RL + BL/2)
DQS, DQS# Low-Z time (RL - 1)
0.9
DDR3L-1866
DQ Strobe Output Timing
0.18
DQS, DQS# falling hold from CK, CK# rising
tWPRE
0.18
tDSS
DQS, DQS# falling setup to CK, CK# rising
DQS, DQS# differential WRITE preamble
0.45
tDQSH
tDSH
Min
Symbol
Parameter
DQS, DQS# differential input high pulse
width
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions (Continued)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
CK
CK
CK
ps
ps
CK
CK
ns
ps
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
Unit
31, 43
31, 32
31
31
41
20, 30
29, 30
20, 30
29, 30,
44
20, 30
29, 30,
44
28
23, 27
23, 24
22, 23
22, 23
21
21
26
23
25
25
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
tFAW
Four ACTIVATE
windows
95
MIN = greater of 12CK or 15ns; MAX = N/A
MIN = 1CK; MAX = N/A
tMPRR
MODE REGISTER SET command update delay
MULTIPURPOSE REGISTER READ burst end to
mode register set for multipurpose register
exit
Normal operation
MIN = N/A; MAX = 200
MIN = 0; MAX = 200
MIN = N/A; MAX = 20
tVDDPR
tRPS
tIOZ
Begin power supply ramp to power supplies
stable
RESET# LOW to power supplies stable
RESET# LOW to I/O and RTT High-Z
Refresh Timing
MIN = greater of 5CK or tRFC + 10ns; MAX = N/A
tXPR
Exit reset from CKE HIGH to a valid command
Initialization and Reset Timing
MIN = N/A
MAX = max(64nCK, 80ns) tZQCS
MIN = N/A
MAX = max(256nCK, 320ns)
tZQoper
POWER-UP and RESET operation
ZQCS command: Short calibration time
MIN = N/A
MAX = MAX(512nCK, 640ns)
tZQinit
Calibration Timing
MIN = 4CK; MAX = N/A
tMRD
MIN = WR + tRP/tCK (AVG); MAX = N/A
tDAL
Auto precharge write recovery + precharge
time
tMOD
MIN = 4CK; MAX = N/A
CAS#-to-CAS# command delay
MODE REGISTER SET command cycle time
MIN = greater of 4CK or 7.5ns; MAX = N/A
tRTP
tCCD
READ-to-PRECHARGE time
MIN = greater of 4CK or 7.5ns; MAX = N/A
tWTR
35
25
Delay from start of internal WRITE transaction to internal READ command
–
–
MIN = 15ns; MAX = N/A
ZQCL command: Long
calibration time
Unit
–
ns
ms
ms
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
ns
ns
ns
CK
–
Max
MIN = greater of 4CK or 6ns
Min
CK
Max
MIN = greater of 4CK or 5ns
DDR3L-2133
tWR
35
27
Min
DDR3L-1866
Write recovery time
2KB page size
1KB page size
tRRD
Symbol
ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE 1KB page size
minimum command pe- 2KB page size
riod
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions (Continued)
35
31, 32
31, 34
31, 32,
33
31
31
31
31
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
– 2Gb
– 4Gb
– 8Gb
tRFC
tRFC
tRFC
Max
Min
Self Refresh Timing
64 (1X)
MIN = 350; MAX = 70,200
MIN = 260; MAX = 70,200
MIN = 160; MAX = 70,200
96
PDX
Power-down exit period: ODT either
synchronous or asynchronous
Power-Down Entry Minimum Timing
+ tXPDLL
CK
Greater of tANPD or tRFC - REFRESH command to CKE LOW time
PDE
Power-down entry period: ODT either
synchronous or asynchronous
tANPD
CK
WL - 1CK
tANPD
Begin power-down period prior to CKE
registered HIGH
CK
CK
CK
CK
MIN = tCKE (MIN);
MAX = 9 * tREFI
Power-down entry to power-down exit timing
Command pass disable delay
tPD
Greater of 3CK or 5ns
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
μs
μs
ms
ms
ns
ns
ns
ns
Unit
MIN = 2;
MAX = N/A
(MIN)
Power-Down Timing
MIN = greater of 5CK or 10ns; MAX = N/A
Max
tCPDED
CKE MIN pulse width
tCKE
tCKSRX
MIN = greater of 5CK or 10ns; MAX = N/A
tCKSRE
Valid clocks after self refresh entry or powerdown entry
Valid clocks before self refresh exit,
power-down exit, or reset exit
MIN = tCKE (MIN) + CK; MAX = N/A
tCKESR
MIN = tDLLK (MIN);
MAX = N/A
tXSDLL
Minimum CKE low pulse width for self refresh entry to self refresh exit timing
Exit self refresh to commands requiring a
locked DLL
MIN = greater of 5CK or tRFC + 10ns; MAX = N/A
tXS
3.9 (32ms/8192)
32 (2X)
TC > 85°C
DDR3L-2133
MIN = 110; MAX = 70,200
7.8 (64ms/8192)
tREFI
Min
TC > 85°C
–
– 1Gb
Symbol
tRFC
DDR3L-1866
TC ≤ 85°C
TC ≤ 85°C
Exit self refresh to commands not requiring a
locked DLL
Maximum average
periodic refresh
Maximum refresh
period
REFRESH-to-ACTIVATE or REFRESH
command period
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions (Continued)
28
36
36
36
36
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
MIN = WL + 2 +
tWR/tCK (AVG)
MIN = WL + 4 + WR + 1
tWRPDEN
tWRPDEN
tWRAP-
BL8 (OTF, MRS)
BC4OTF
BC4MRS
WRITE command to
power-down entry
97
ODTH8
ODT HIGH time with WRITE command and
BL8
MIN = 6; MAX = N/A
MIN = 2; MAX = 8.5
tAOFPD
Asynchronous RTT turn-off delay
(power-down with DLL off)
0.3
–180
MIN = 2; MAX = 8.5
0.7
195
Asynchronous RTT turn-on delay
(power-down with DLL off)
0.3
tAOF
RTT turn-on from ODTL on reference
RTT turn-off from ODTL off reference
CWL + AL - 2CK
CWL + AL - 2CK
tAONPD
–195
tAON
ODTL on
ODTL off
RTT synchronous turn-on delay
MIN = greater of 10CK or 24ns; MAX = N/A
tXPDLL
ODT Timing
MIN = greater of 3CK or 6ns;
MAX = N/A
Power-Down Exit Timing
DDR3L-2133
tXP
DEN
tWRAP-
RTT synchronous turn-off delay
Precharge power-down with DLL off to
commands requiring a locked DLL
DLL on, any valid command, or DLL off to
commands not requiring locked DLL
BC4MRS
MIN = WL + 2 + WR + 1
MIN = WL + 4 +
tWR/tCK (AVG)
tRDPDEN
READ/READ with auto precharge command
to power-down entry
DEN
MIN = RL + 4 + 1
tMRSPDEN
MRS command to power-down entry
BL8 (OTF, MRS)
BC4OTF
MIN = 2
MIN = tMOD (MIN)
tREFPDEN
REFRESH command to power-down entry
WRITE with auto precharge command to
power-down entry
MIN = 2
Min
tPRPDEN
Max
PRECHARGE/PRECHARGE ALL command to
power-down entry
Min
MIN = 2
Symbol
tACTPDEN
DDR3L-1866
ACTIVATE command to power-down entry
Parameter
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
0.7
180
Max
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions (Continued)
CK
ns
ns
CK
ps
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
Unit
40
38
39, 40
23, 38
40
38
28
37
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
0.3
40
25
140
140
tWLS
tWLH
Write leveling setup from rising CK, CK#
crossing to rising DQS, DQS# crossing
Write leveling hold from rising DQS, DQS#
crossing to rising CK, CK# crossing
98
0
0
tWLO
tWLOE
Write leveling output delay
Write leveling output error
Min
0.7
–
2
7.5
–
–
–
25
40
0.3
0
0
125
125
6CK + ODTLoff
4CK + ODTLoff
WL - 2CK
MIN = 4; MAX = N/A
Max
Write Leveling Timing
tWLDQSEN
DQS, DQS# delay
First DQS, DQS# rising edge
DDR3L-1866
Dynamic ODT Timing
Min
tWLMRD
RTT dynamic change skew
ODTLcwn8
RTT(WR)-to-RTT,nom change skew - BL8
tADC
ODTLcnw
ODTLcwn4
RTT,nom-to-RTT(WR) change skew
ODTH4
RTT(WR)-to-RTT,nom change skew - BC4
Symbol
Parameter
ODT HIGH time without WRITE command or
with WRITE command and BC4
Notes 1–8 apply to the entire table
DDR3L-2133
2
7
–
–
–
–
0.7
Max
Table 59: Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions for Speed Extensions (Continued)
ns
ns
ps
ps
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
CK
Unit
39
Notes
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
AC timing parameters are valid from specified TC MIN to TC MAX values.
All voltages are referenced to VSS.
Output timings are only valid for RON34 output buffer selection.
The unit tCK (AVG) represents the actual tCK (AVG) of the input clock under operation.
The unit CK represents one clock cycle of the input clock, counting the actual clock
edges.
AC timing and IDD tests may use a VIL-to-VIH swing of up to 900mV in the test environment, but input timing is still referenced to VREF (except tIS, tIH, tDS, and tDH use the
AC/DC trip points and CK, CK# and DQS, DQS# use their crossing points). The minimum
slew rate for the input signals used to test the device is 1 V/ns for single-ended inputs
(DQs are at 2V/ns for DDR3-1866 and DDR3-2133) and 2 V/ns for differential inputs in
the range between VIL(AC) and VIH(AC).
All timings that use time-based values (ns, μs, ms) should use tCK (AVG) to determine the
correct number of clocks (Table 59 (page 92) uses CK or tCK [AVG] interchangeably). In
the case of noninteger results, all minimum limits are to be rounded up to the nearest
whole integer, and all maximum limits are to be rounded down to the nearest whole
integer.
Strobe or DQSdiff refers to the DQS and DQS# differential crossing point when DQS is
the rising edge. Clock or CK refers to the CK and CK# differential crossing point when
CK is the rising edge.
This output load is used for all AC timing (except ODT reference timing) and slew rates.
The actual test load may be different. The output signal voltage reference point is
VDDQ/2 for single-ended signals and the crossing point for differential signals (see Figure
31 (page 74)).
When operating in DLL disable mode, Micron does not warrant compliance with normal
mode timings or functionality.
The clock’s tCK (AVG) is the average clock over any 200 consecutive clocks and tCK (AVG)
MIN is the smallest clock rate allowed, with the exception of a deviation due to clock
jitter. Input clock jitter is allowed provided it does not exceed values specified and must
be of a random Gaussian distribution in nature.
Spread spectrum is not included in the jitter specification values. However, the input
clock can accommodate spread-spectrum at a sweep rate in the range of 20–60 kHz with
an additional 1% of tCK (AVG) as a long-term jitter component; however, the spread
spectrum may not use a clock rate below tCK (AVG) MIN.
The clock’s tCH (AVG) and tCL (AVG) are the average half clock period over any 200 consecutive clocks and is the smallest clock half period allowed, with the exception of a deviation due to clock jitter. Input clock jitter is allowed provided it does not exceed values
specified and must be of a random Gaussian distribution in nature.
The period jitter (tJITper) is the maximum deviation in the clock period from the average
or nominal clock. It is allowed in either the positive or negative direction.
tCH (ABS) is the absolute instantaneous clock high pulse width as measured from one
rising edge to the following falling edge.
tCL (ABS) is the absolute instantaneous clock low pulse width as measured from one falling edge to the following rising edge.
The cycle-to-cycle jitter tJITcc is the amount the clock period can deviate from one cycle
to the next. It is important to keep cycle-to-cycle jitter at a minimum during the DLL
locking time.
The cumulative jitter error tERRnper, where n is the number of clocks between 2 and 50,
is the amount of clock time allowed to accumulate consecutively away from the average
clock over n number of clock cycles.
tDS (base) and tDH (base) values are for a single-ended 1 V/ns slew rate DQs (DQs are at
2V/ns for DDR3-1866 and DDR3-2133) and 2 V/ns slew rate differential DQS, DQS#; when
DQ single-ended slew rate is 2V/ns, the DQS differential slew rate is 4V/ns.
99
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
19. These parameters are measured from a data signal (DM, DQ0, DQ1, and so forth) transition edge to its respective data strobe signal (DQS, DQS#) crossing.
20. The setup and hold times are listed converting the base specification values (to which
derating tables apply) to VREF when the slew rate is 1 V/ns (DQs are at 2V/ns for
DDR3-1866 and DDR3-2133). These values, with a slew rate of 1 V/ns (DQs are at 2V/ns
for DDR3-1866 and DDR3-2133), are for reference only.
21. When the device is operated with input clock jitter, this parameter needs to be derated
by the actual tJITper (larger of tJITper (MIN) or tJITper (MAX) of the input clock (output
deratings are relative to the SDRAM input clock).
22. Single-ended signal parameter.
23. The DRAM output timing is aligned to the nominal or average clock. Most output parameters must be derated by the actual jitter error when input clock jitter is present,
even when within specification. This results in each parameter becoming larger. The following parameters are required to be derated by subtracting tERR10per (MAX): tDQSCK
(MIN), tLZDQS (MIN), tLZDQ (MIN), and tAON (MIN). The following parameters are required to be derated by subtracting tERR10per (MIN): tDQSCK (MAX), tHZ (MAX), tLZDQS
(MAX), tLZDQ (MAX), and tAON (MAX). The parameter tRPRE (MIN) is derated by subtracting tJITper (MAX), while tRPRE (MAX) is derated by subtracting tJITper (MIN).
24. The maximum preamble is bound by tLZDQS (MAX).
25. These parameters are measured from a data strobe signal (DQS, DQS#) crossing to its respective clock signal (CK, CK#) crossing. The specification values are not affected by the
amount of clock jitter applied, as these are relative to the clock signal crossing. These
parameters should be met whether clock jitter is present.
26. The tDQSCK (DLL_DIS) parameter begins CL + AL - 1 cycles after the READ command.
27. The maximum postamble is bound by tHZDQS (MAX).
28. Commands requiring a locked DLL are: READ (and RDAP) and synchronous ODT commands. In addition, after any change of latency tXPDLL, timing must be met.
29. tIS (base) and tIH (base) values are for a single-ended 1 V/ns control/command/address
slew rate and 2 V/ns CK, CK# differential slew rate.
30. These parameters are measured from a command/address signal transition edge to its
respective clock (CK, CK#) signal crossing. The specification values are not affected by
the amount of clock jitter applied as the setup and hold times are relative to the clock
signal crossing that latches the command/address. These parameters should be met
whether clock jitter is present.
31. For these parameters, the DDR3L SDRAM device supports tnPARAM (nCK) = RU(tPARAM
[ns]/tCK[AVG] [ns]), assuming all input clock jitter specifications are satisfied. For example, the device will support tnRP (nCK) = RU(tRP/tCK[AVG]) if all input clock jitter specifications are met. This means that for DDR3-800 6-6-6, of which tRP = 5ns, the device will
support tnRP = RU(tRP/tCK[AVG]) = 6 as long as the input clock jitter specifications are
met. That is, the PRECHARGE command at T0 and the ACTIVATE command at T0 + 6 are
valid even if six clocks are less than 15ns due to input clock jitter.
32. During READs and WRITEs with auto precharge, the DDR3 SDRAM will hold off the internal PRECHARGE command until tRAS (MIN) has been satisfied.
33. When operating in DLL disable mode, the greater of 5CK or 15ns is satisfied for tWR.
34. The start of the write recovery time is defined as follows:
• For BL8 (fixed by MRS or OTF): Rising clock edge four clock cycles after WL
• For BC4 (OTF): Rising clock edge four clock cycles after WL
• For BC4 (fixed by MRS): Rising clock edge two clock cycles after WL
35. RESET# should be LOW as soon as power starts to ramp to ensure the outputs are in
High-Z. Until RESET# is LOW, the outputs are at risk of driving and could result in excessive current, depending on bus activity.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
100
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions
36. The refresh period is 64ms when TC is less than or equal to 85°C. This equates to an average refresh rate of 7.8125μs. However, nine REFRESH commands should be asserted at
least once every 70.3μs. When TC is greater than 85°C, the refresh period is 32ms.
37. Although CKE is allowed to be registered LOW after a REFRESH command when
tREFPDEN (MIN) is satisfied, there are cases where additional time such as tXPDLL (MIN)
is required.
38. ODT turn-on time MIN is when the device leaves High-Z and ODT resistance begins to
turn on. ODT turn-on time maximum is when the ODT resistance is fully on. The ODT
reference load is shown in Figure 24 (page 62). This output load is used for ODT timings
(see Figure 31 (page 74)).Designs that were created prior to JEDEC tightening the maximum limit from 9ns to 8.5ns will be allowed to have a 9ns maximum.
39. Half-clock output parameters must be derated by the actual tERR10per and tJITdty when
input clock jitter is present. This results in each parameter becoming larger. The parameters tADC (MIN) and tAOF (MIN) are each required to be derated by subtracting both
tERR10per (MAX) and tJITdty (MAX). The parameters tADC (MAX) and tAOF (MAX) are
required to be derated by subtracting both tERR10per (MAX) and tJITdty (MAX).
40. ODT turn-off time minimum is when the device starts to turn off ODT resistance. ODT
turn-off time maximum is when the DRAM buffer is in High-Z. The ODT reference load is
shown in Figure 24 (page 62). This output load is used for ODT timings (see Figure 31
(page 74)).
41. Pulse width of a input signal is defined as the width between the first crossing of
VREF(DC) and the consecutive crossing of VREF(DC).
42. Should the clock rate be larger than tRFC (MIN), an AUTO REFRESH command should
have at least one NOP command between it and another AUTO REFRESH command. Additionally, if the clock rate is slower than 40ns (25 MHz), all REFRESH commands should
be followed by a PRECHARGE ALL command.
43. DRAM devices should be evenly addressed when being accessed. Disproportionate accesses to a particular row address may result in a reduction of REFRESH characteristics or
product lifetime.
44. When two VIH(AC) values (and two corresponding VIL(AC) values) are listed for a specific
speed bin, the user may choose either value for the input AC level. Whichever value is
used, the associated setup time for that AC level must also be used. Additionally, one
VIH(AC) value may be used for address/command inputs and the other VIH(AC) value may
be used for data inputs.
For example, for DDR3-800, two input AC levels are defined: VIH(AC175),min and
VIH(AC150),min (corresponding VIL(AC175),min and VIL(AC150),min). For DDR3-800, the address/
command inputs must use either VIH(AC175),min with tIS(AC175) of 200ps or VIH(AC150),min
with tIS(AC150) of 350ps; independently, the data inputs must use either VIH(AC175),min
with tDS(AC175) of 75ps or VIH(AC150),min with tDS(AC150) of 125ps.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
101
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
The total tIS (setup time) and tIH (hold time) required is calculated by adding the data
sheet tIS (base) and tIH (base) values (see Table 60; values come from the Electrical
Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions table) to the ΔtIS and ΔtIH derating values
(see Table 61 (page 103), Table 62 (page 103) or Table 63 (page 103)) respectively. Example: tIS (total setup time) = tIS (base) + ΔtIS. For a valid transition, the input signal
has to remain above/below V IH(AC)/VIL(AC) for some time tVAC (see Table 64 (page 104)).
Although the total setup time for slow slew rates might be negative (for example, a valid
input signal will not have reached V IH(AC)/VIL(AC) at the time of the rising clock transition), a valid input signal is still required to complete the transition and to reach
VIH(AC)/VIL(AC) (see Figure 15 (page 52) for input signal requirements). For slew rates that
fall between the values listed in Table 61 (page 103) and Table 63 (page 103), the derating values may be obtained by linear interpolation.
Setup (tIS) nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the
last crossing of V REF(DC) and the first crossing of V IH(AC)min. Setup (tIS) nominal slew rate
for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF(DC) and
the first crossing of V IL(AC)max. If the actual signal is always earlier than the nominal slew
rate line between the shaded V REF(DC)-to-AC region, use the nominal slew rate for derating value (see Figure 34 (page 105)). If the actual signal is later than the nominal slew
rate line anywhere between the shaded V REF(DC)-to-AC region, the slew rate of a tangent
line to the actual signal from the AC level to the DC level is used for derating value (see
Figure 36 (page 107)).
Hold (tIH) nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the
last crossing of V IL(DC)max and the first crossing of V REF(DC). Hold (tIH) nominal slew rate
for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IH(DC)min and
the first crossing of V REF(DC). If the actual signal is always later than the nominal slew
rate line between the shaded DC-to-VREF(DC) region, use the nominal slew rate for derating value (see Figure 35 (page 106)). If the actual signal is earlier than the nominal slew
rate line anywhere between the shaded DC-to-VREF(DC) region, the slew rate of a tangent
line to the actual signal from the DC level to the V REF(DC) level is used for derating value
(see Figure 37 (page 108)).
Table 60: DDR3L Command and Address Setup and Hold Values 1 V/ns Referenced – AC/DC-Based
Symbol
tIS(base,
800
1066
1333
1600
1866
2133
Unit
Reference
–
–
ps
VIH(AC)/VIL(AC)
AC160)
215
140
80
60
tIS(base,
AC135)
365
290
205
185
65
60
ps
VIH(AC)/VIL(AC)
tIS(base,
AC125)
–
–
–
–
150
135
ps
VIH(AC)/VIL(AC)
285
210
150
130
110
105
ps
VIH(DC)/VIL(DC)
tIH(base,
DC90)
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
102
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Table 61: DDR3L-800/1066 Derating Values tIS/tIH – AC160/DC90-Based
ΔtIS, ΔtIH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
CMD/ADDR
4.0 V/ns
Slew Rate
V/ns
ΔtIS ΔtIH
CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate
3.0 V/ns
2.0 V/ns
1.8 V/ns
1.6 V/ns
1.4 V/ns
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
1.2 V/ns
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
1.0 V/ns
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
2.0
80
45
80
45
80
45
88
53
96
61
104
69
112
79
120
95
1.5
53
30
53
30
53
30
61
38
69
46
77
54
85
64
93
80
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
16
16
24
24
32
34
40
50
0.9
–1
–3
–1
–3
–1
–3
7
5
15
13
23
21
31
31
39
47
0.8
–3
–8
–3
–8
–3
–8
5
1
13
9
21
17
29
27
37
43
0.7
–5
–13
–5
–13
–5
–13
3
–5
11
3
19
11
27
21
35
37
0.6
–8
–20
–8
–20
–8
–20
0
–12
8
–4
16
4
24
14
32
30
0.5
–20
–30
–20
–30
–20
–30
–12
–22
–4
–14
4
–6
12
4
20
20
0.4
–40
–45
–40
–45
–40
–45
–32
–37
–24
–29
–16
–21
–8
–11
0
5
Table 62: DDR3L-800/1066/1333/1600 Derating Values for tIS/tIH – AC135/DC90-Based
ΔtIS, ΔtIH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
CMD/ADDR
4.0 V/ns
Slew Rate
V/ns
ΔtIS ΔtIH
CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate
3.0 V/ns
2.0 V/ns
1.8 V/ns
1.6 V/ns
1.4 V/ns
1.2 V/ns
1.0 V/ns
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
2.0
68
45
68
45
68
45
76
53
84
61
92
69
100
79
108
95
1.5
45
30
45
30
45
30
53
38
61
46
69
54
77
64
85
80
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
16
16
24
24
32
34
40
50
0.9
2
–3
2
–3
2
–3
10
5
18
13
26
21
34
31
42
47
0.8
3
–8
3
–8
3
–8
11
1
19
9
27
17
35
27
43
43
0.7
6
–13
6
–13
6
–13
14
–5
22
3
30
11
38
21
46
37
0.6
9
–20
9
–20
9
–20
17
–12
25
–4
33
4
41
14
49
30
0.5
5
–30
5
–30
5
–30
13
–22
21
–14
29
–6
37
4
45
20
0.4
–3
–45
–3
–45
–3
–45
6
–37
14
–29
22
–21
30
–11
38
5
Table 63: DDR3L-1866/2133 Derating Values for tIS/tIH – AC125/DC90-Based
ΔtIS, ΔtIH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
CMD/ADDR
4.0 V/ns
Slew Rate
V/ns
ΔtIS ΔtIH
CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate
3.0 V/ns
2.0 V/ns
1.8 V/ns
1.6 V/ns
1.4 V/ns
1.2 V/ns
1.0 V/ns
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
2.0
63
45
63
45
63
45
71
53
79
61
87
69
95
79
103
95
1.5
42
30
42
30
42
30
50
38
58
46
66
54
74
64
82
80
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
103
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Table 63: DDR3L-1866/2133 Derating Values for tIS/tIH – AC125/DC90-Based (Continued)
ΔtIS, ΔtIH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
CMD/ADDR
4.0 V/ns
Slew Rate
V/ns
ΔtIS ΔtIH
CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate
3.0 V/ns
2.0 V/ns
1.8 V/ns
1.6 V/ns
1.4 V/ns
1.2 V/ns
1.0 V/ns
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
ΔtIS
ΔtIH
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
16
16
24
24
32
34
40
50
0.9
3
–3
3
–3
3
–3
11
5
19
13
27
21
35
31
43
47
0.8
6
–8
6
–8
6
–8
14
1
22
9
30
17
38
27
46
43
0.7
10
–13
10
–13
10
–13
18
–5
26
3
34
11
42
21
50
37
0.6
16
–20
16
–20
16
–20
24
–12
32
–4
40
4
48
14
56
30
0.5
15
–30
15
–30
15
–30
23
–22
31
–14
39
–6
47
4
55
20
0.4
13
–45
13
–45
13
–45
21
–37
29
–29
37
–21
45
–11
53
5
Table 64: DDR3L Minimum Required Time tVAC Above VIH(AC) (Below VIL[AC]) for Valid ADD/CMD
Transition
DDR3L-800/1066/1333/1600
Slew Rate (V/ns)
tVAC
at 160mV (ps)
tVAC
DDR3L-1866/2133
at 135mV (ps)
tVAC
at 135mV (ps) tVAC at 125mV (ps)
>2.0
200
213
200
205
2.0
200
213
200
205
1.5
173
190
178
184
1.0
120
145
133
143
0.9
102
130
118
129
0.8
80
111
99
111
0.7
51
87
75
89
0.6
13
55
43
59
0.5
Note 1
10
Note 1
18
<0.5
Note 1
10
Note 1
18
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Rising input signal shall become equal to or greater than VIH(AC) level and Falling input
signal shall become equal to or less than VIL(AC) level.
104
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 34: Nominal Slew Rate and tVAC for tIS (Command and Address – Clock)
tIS
tIH
tIS
tIH
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
VDDQ
tVAC
VIH(AC)min
VREF to AC
region
VIH(DC)min
Nominal
slew rate
VREF(DC)
Nominal
slew rate
VIL(DC)max
VREF to AC
region
VIL(DC)max
tVAC
VSS
ΔTF
Setup slew rate
falling signal =
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
ΔTR
VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max
Setup slew rate
rising signal =
ΔTF
VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC)
ΔTR
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
105
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 35: Nominal Slew Rate for tIH (Command and Address – Clock)
tIS
tIS
tIH
tIH
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
VDDQ
VIH(AC)min
VIH(DC)min
Nominal
slew rate
DC to VREF
region
VREF(DC)
Nominal
slew rate
DC to VREF
region
VIL(DC)max
VIL(AC)max
VSS
ΔTF
ΔTR
VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max
Hold slew rate
rising signal =
ΔTR
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC)
Hold slew rate
falling signal =
ΔTF
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
106
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 36: Tangent Line for tIS (Command and Address – Clock)
tIS
tIS
tIH
tIH
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
VDDQ
Nominal
line
tVAC
VIH(AC)min
VREF to AC
region
VIH(DC)min
Tangent
line
VREF(DC)
Tangent
line
VIL(DC)max
VREF to AC
region
VIL(DC)max
Nominal
line
tVAC
ΔTR
VSS
Tangent line (VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC))
Setup slew rate
rising signal =
ΔTR
ΔTF
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Tangent line (VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max)
Setup slew rate
falling signal =
ΔTF
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
107
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Command and Address Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 37: Tangent Line for tIH (Command and Address – Clock)
tIS
tIH
tIS
tIH
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
VDDQ
VIH(AC)min
Nominal
line
VIH(DC)min
DC to VREF
region
Tangen t
line
VREF(DC)
DC to VREF
region
Tangen t
line
Nominal
line
VIL( DC)max
VIL( AC)max
VSS
ΔTR
ΔTR
Tangent line (VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max)
Hold slew rate
rising signal =
ΔTR
Tangent line (VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC))
Hold slew rate
falling signal =
ΔTF
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
108
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
The total tDS (setup time) and tDH (hold time) required is calculated by adding the data
sheet tDS (base) and tDH (base) values (see Table 65 (page 109); values come from the
Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions table) to the ΔtDS and ΔtDH derating values (see Table 66 (page 110), Table 67 (page 110), or Table 68 (page 111)) respectively. Example: tDS (total setup time) = tDS (base) + ΔtDS. For a valid transition, the
input signal has to remain above/below V IH(AC)/VIL(AC) for some time tVAC (see Table 69
(page 112)).
Although the total setup time for slow slew rates might be negative (for example, a valid
input signal will not have reached V IH(AC)/VIL(AC)) at the time of the rising clock transition), a valid input signal is still required to complete the transition and to reach
VIH/VIL(AC). For slew rates that fall between the values listed in Table 66 (page 110), Table 67 (page 110), or Table 68 (page 111), the derating values may obtained by linear
interpolation.
Setup (tDS) nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the
last crossing of V REF(DC) and the first crossing of V IH(AC)min. Setup (tDS) nominal slew
rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF(DC)
and the first crossing of V IL(AC)max. If the actual signal is always earlier than the nominal
slew rate line between the shaded V REF(DC)-to-AC region, use the nominal slew rate for
derating value (see Figure 38 (page 113)). If the actual signal is later than the nominal
slew rate line anywhere between the shaded V REF(DC)-to-AC region, the slew rate of a
tangent line to the actual signal from the AC level to the DC level is used for derating
value (see Figure 40 (page 115)).
Hold (tDH) nominal slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the
last crossing of V IL(DC)max and the first crossing of V REF(DC). Hold (tDH) nominal slew
rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IH(DC)min
and the first crossing of V REF(DC). If the actual signal is always later than the nominal
slew rate line between the shaded DC-to-VREF(DC) region, use the nominal slew rate for
derating value (see Figure 39 (page 114)). If the actual signal is earlier than the nominal
slew rate line anywhere between the shaded DC-to-VREF(DC) region, the slew rate of a
tangent line to the actual signal from the DC-to-VREF(DC) region is used for derating value (see Figure 41 (page 116)).
Table 65: DDR3L Data Setup and Hold Values at 1 V/ns (DQS, DQS# at 2 V/ns) – AC/DC-Based
Symbol
tDS
tDS
tDS
800
1066
1333
1600
1866
2133
Unit
Reference
(base) AC160
90
40
–
–
–
–
ps
VIH(AC)/VIL(AC)
(base) AC135
140
90
45
25
–
–
ps
(base) AC130
-
-
-
-
70
55
ps
tDH
(base) DC90
160
110
75
55
–
–
ps
tDH
(base) DC90
–
–
–
–
75
60
ps
1
1
1
1
2
2
V/ns
Slew Rate Referenced
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
109
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Table 66: DDR3L Derating Values for tDS/tDH – AC160/DC90-Based
ΔtDS, ΔtDH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate
DQ Slew
Rate V/ns
4.0 V/ns
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
3.0 V/ns
ΔtDS
2.0 V/ns
ΔtDH
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
1.8 V/ns
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
1.6 V/ns
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
1.4 V/ns
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
1.2 V/ns
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
1.0 V/ns
ΔtDS
ΔtDH
2.0
80
45
80
45
80
45
1.5
53
30
53
30
53
30
61
38
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
16
16
–1
–3
–1
–3
7
5
15
13
23
21
–3
–8
5
1
13
9
21
17
29
27
–3
–5
11
3
19
11
27
21
35
37
8
–4
16
4
24
14
32
30
4
6
12
4
20
20
–8
–11
0
5
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
Table 67: DDR3L Derating Values for tDS/tDH – AC135/DC90-Based
ΔtDS, ΔtDH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate
DQ Slew
Rate V/ns
4.0 V/ns
3.0 V/ns
2.0 V/ns
1.8 V/ns
1.6 V/ns
1.4 V/ns
1.2 V/ns
1.0 V/ns
ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH ΔtDS ΔtDH
2.0
68
45
68
45
68
45
1.5
45
30
45
30
45
30
53
38
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
16
16
2
–3
2
–3
10
5
18
13
26
21
3
–8
11
1
19
9
27
17
35
27
14
–5
22
3
30
11
38
21
46
37
25
–4
33
4
41
14
49
30
39
–6
37
4
45
20
30
–11
38
5
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
110
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
28
22
3.5
3.0
111
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
33
4.0
15
19
23
Δ
tDH
Δ
tDS
8.0 V/ns
DQ Slew Rate V/ns
13
22
28
33
tDS
Δ
9
15
19
23
tDH
Δ
7.0 V/ns
0
13
22
28
33
tDS
Δ
0
9
15
19
23
tDH
Δ
6.0 V/ns
–22
0
13
22
28
tDS
Δ
–15
0
9
15
19
tDH
Δ
5.0 V/ns
–65
–22
0
13
22
tDS
Δ
–45
–15
0
9
15
tDH
Δ
4.0 V/ns
–62
–65
–22
0
13
tDS
Δ
–48
–45
–15
0
9
tDH
Δ
3.0 V/ns
–61
–62
–65
–22
0
tDS
Δ
–53
–48
–45
–15
0
tDH
Δ
2.0 V/ns
–49
–53
–54
–57
–14
tDS
Δ
–50
–45
–40
–37
–7
tDH
Δ
1.8 V/ns
DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate
Shaded cells indicate slew rate combinations not supported
ΔtDS, ΔtDH Derating (ps) – AC/DC-Based
Table 68: DDR3L Derating Values for tDS/tDH – AC130/DC90-Based at 2V/ns
–37
–41
–45
–46
–49
tDS
Δ
-49
-42
–37
–32
–29
tDH
Δ
1.6 V/ns
–31
–29
–33
–37
–38
tDS
Δ
–51
–41
–34
–29
–24
tDH
Δ
1.4 V/ns
–28
–23
–21
–25
–29
tDS
Δ
–56
–41
–31
–24
–19
tDH
Δ
1.2 V/ns
–20
–15
–13
–17
tDS
Δ
–40
–25
–15
–8
tDH
Δ
1.0 V/ns
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Table 69: DDR3L Minimum Required Time tVAC Above VIH(AC) (Below VIL(AC)) for Valid DQ Transition
Slew Rate (V/ns)
DDR3L-800/1066 160mV
(ps) min
DDR3L-800/1066/1333
135mV (ps) min
DDR3L-1866/2133
130mV (ps) min
>2.0
165
113
95
2.0
165
113
95
1.5
138
90
73
1.0
85
45
30
0.9
67
30
16
0.8
45
11
Note 1
0.7
16
Note 1
–
0.6
Note 1
Note 1
–
0.5
Note 1
Note 1
–
<0.5
Note 1
Note 1
–
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Rising input signal shall become equal to or greater than VIH(AC) level and Falling input
signal shall become equal to or less than VIL(AC) level.
112
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 38: Nominal Slew Rate and tVAC for tDS (DQ – Strobe)
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
tDS
tDH
tDS
tDH
VDDQ
tVAC
VIH(AC)min
VREF to AC
region
VIH(DC)min
Nominal
slew rate
VREF(DC)
Nominal
slew rate
VIL(DC)max
VREF to AC
region
VIL(AC)max
tVAC
VSS
ΔTF
Setup slew rate
=
falling signal
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
ΔTR
VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC)
Setup slew rate
=
rising signal
ΔTR
VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max
ΔTF
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
113
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 39: Nominal Slew Rate for tDH (DQ – Strobe)
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
tDS
tDH
tDS
tDH
VDDQ
VIH(AC)min
VIH(DC)min
Nominal
slew rate
DC to VREF
region
VREF(DC)
Nominal
slew rate
DC to VREF
region
VIL(DC)max
VIL(AC)max
VSS
ΔTR
VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max
Hold slew rate
rising signal =
ΔTR
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
ΔTF
VIL(DC)min - VREF(DC)
Hold slew rate
falling signal =
ΔTF
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
114
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 40: Tangent Line for tDS (DQ – Strobe)
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
tDS
tDH
tDS
tDH
VDDQ
Nominal
line
tVAC
VIH(AC)min
VREF to AC
region
VIH(DC)min
Tangent
line
VREF(DC)
Tangent
line
VIL(DC)max
VREF to AC
region
VIL(AC)max
Nominal
line
ΔTR
tVAC
VSS
Setup slew rate
Tangent line (VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC))
rising signal =
ΔTR
ΔTF
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Setup slew rate
Tangent line (VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max)
falling signal =
ΔTF
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
115
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Data Setup, Hold, and Derating
Figure 41: Tangent Line for tDH (DQ – Strobe)
CK
CK#
DQS#
DQS
tDS
tDH
tDS
tDH
VDDQ
VIH(AC)min
Nominal
line
VIH(DC)min
DC to VREF
region
Tangent
line
VREF(DC)
DC to VREF
region
Tangent
line
Nominal
line
VIL(DC)max
VIL(AC)max
VSS
ΔTR
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
ΔTF
Hold slew rate
rising signal =
Tangent line (VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max)
Hold slew rate
falling signal =
Tangent line (VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC))
ΔTR
ΔTF
1. The clock and the strobe are drawn on different time scales.
116
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands – Truth Tables
Commands – Truth Tables
Table 70: Truth Table – Command
Notes 1–5 apply to the entire table
CKE
Symbol
Prev.
Cycle
MODE REGISTER SET
MRS
H
H
L
L
L
L
BA
REFRESH
REF
H
H
L
L
L
H
V
V
V
V
V
Self refresh entry
SRE
H
L
L
L
L
H
V
V
V
V
V
6
Self refresh exit
SRX
L
H
H
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
6, 7
L
H
H
H
V
V
L
V
V
H
V
Function
Single-bank PRECHARGE
Next
BA
Cycle CS# RAS# CAS# WE# [2:0]
An
A12
A10
A[11,
9:0] Notes
OP code
PRE
H
H
L
L
H
L
BA
PRECHARGE all banks
PREA
H
H
L
L
H
L
V
Bank ACTIVATE
ACT
H
H
L
L
H
H
BA
WRITE
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
WR
H
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
V
L
CA
8
BC4OTF
WRS4
H
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
L
L
CA
8
BL8OTF
WRS8
H
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
H
L
CA
8
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
WRAP
H
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
V
H
CA
8
BC4OTF
WRAPS4
H
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
L
H
CA
8
BL8OTF
WRAPS8
H
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
H
H
CA
8
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
RD
H
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
V
L
CA
8
BC4OTF
RDS4
H
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
L
L
CA
8
BL8OTF
RDS8
H
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
H
L
CA
8
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
RDAP
H
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
V
H
CA
8
BC4OTF
RDAPS4
H
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
L
H
CA
8
BL8OTF
WRITE
with auto
precharge
READ
READ
with auto
precharge
Row address (RA)
RDAPS8
H
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
H
H
CA
8
NO OPERATION
NOP
H
H
L
H
H
H
V
V
V
V
V
9
Device DESELECTED
DES
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10
Power-down entry
PDE
H
L
L
H
H
H
V
V
V
V
V
6
Power-down exit
PDX
L
H
V
V
V
V
V
6, 11
12
H
V
V
V
L
H
H
H
H
V
V
V
ZQ CALIBRATION LONG
ZQCL
H
H
L
H
H
L
X
X
X
H
X
ZQ CALIBRATION SHORT
ZQCS
H
H
L
H
H
L
X
X
X
L
X
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Commands are defined by the states of CS#, RAS#, CAS#, WE#, and CKE at the rising
edge of the clock. The MSB of BA, RA, and CA are device-, density-, and configurationdependent.
117
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands – Truth Tables
2. RESET# is enabled LOW and used only for asynchronous reset. Thus, RESET# must be
held HIGH during any normal operation.
3. The state of ODT does not affect the states described in this table.
4. Operations apply to the bank defined by the bank address. For MRS, BA selects one of
four mode registers.
5. “V” means “H” or “L” (a defined logic level), and “X” means “Don’t Care.”
6. See Table 71 (page 119) for additional information on CKE transition.
7. Self refresh exit is asynchronous.
8. Burst READs or WRITEs cannot be terminated or interrupted. MRS (fixed) and OTF BL/BC
are defined in MR0.
9. The purpose of the NOP command is to prevent the DRAM from registering any unwanted commands. A NOP will not terminate an operation that is executing.
10. The DES and NOP commands perform similarly.
11. The power-down mode does not perform any REFRESH operations.
12. ZQ CALIBRATION LONG is used for either ZQinit (first ZQCL command during initialization) or ZQoper (ZQCL command after initialization).
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
118
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands – Truth Tables
Table 71: Truth Table – CKE
Notes 1–2 apply to the entire table; see Table 70 (page 117) for additional command details
CKE
Current
State3
Previous Cycle4 Present Cycle4
Command5
(n - 1)
(n)
(RAS#, CAS#, WE#, CS#)
Power-down
Action5
L
L
“Don’t Care”
Maintain power-down
L
H
DES or NOP
Power-down exit
Self refresh
L
L
“Don’t Care”
Maintain self refresh
L
H
DES or NOP
Self refresh exit
Bank(s) active
H
L
DES or NOP
Active power-down entry
Reading
H
L
DES or NOP
Power-down entry
Writing
H
L
DES or NOP
Power-down entry
Precharging
H
L
DES or NOP
Power-down entry
Refreshing
H
L
DES or NOP
Precharge power-down entry
All banks idle
H
L
DES or NOP
Precharge power-down entry
H
L
REFRESH
Self refresh
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Notes
6
1. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved unless explicitly described
elsewhere in this document.
2. tCKE (MIN) means CKE must be registered at multiple consecutive positive clock edges.
CKE must remain at the valid input level the entire time it takes to achieve the required
number of registration clocks. Thus, after any CKE transition, CKE may not transition
from its valid level during the time period of tIS + tCKE (MIN) + tIH.
3. Current state = The state of the DRAM immediately prior to clock edge n.
4. CKE (n) is the logic state of CKE at clock edge n; CKE (n - 1) was the state of CKE at the
previous clock edge.
5. COMMAND is the command registered at the clock edge (must be a legal command as
defined in Table 70 (page 117)). Action is a result of COMMAND. ODT does not affect
the states described in this table and is not listed.
6. Idle state = All banks are closed, no data bursts are in progress, CKE is HIGH, and all timings from previous operations are satisfied. All self refresh exit and power-down exit parameters are also satisfied.
119
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
Commands
DESELECT
The DESELT (DES) command (CS# HIGH) prevents new commands from being executed by the DRAM. Operations already in progress are not affected.
NO OPERATION
The NO OPERATION (NOP) command (CS# LOW) prevents unwanted commands from
being registered during idle or wait states. Operations already in progress are not affected.
ZQ CALIBRATION LONG
The ZQ CALIBRATION LONG (ZQCL) command is used to perform the initial calibration during a power-up initialization and reset sequence (see Figure 50 (page 136)).
This command may be issued at any time by the controller, depending on the system
environment. The ZQCL command triggers the calibration engine inside the DRAM. After calibration is achieved, the calibrated values are transferred from the calibration engine to the DRAM I/O, which are reflected as updated RON and ODT values.
The DRAM is allowed a timing window defined by either tZQinit or tZQoper to perform
a full calibration and transfer of values. When ZQCL is issued during the initialization
sequence, the timing parameter tZQinit must be satisfied. When initialization is complete, subsequent ZQCL commands require the timing parameter tZQoper to be satisfied.
ZQ CALIBRATION SHORT
The ZQ CALIBRATION SHORT (ZQCS) command is used to perform periodic calibrations to account for small voltage and temperature variations. A shorter timing window
is provided to perform the reduced calibration and transfer of values as defined by timing parameter tZQCS. A ZQCS command can effectively correct a minimum of 0.5% RON
and RTT impedance error within 64 clock cycles, assuming the maximum sensitivities
specified in DDR3L 34 Ohm Output Driver Sensitivity (page 68).
ACTIVATE
The ACTIVATE command is used to open (or activate) a row in a particular bank for a
subsequent access. The value on the BA[2:0] inputs selects the bank, and the address
provided on inputs A[n:0] selects the row. This row remains open (or active) for accesses
until a PRECHARGE command is issued to that bank.
A PRECHARGE command must be issued before opening a different row in the same
bank.
READ
The READ command is used to initiate a burst read access to an active row. The address
provided on inputs A[2:0] selects the starting column address, depending on the burst
length and burst type selected (see Burst Order table for additional information). The
value on input A10 determines whether auto precharge is used. If auto precharge is selected, the row being accessed will be precharged at the end of the READ burst. If auto
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
120
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
precharge is not selected, the row will remain open for subsequent accesses. The value
on input A12 (if enabled in the mode register) when the READ command is issued determines whether BC4 (chop) or BL8 is used. After a READ command is issued, the
READ burst may not be interrupted.
Table 72: READ Command Summary
CKE
Function
READ
READ with
auto
precharge
Symbol
Prev.
Cycle
Next
BA
Cycle CS# RAS# CAS# WE# [2:0]
An
A12
A10
A[11,
9:0]
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
RD
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
V
L
CA
BC4OTF
RDS4
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
L
L
CA
BL8OTF
RDS8
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
H
L
CA
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
RDAP
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
V
H
CA
BC4OTF
RDAPS4
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
L
H
CA
BL8OTF
RDAPS8
H
L
H
L
H
BA
RFU
H
H
CA
WRITE
The WRITE command is used to initiate a burst write access to an active row. The value
on the BA[2:0] inputs selects the bank. The value on input A10 determines whether auto
precharge is used. The value on input A12 (if enabled in the MR) when the WRITE command is issued determines whether BC4 (chop) or BL8 is used.
Input data appearing on the DQ is written to the memory array subject to the DM input
logic level appearing coincident with the data. If a given DM signal is registered LOW,
the corresponding data will be written to memory. If the DM signal is registered HIGH,
the corresponding data inputs will be ignored and a WRITE will not be executed to that
byte/column location.
Table 73: WRITE Command Summary
CKE
Function
WRITE
WRITE with
auto
precharge
Symbol
Prev.
Cycle
Next
BA
Cycle CS# RAS# CAS# WE# [2:0]
An
A12
A10
A[11,
9:0]
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
WR
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
V
L
CA
BC4OTF
WRS4
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
L
L
CA
BL8OTF
WRS8
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
H
L
CA
BL8MRS,
BC4MRS
WRAP
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
V
H
CA
BC4OTF
WRAPS4
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
L
H
CA
BL8OTF
WRAPS8
H
L
H
L
L
BA
RFU
H
H
CA
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
121
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
PRECHARGE
The PRECHARGE command is used to de-activate the open row in a particular bank or
in all banks. The bank(s) are available for a subsequent row access a specified time ( tRP)
after the PRECHARGE command is issued, except in the case of concurrent auto precharge. A READ or WRITE command to a different bank is allowed during a concurrent
auto precharge as long as it does not interrupt the data transfer in the current bank and
does not violate any other timing parameters. Input A10 determines whether one or all
banks are precharged. In the case where only one bank is precharged, inputs BA[2:0] select the bank; otherwise, BA[2:0] are treated as “Don’t Care.”
After a bank is precharged, it is in the idle state and must be activated prior to any READ
or WRITE commands being issued to that bank. A PRECHARGE command is treated as
a NOP if there is no open row in that bank (idle state) or if the previously open row is
already in the process of precharging. However, the precharge period is determined by
the last PRECHARGE command issued to the bank.
REFRESH
The REFRESH command is used during normal operation of the DRAM and is analogous to CAS#-before-RAS# (CBR) refresh or auto refresh. This command is nonpersistent, so it must be issued each time a refresh is required. The addressing is generated by
the internal refresh controller. This makes the address bits a “Don’t Care” during a REFRESH command. The DRAM requires REFRESH cycles at an average interval of 7.8μs
(maximum when T C ≤ 85°C or 3.9μs maximum when T C ≤ 95°C). The REFRESH period
begins when the REFRESH command is registered and ends tRFC (MIN) later.
To allow for improved efficiency in scheduling and switching between tasks, some flexibility in the absolute refresh interval is provided. A maximum of eight REFRESH commands can be posted to any given DRAM, meaning that the maximum absolute interval
between any REFRESH command and the next REFRESH command is nine times the
maximum average interval refresh rate. Self refresh may be entered with up to eight REFRESH commands being posted. After exiting self refresh (when entered with posted
REFRESH commands), additional posting of REFRESH commands is allowed to the extent that the maximum number of cumulative posted REFRESH commands (both preand post-self refresh) does not exceed eight REFRESH commands.
At any given time, a maximum of 16 REFRESH commands can be issued within
2 x tREFI.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
122
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
Figure 42: Refresh Mode
T0
T2
T1
CK#
CK
tCK
T3
tCH
T4
Ta1
Valid 5
NOP1
PRE
Tb0
Tb1
Valid 5
Valid 5
NOP5
NOP5
Tb2
tCL
CKE
Command
Ta0
NOP1
NOP1
REF
NOP5
REF2
Address
ACT
RA
All banks
A10
RA
One bank
BA[2:0]
Bank(s)3
BA
DQS, DQS#4
DQ4
DM4
tRP
tRFC
(MIN)
tRFC2
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Don’t Care
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other valid commands may be possible at these times. CKE must be active during the PRECHARGE, ACTIVATE, and REFRESH
commands, but may be inactive at other times (see Power-Down Mode (page 187)).
2. The second REFRESH is not required, but two back-to-back REFRESH commands are
shown.
3. “Don’t Care” if A10 is HIGH at this point; however, A10 must be HIGH if more than one
bank is active (must precharge all active banks).
4. For operations shown, DM, DQ, and DQS signals are all “Don’t Care”/High-Z.
5. Only NOP and DES commands are allowed after a REFRESH command and until tRFC
(MIN) is satisfied.
SELF REFRESH
The SELF REFRESH command is used to retain data in the DRAM, even if the rest of the
system is powered down. When in self refresh mode, the DRAM retains data without external clocking. Self refresh mode is also a convenient method used to enable/disable
the DLL as well as to change the clock frequency within the allowed synchronous operating range (see Input Clock Frequency Change (page 128)). All power supply inputs
(including V REFCA and V REFDQ) must be maintained at valid levels upon entry/exit and
during self refresh mode operation. V REFDQ may float or not drive V DDQ/2 while in self
refresh mode under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
VSS < V REFDQ < V DD is maintained
VREFDQ is valid and stable prior to CKE going back HIGH
The first WRITE operation may not occur earlier than 512 clocks after V REFDQ is valid
All other self refresh mode exit timing requirements are met
123
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
DLL Disable Mode
If the DLL is disabled by the mode register (MR1[0] can be switched during initialization
or later), the DRAM is targeted, but not guaranteed, to operate similarly to the normal
mode, with a few notable exceptions:
• The DRAM supports only one value of CAS latency (CL = 6) and one value of CAS
WRITE latency (CWL = 6).
• DLL disable mode affects the read data clock-to-data strobe relationship (tDQSCK),
but not the read data-to-data strobe relationship (tDQSQ, tQH). Special attention is
required to line up the read data with the controller time domain when the DLL is disabled.
• In normal operation (DLL on), tDQSCK starts from the rising clock edge AL + CL
cycles after the READ command. In DLL disable mode, tDQSCK starts AL + CL - 1 cycles after the READ command. Additionally, with the DLL disabled, the value of
tDQSCK could be larger than tCK.
The ODT feature (including dynamic ODT) is not supported during DLL disable mode.
The ODT resistors must be disabled by continuously registering the ODT ball LOW by
programming RTT,nom MR1[9, 6, 2] and RTT(WR) MR2[10, 9] to 0 while in the DLL disable
mode.
Specific steps must be followed to switch between the DLL enable and DLL disable
modes due to a gap in the allowed clock rates between the two modes (tCK [AVG] MAX
and tCK [DLL_DIS] MIN, respectively). The only time the clock is allowed to cross this
clock rate gap is during self refresh mode. Thus, the required procedure for switching
from the DLL enable mode to the DLL disable mode is to change frequency during self
refresh:
1. Starting from the idle state (all banks are precharged, all timings are fulfilled, ODT
is turned off, and RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are High-Z), set MR1[0] to 1 to disable the
DLL.
2. Enter self refresh mode after tMOD has been satisfied.
3. After tCKSRE is satisfied, change the frequency to the desired clock rate.
4. Self refresh may be exited when the clock is stable with the new frequency for
tCKSRX. After tXS is satisfied, update the mode registers with appropriate values.
5. The DRAM will be ready for its next command in the DLL disable mode after the
greater of tMRD or tMOD has been satisfied. A ZQCL command should be issued
with appropriate timings met.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
124
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
Figure 43: DLL Enable Mode to DLL Disable Mode
T0
T1
Ta0
Ta1
Tb0
Tc0
Td0
Td1
Te0
Te1
Tf0
CK#
CK
Valid1
CKE
MRS2
Command
6
SRE3
NOP
SRX4
NOP
7
tCKSRE
tMOD
tCKSRX8
NOP
tXS
MRS5
NOP
Valid1
tMOD
tCKESR
ODT9
Valid1
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Don’t Care
Any valid command.
Disable DLL by setting MR1[0] to 1.
Enter SELF REFRESH.
Exit SELF REFRESH.
Update the mode registers with the DLL disable parameters setting.
Starting with the idle state, RTT is in the High-Z state.
Change frequency.
Clock must be stable tCKSRX.
Static LOW in the case that RTT,nom or RTT(WR) is enabled; otherwise, static LOW or HIGH.
A similar procedure is required for switching from the DLL disable mode back to the
DLL enable mode. This also requires changing the frequency during self refresh mode
(see Figure 44 (page 126)).
1. Starting from the idle state (all banks are precharged, all timings are fulfilled, ODT
is turned off, and RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are High-Z), enter self refresh mode.
2. After tCKSRE is satisfied, change the frequency to the new clock rate.
3. Self refresh may be exited when the clock is stable with the new frequency for
tCKSRX. After tXS is satisfied, update the mode registers with the appropriate values. At a minimum, set MR1[0] to 0 to enable the DLL. Wait tMRD, then set MR0[8]
to 1 to enable DLL RESET.
4. After another tMRD delay is satisfied, update the remaining mode registers with
the appropriate values.
5. The DRAM will be ready for its next command in the DLL enable mode after the
greater of tMRD or tMOD has been satisfied. However, before applying any command or function requiring a locked DLL, a delay of tDLLK after DLL RESET must
be satisfied. A ZQCL command should be issued with the appropriate timings
met.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
125
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
Figure 44: DLL Disable Mode to DLL Enable Mode
T0
Ta0
Ta1
Tb0
Tc0
Tc1
Td0
Te0
Tf0
Tg0
Th0
CK#
CK
CKE
Valid
tDLLK
Command
SRE1
NOP
SRX2
NOP
tCKSRE
7
8
tCKSRX9
MRS3
tXS
MRS4
tMRD
MRS5
Valid 6
tMRD
ODTLoff + 1 × tCK
tCKESR
ODT10
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Don’t Care
Enter SELF REFRESH.
Exit SELF REFRESH.
Wait tXS, then set MR1[0] to 0 to enable DLL.
Wait tMRD, then set MR0[8] to 1 to begin DLL RESET.
Wait tMRD, update registers (CL, CWL, and write recovery may be necessary).
Wait tMOD, any valid command.
Starting with the idle state.
Change frequency.
Clock must be stable at least tCKSRX.
Static LOW in the case that RTT,nom or RTT(WR) is enabled; otherwise, static LOW or HIGH.
The clock frequency range for the DLL disable mode is specified by the parameter tCK
(DLL_DIS). Due to latency counter and timing restrictions, only CL = 6 and CWL = 6 are
supported.
DLL disable mode will affect the read data clock to data strobe relationship (tDQSCK)
but not the data strobe to data relationship (tDQSQ, tQH). Special attention is needed to
line up read data to the controller time domain.
Compared to the DLL on mode where tDQSCK starts from the rising clock edge AL + CL
cycles after the READ command, the DLL disable mode tDQSCK starts AL + CL - 1 cycles
after the READ command.
WRITE operations function similarly between the DLL enable and DLL disable modes;
however, ODT functionality is not allowed with DLL disable mode.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
126
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Commands
Figure 45: DLL Disable tDQSCK
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
Command
READ
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Address
Valid
CK#
CK
RL = AL + CL = 6 (CL = 6, AL = 0)
CL = 6
DQS, DQS# DLL on
DI
b
DQ BL8 DLL on
RL (DLL_DIS) = AL + (CL - 1) = 5
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
DI
b+3
DI
b+4
DI
b+5
DI
b+6
DI
b+7
tDQSCK (DLL_DIS) MIN
DQS, DQS# DLL off
DI
b
DQ BL8 DLL disable
DI
b+1
tDQSCK
DI
b+2
DI
b+3
DI
b+4
DI
b+5
DI
b+6
DI
b+7
DI
b+3
DI
b+4
DI
b+5
DI
b+6
(DLL_DIS) MAX
DQS, DQS# DLL off
DI
b
DQ BL8 DLL disable
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
DI
b+7
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
Table 74: READ Electrical Characteristics, DLL Disable Mode
Parameter
Access window of DQS from CK, CK#
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Symbol
tDQSCK
127
(DLL_DIS)
Min
Max
Unit
1
10
ns
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Input Clock Frequency Change
Input Clock Frequency Change
When the DDR3 SDRAM is initialized, the clock must be stable during most normal
states of operation. This means that after the clock frequency has been set to the stable
state, the clock period is not allowed to deviate, except for what is allowed by the clock
jitter and spread spectrum clocking (SSC) specifications.
The input clock frequency can be changed from one stable clock rate to another under
two conditions: self refresh mode and precharge power-down mode. It is illegal to
change the clock frequency outside of those two modes. For the self refresh mode condition, when the DDR3 SDRAM has been successfully placed into self refresh mode and
tCKSRE has been satisfied, the state of the clock becomes a “Don’t Care.” When the
clock becomes a “Don’t Care,” changing the clock frequency is permissible if the new
clock frequency is stable prior to tCKSRX. When entering and exiting self refresh mode
for the sole purpose of changing the clock frequency, the self refresh entry and exit
specifications must still be met.
The precharge power-down mode condition is when the DDR3 SDRAM is in precharge
power-down mode (either fast exit mode or slow exit mode). Either ODT must be at a
logic LOW or RTT,nom and RTT(WR) must be disabled via MR1 and MR2. This ensures
RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are in an off state prior to entering precharge power-down mode,
and CKE must be at a logic LOW. A minimum of tCKSRE must occur after CKE goes LOW
before the clock frequency can change. The DDR3 SDRAM input clock frequency is allowed to change only within the minimum and maximum operating frequency specified for the particular speed grade (tCK [AVG] MIN to tCK [AVG] MAX). During the input
clock frequency change, CKE must be held at a stable LOW level. When the input clock
frequency is changed, a stable clock must be provided to the DRAM tCKSRX before precharge power-down may be exited. After precharge power-down is exited and tXP has
been satisfied, the DLL must be reset via the MRS. Depending on the new clock frequency, additional MRS commands may need to be issued. During the DLL lock time,
RTT,nom and RTT(WR) must remain in an off state. After the DLL lock time, the DRAM is
ready to operate with a new clock frequency.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
128
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Input Clock Frequency Change
Figure 46: Change Frequency During Precharge Power-Down
Previous clock frequency
T0
T1
T2
New clock frequency
Ta0
Tb0
Tc1
Tc0
Td0
Td1
Te0
Te1
CK#
CK
tCH
tCH
b
tCL
tCKSRE
tIS
tCL
b
tCH
b
tCK
b
tCL
b
tCK
b
tCKSRX
tCKE
tIH
CKE
tIS
tCPDED
Command
tCH
b
tCK
b
tCK
tIH
tCL
b
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Address
MRS
NOP
Valid
DLL RESET
tAOFPD/tAOF
tXP
Valid
tIH
tIS
ODT
DQS, DQS#
High-Z
DQ
High-Z
DM
tDLLK
Enter precharge
power-down mode
Frequency
change
Exit precharge
power-down mode
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. Applicable for both SLOW-EXIT and FAST-EXIT precharge power-down modes.
2. tAOFPD and tAOF must be satisfied and outputs High-Z prior to T1 (see On-Die Termination (ODT) for exact requirements).
3. If the RTT,nom feature was enabled in the mode register prior to entering precharge
power-down mode, the ODT signal must be continuously registered LOW, ensuring RTT
is in an off state. If the RTT,nom feature was disabled in the mode register prior to entering precharge power-down mode, RTT will remain in the off state. The ODT signal can
be registered LOW or HIGH in this case.
129
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Write Leveling
Write Leveling
For better signal integrity, DDR3 SDRAM memory modules have adopted fly-by topology for the commands, addresses, control signals, and clocks. Write leveling is a scheme
for the memory controller to adjust or de-skew the DQS strobe (DQS, DQS#) to CK relationship at the DRAM with a simple feedback feature provided by the DRAM. Write leveling is generally used as part of the initialization process, if required. For normal
DRAM operation, this feature must be disabled. This is the only DRAM operation where
the DQS functions as an input (to capture the incoming clock) and the DQ function as
outputs (to report the state of the clock). Note that nonstandard ODT schemes are required.
The memory controller using the write leveling procedure must have adjustable delay
settings on its DQS strobe to align the rising edge of DQS to the clock at the DRAM pins.
This is accomplished when the DRAM asynchronously feeds back the CK status via the
DQ bus and samples with the rising edge of DQS. The controller repeatedly delays the
DQS strobe until a CK transition from 0 to 1 is detected. The DQS delay established by
this procedure helps ensure tDQSS, tDSS, and tDSH specifications in systems that use
fly-by topology by de-skewing the trace length mismatch. A conceptual timing of this
procedure is shown in Figure 47.
Figure 47: Write Leveling Concept
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
CK#
CK
Source
Differential DQS
Tn
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T4
T5
T6
CK#
CK
Destination
Differential DQS
0
DQ
Destination
Tn
T0
T1
0
T2
T3
CK#
CK
Push DQS to capture
0–1 transition
Differential DQS
DQ
1
1
Don’t Care
When write leveling is enabled, the rising edge of DQS samples CK, and the prime DQ
outputs the sampled CK’s status. The prime DQ for a x4 or x8 configuration is DQ0 with
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
130
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Write Leveling
all other DQ (DQ[7:1]) driving LOW. The prime DQ for a x16 configuration is DQ0 for the
lower byte and DQ8 for the upper byte. It outputs the status of CK sampled by LDQS
and UDQS. All other DQ (DQ[7:1], DQ[15:9]) continue to drive LOW. Two prime DQ on a
x16 enable each byte lane to be leveled independently.
The write leveling mode register interacts with other mode registers to correctly configure the write leveling functionality. Besides using MR1[7] to disable/enable write leveling, MR1[12] must be used to enable/disable the output buffers. The ODT value, burst
length, and so forth need to be selected as well. This interaction is shown in Table 75. It
should also be noted that when the outputs are enabled during write leveling mode, the
DQS buffers are set as inputs, and the DQ are set as outputs. Additionally, during write
leveling mode, only the DQS strobe terminations are activated and deactivated via the
ODT ball. The DQ remain disabled and are not affected by the ODT ball.
Table 75: Write Leveling Matrix
Note 1 applies to the entire table
MR1[7]
MR1[12]
MR1[2, 6, 9]
Write
Leveling
Output
Buffers
RTT,nom
Value
Disabled
Enabled
(1)
DRAM
RTT,nom
DRAM
ODT Ball DQS
DQ
See normal operations
Disabled
(1)
Write leveling not enabled
0
DQS not receiving: not terminated
Prime DQ High-Z: not terminated
Other DQ High-Z: not terminated
1
Low
Off
ΩΩ
ΩΩ, or
120Ω
High
On
DQS not receiving: terminated by RTT
Prime DQ High-Z: not terminated
Other DQ High-Z: not terminated
2
n/a
Low
Off
DQS receiving: not terminated
Prime DQ driving CK state: not terminated
Other DQ driving LOW: not terminated
3
ΩΩ, or
120Ω
High
On
DQS receiving: terminated by RTT
Prime DQ driving CK state: not terminated
Other DQ driving LOW: not terminated
4
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Case Notes
n/a
Enabled
(0)
Off
DRAM State
2
3
1. Expected usage if used during write leveling: Case 1 may be used when DRAM are on a
dual-rank module and on the rank not being leveled or on any rank of a module not
being leveled on a multislot system. Case 2 may be used when DRAM are on any rank of
a module not being leveled on a multislot system. Case 3 is generally not used. Case 4 is
generally used when DRAM are on the rank that is being leveled.
2. Since the DRAM DQS is not being driven (MR1[12] = 1), DQS ignores the input strobe,
and all RTT,nom values are allowed. This simulates a normal standby state to DQS.
3. Since the DRAM DQS is being driven (MR1[12] = 0), DQS captures the input strobe, and
only some RTT,nom values are allowed. This simulates a normal write state to DQS.
131
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Write Leveling
Write Leveling Procedure
A memory controller initiates the DRAM write leveling mode by setting MR1[7] to 1, assuming the other programable features (MR0, MR1, MR2, and MR3) are first set and the
DLL is fully reset and locked. The DQ balls enter the write leveling mode going from a
High-Z state to an undefined driving state, so the DQ bus should not be driven. During
write leveling mode, only the NOP or DES commands are allowed. The memory controller should attempt to level only one rank at a time; thus, the outputs of other ranks
should be disabled by setting MR1[12] to 1 in the other ranks. The memory controller
may assert ODT after a tMOD delay, as the DRAM will be ready to process the ODT transition. ODT should be turned on prior to DQS being driven LOW by at least ODTLon
delay (WL - 2 tCK), provided it does not violate the aforementioned tMOD delay requirement.
The memory controller may drive DQS LOW and DQS# HIGH after tWLDQSEN has
been satisfied. The controller may begin to toggle DQS after tWLMRD (one DQS toggle
is DQS transitioning from a LOW state to a HIGH state with DQS# transitioning from a
HIGH state to a LOW state, then both transition back to their original states). At a minimum, ODTLon and tAON must be satisfied at least one clock prior to DQS toggling.
After tWLMRD and a DQS LOW preamble (tWPRE) have been satisfied, the memory
controller may provide either a single DQS toggle or multiple DQS toggles to sample CK
for a given DQS-to-CK skew. Each DQS toggle must not violate tDQSL (MIN) and tDQSH
(MIN) specifications. tDQSL (MAX) and tDQSH (MAX) specifications are not applicable
during write leveling mode. The DQS must be able to distinguish the CK’s rising edge
within tWLS and tWLH. The prime DQ will output the CK’s status asynchronously from
the associated DQS rising edge CK capture within tWLO. The remaining DQ that always
drive LOW when DQS is toggling must be LOW within tWLOE after the first tWLO is satisfied (the prime DQ going LOW). As previously noted, DQS is an input and not an output during this process. Figure 48 (page 133) depicts the basic timing parameters for
the overall write leveling procedure.
The memory controller will most likely sample each applicable prime DQ state and determine whether to increment or decrement its DQS delay setting. After the memory
controller performs enough DQS toggles to detect the CK’s 0-to-1 transition, the memory controller should lock the DQS delay setting for that DRAM. After locking the DQS
setting is locked, leveling for the rank will have been achieved, and the write leveling
mode for the rank should be disabled or reprogrammed (if write leveling of another
rank follows).
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
132
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Write Leveling
Figure 48: Write Leveling Sequence
T1
T2
tWLS
tWLH
CK#
CK
Command
MRS1
NOP2
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
tMOD
ODT
tWLDQSEN
tDQSL3
tDQSH3
tDQSL3
tDQSH3
Differential DQS4
tWLMRD
tWLO
tWLO
Prime DQ5
tWLO
tWLOE
Early remaining DQ
tWLO
Late remaining DQ
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Undefined Driving Mode
Don’t Care
1. MRS: Load MR1 to enter write leveling mode.
2. NOP: NOP or DES.
3. DQS, DQS# needs to fulfill minimum pulse width requirements tDQSH (MIN) and tDQSL
(MIN) as defined for regular writes. The maximum pulse width is system-dependent.
4. Differential DQS is the differential data strobe (DQS, DQS#). Timing reference points are
the zero crossings. The solid line represents DQS; the dotted line represents DQS#.
5. DRAM drives leveling feedback on a prime DQ (DQ0 for x4 and x8). The remaining DQ
are driven LOW and remain in this state throughout the leveling procedure.
133
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Write Leveling
Write Leveling Mode Exit Procedure
After the DRAM are leveled, they must exit from write leveling mode before the normal
mode can be used. Figure 49 depicts a general procedure for exiting write leveling
mode. After the last rising DQS (capturing a 1 at T0), the memory controller should stop
driving the DQS signals after tWLO (MAX) delay plus enough delay to enable the memory controller to capture the applicable prime DQ state (at ~Tb0). The DQ balls become
undefined when DQS no longer remains LOW, and they remain undefined until tMOD
after the MRS command (at Te1).
The ODT input should be de-asserted LOW such that ODTLoff (MIN) expires after the
DQS is no longer driving LOW. When ODT LOW satisfies tIS, ODT must be kept LOW (at
~Tb0) until the DRAM is ready for either another rank to be leveled or until the normal
mode can be used. After DQS termination is switched off, write level mode should be
disabled via the MRS command (at Tc2). After tMOD is satisfied (at Te1), any valid command may be registered by the DRAM. Some MRS commands may be issued after tMRD
(at Td1).
Figure 49: Write Leveling Exit Procedure
T0
T1
T2
Ta0
Tb0
Tc0
Tc1
Tc2
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
MRS
Td0
Td1
Te0
Te1
NOP
Valid
NOP
Valid
CK#
CK
Command
tMRD
Address
MR1
tIS
Valid
Valid
tMOD
ODT
t
ODTLoff AOF (MIN)
RTT,nom
RTT DQS, RTT DQS#
t
AOF (MAX)
DQS, DQS#
RTT(DQ)
tWLO
DQ
+ tWLOE
CK = 1
Indicates break
in time scale
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Undefined Driving Mode
Transitioning
Don’t Care
1. The DQ result, = 1, between Ta0 and Tc0, is a result of the DQS, DQS# signals capturing
CK HIGH just after the T0 state.
134
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Initialization
Initialization
The following sequence is required for power-up and initialization, as shown in Figure
50 (page 136):
1. Apply power. RESET# is recommended to be below 0.2 × V DDQ during power ramp
to ensure the outputs remain disabled (High-Z) and ODT off (RTT is also High-Z).
All other inputs, including ODT, may be undefined.
During power-up, either of the following conditions may exist and must be met:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
• Condition A:
– VDD and V DDQ are driven from a single-power converter output and are
ramped with a maximum delta voltage between them of ΔV ≤ 300mV. Slope reversal of any power supply signal is allowed. The voltage levels on all balls other than V DD, V DDQ, V SS, V SSQ must be less than or equal to V DDQ and V DD on
one side, and must be greater than or equal to V SSQ and V SS on the other side.
– Both V DD and V DDQ power supplies ramp to V DD,min and V DDQ,min within
tV
DDPR = 200ms.
– VREFDQ tracks V DD × 0.5, V REFCA tracks V DD × 0.5.
– VTT is limited to 0.95V when the power ramp is complete and is not applied
directly to the device; however, tVTD should be greater than or equal to 0 to
avoid device latchup.
• Condition B:
– VDD may be applied before or at the same time as V DDQ.
– VDDQ may be applied before or at the same time as V TT, V REFDQ, and V REFCA.
– No slope reversals are allowed in the power supply ramp for this condition.
Until stable power, maintain RESET# LOW to ensure the outputs remain disabled
(High-Z). After the power is stable, RESET# must be LOW for at least 200μs to begin the initialization process. ODT will remain in the High-Z state while RESET# is
LOW and until CKE is registered HIGH.
CKE must be LOW 10ns prior to RESET# transitioning HIGH.
After RESET# transitions HIGH, wait 500μs (minus one clock) with CKE LOW.
After the CKE LOW time, CKE may be brought HIGH (synchronously) and only
NOP or DES commands may be issued. The clock must be present and valid for at
least 10ns (and a minimum of five clocks) and ODT must be driven LOW at least
tIS prior to CKE being registered HIGH. When CKE is registered HIGH, it must be
continuously registered HIGH until the full initialization process is complete.
After CKE is registered HIGH and after tXPR has been satisfied, MRS commands
may be issued. Issue an MRS (LOAD MODE) command to MR2 with the applicable settings (provide LOW to BA2 and BA0 and HIGH to BA1).
Issue an MRS command to MR3 with the applicable settings.
Issue an MRS command to MR1 with the applicable settings, including enabling
the DLL and configuring ODT.
Issue an MRS command to MR0 with the applicable settings, including a DLL RESET command. tDLLK (512) cycles of clock input are required to lock the DLL.
Issue a ZQCL command to calibrate RTT and RON values for the process voltage
temperature (PVT). Prior to normal operation, tZQinit must be satisfied.
When tDLLK and tZQinit have been satisfied, the DDR3 SDRAM will be ready for
normal operation.
135
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Initialization
Figure 50: Initialization Sequence
T (MAX) = 200ms
VDD
VDDQ
VTT
See power-up
conditions
in the
initialization
sequence text,
set up 1
VREF
Power-up
ramp
tVTD
Stable and
valid clock
T0
T1
tCK
Tc0
Tb0
Ta0
Td0
CK#
CK
tCKSRX
tIOZ
tCL
tCL
= 20ns
RESET#
tIS
T (MIN) = 10ns
Valid
CKE
Valid
ODT
tIS
Command
NOP
MRS
MRS
MRS
MRS
Address
Code
Code
Code
Code
A10
Code
Code
Code
Code
BA0 = L
BA1 = H
BA2 = L
BA0 = H
BA1 = H
BA2 = L
BA0 = H
BA1 = L
BA2 = L
BA0 = L
BA1 = L
BA2 = L
ZQCL
Valid
DM
BA[2:0]
Valid
Valid
A10 = H
Valid
DQS
DQ
RTT
T = 200μs (MIN)
T = 500μs (MIN)
tXPR
MR2
All voltage
supplies valid
and stable
tMRD
tMRD
MR3
tMRD
MR1 with
DLL enable
tMOD
MR0 with
DLL reset
tZQinit
ZQ calibration
tDLLK
DRAM ready for
external commands
Normal
operation
Indicates break
in time scale
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
136
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Voltage Initialization / Change
Voltage Initialization / Change
If the SDRAM is powered up and initialized for the 1.35V operating voltage range, voltage can be increased to the 1.5V operating range provided the following conditions are
met (See Figure 51 (page 138)):
• Just prior to increasing the 1.35V operating voltages, no further commands are issued,
other than NOPs or COMMAND INHIBITs, and all banks are in the precharge state.
• The 1.5V operating voltages are stable prior to issuing new commands, other than
NOPs or COMMAND INHIBITs.
• The DLL is reset and relocked after the 1.5V operating voltages are stable and prior to
any READ command.
• The ZQ calibration is performed. tZQinit must be satisfied after the 1.5V operating
voltages are stable and prior to any READ command.
If the SDRAM is powered up and initialized for the 1.5V operating voltage range, voltage
can be reduced to the 1.35V operation range provided the following conditions are met
(See Figure 51 (page 138)) :
• Just prior to reducing the 1.5V operating voltages, no further commands are issued,
other than NOPs or COMMAND INHIBITs, and all banks are in the precharge state.
• The 1.35V operating voltages are stable prior to issuing new commands, other than
NOPs or COMMAND INHIBITs.
• The DLL is reset and relocked after the 1.35V operating voltages are stable and prior to
any READ command.
• The ZQ calibration is performed. tZQinit must be satisfied after the 1.35V operating
voltages are stable and prior to any READ command.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
137
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Voltage Initialization / Change
VDD Voltage Switching
After the DDR3L DRAM is powered up and initialized, the power supply can be altered
between the DDR3L and DDR3 levels, provided the sequence in Figure 51 is maintained.
Figure 51: VDD Voltage Switching
Tb
Ta
CK, CK#
Tc
Te
Td
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
Tf
Ti
Th
Tg
Tj
Tk
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
Valid
tXPR
tMRD
tMRD
((
))
((
))
Valid
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
Valid
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
tCKSRX
TMIN = 10ns
VDD, VDDQ (DDR3)
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
VDD, VDDQ (DDR3L)
TMIN = 10ns
TMIN = 200μs
T = 500μs
RESET#
((
))
((
))
tIS
CKE
((
))
((
))
TMIN = 10ns
((
))
tDLLK
tIS
((
))
((
))
MRS
((
))
((
))
MRS
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
MR2
((
))
((
))
MR3
((
))
((
))
Command
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
BA
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
ODT
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
RTT
((
))
((
))
((
))
Note 1
tMRD
MRS
MR1
tMOD
((
))
((
))
MRS
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
MR0
((
))
((
))
tZQinit
ZQCL
((
))
((
))
Note 1
tIS
tIS
((
((
((
((
))
))
))
))
Static LOW in case RTT,nom is enabled at time Tg, otherwise static HIGH or LOW
((
((
((
((
))
))
))
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
((
))
Time break
((
))
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Valid
Don’t Care
1. From time point Td until Tk, NOP or DES commands must be applied between MRS and
ZQCL commands.
138
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Registers
Mode Registers
Mode registers (MR0–MR3) are used to define various modes of programmable operations of the DDR3 SDRAM. A mode register is programmed via the mode register set
(MRS) command during initialization, and it retains the stored information (except for
MR0[8], which is self-clearing) until it is reprogrammed, RESET# goes LOW, the device
loses power.
Contents of a mode register can be altered by re-executing the MRS command. Even if
the user wants to modify only a subset of the mode register’s variables, all variables
must be programmed when the MRS command is issued. Reprogramming the mode
register will not alter the contents of the memory array, provided it is performed correctly.
The MRS command can only be issued (or re-issued) when all banks are idle and in the
precharged state (tRP is satisfied and no data bursts are in progress). After an MRS command has been issued, two parameters must be satisfied: tMRD and tMOD. The controller must wait tMRD before initiating any subsequent MRS commands.
Figure 52: MRS to MRS Command Timing (tMRD)
T0
T1
T2
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
MRS1
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
MRS2
CK#
CK
Command
tMRD
Address
Valid
Valid
CKE3
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Don’t Care
1. Prior to issuing the MRS command, all banks must be idle and precharged, tRP (MIN)
must be satisfied, and no data bursts can be in progress.
2. tMRD specifies the MRS to MRS command minimum cycle time.
3. CKE must be registered HIGH from the MRS command until tMRSPDEN (MIN) (see Power-Down Mode (page 187)).
4. For a CAS latency change, tXPDLL timing must be met before any non-MRS command.
The controller must also wait tMOD before initiating any non-MRS commands (excluding NOP and DES). The DRAM requires tMOD in order to update the requested features,
with the exception of DLL RESET, which requires additional time. Until tMOD has been
satisfied, the updated features are to be assumed unavailable.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
139
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 0 (MR0)
Figure 53: MRS to nonMRS Command Timing (tMOD)
T0
T1
T2
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
MRS
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
non
MRS
CK#
CK
Command
tMOD
Address
Valid
Valid
Valid
CKE
Old
setting
New
setting
Updating setting
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Don’t Care
1. Prior to issuing the MRS command, all banks must be idle (they must be precharged, tRP
must be satisfied, and no data bursts can be in progress).
2. Prior to Ta2 when tMOD (MIN) is being satisfied, no commands (except NOP/DES) may be
issued.
3. If RTT was previously enabled, ODT must be registered LOW at T0 so that ODTL is satisfied prior to Ta1. ODT must also be registered LOW at each rising CK edge from T0 until
tMODmin is satisfied at Ta2.
4. CKE must be registered HIGH from the MRS command until tMRSPDEN (MIN), at which
time power-down may occur (see Power-Down Mode (page 187)).
Mode Register 0 (MR0)
The base register, mode register 0 (MR0), is used to define various DDR3 SDRAM modes
of operation. These definitions include the selection of a burst length, burst type, CAS
latency, operating mode, DLL RESET, write recovery, and precharge power-down mode
(see Figure 54 (page 141)).
Burst Length
Burst length is defined by MR0[1:0]. Read and write accesses to the DDR3 SDRAM are
burst-oriented, with the burst length being programmable to 4 (chop) mode, 8 (fixed)
mode, or selectable using A12 during a READ/WRITE command (on-the-fly). The burst
length determines the maximum number of column locations that can be accessed for
a given READ or WRITE command. When MR0[1:0] is set to 01 during a READ/WRITE
command, if A12 = 0, then BC4 mode is selected. If A12 = 1, then BL8 mode is selected.
Specific timing diagrams, and turnaround between READ/WRITE, are shown in the
READ/WRITE sections of this document.
When a READ or WRITE command is issued, a block of columns equal to the burst
length is effectively selected. All accesses for that burst take place within this block,
meaning that the burst will wrap within the block if a boundary is reached. The block is
uniquely selected by A[i:2] when the burst length is set to 4 and by A[i:3] when the burst
length is set to 8, where Ai is the most significant column address bit for a given configuration. The remaining (least significant) address bit(s) is (are) used to select the start-
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
140
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 0 (MR0)
ing location within the block. The programmed burst length applies to both READ and
WRITE bursts.
Figure 54: Mode Register 0 (MR0) Definitions
BA2 BA1 BA0 A[15:13] A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
9
18 17 16 15–13 12 11 10
PD
01 0 0
01
WR
M15 M14
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
DLL 01 CAS# latency BT CL
1 0
BL
Mode register 0 (MR0)
M1 M0
Mode Register
0
0
Mode register 0 (MR0)
0
1
Mode register 1 (MR1)
M12
Precharge PD
1
0
Mode register 2 (MR2)
0
DLL off (slow exit)
0
1
1
Mode register 3 (MR3)
1
DLL on (fast exit)
1
Burst Length
0
0
Fixed BL8
0
1
4 or 8 (on-the-fly via A12)
No
1
0
Fixed BC4 (chop)
Yes
1
1
Reserved
M8 DLL Reset
CAS Latency
M3
0
0
0
16
0
0
0
0
Reserved
0
Sequential (nibble)
0
0
1
5
0
0
1
0
5
1
Interleaved
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
6
0
1
1
7
0
1
1
0
7
1
0
0
8
1
0
0
0
8
1
0
1
10
1
0
1
0
9
1
1
0
12
1
1
0
0
10
1
1
1
14
1
1
1
0
11
0
0
0
1
12
0
0
1
1
13
0
1
0
1
14
M11 M10 M9 Write Recovery
Note:
Address bus
M6 M5 M4 M2
READ Burst Type
1. MR0[18, 15:13, 7] are reserved for future use and must be programmed to 0.
Burst Type
Accesses within a given burst can be programmed to either a sequential or an interleaved order. The burst type is selected via MR0[3] (see Figure 54 (page 141)). The ordering of accesses within a burst is determined by the burst length, the burst type, and the
starting column address. DDR3 only supports 4-bit burst chop and 8-bit burst access
modes. Full interleave address ordering is supported for READs, while WRITEs are restricted to nibble (BC4) or word (BL8) boundaries.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
141
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 0 (MR0)
Table 76: Burst Order
Burst
Length
READ/
WRITE
Starting
Column Address
(A[2, 1, 0])
Burst Type = Sequential
(Decimal)
Burst Type = Interleaved
(Decimal)
Notes
4 (chop)
READ
000
0, 1, 2, 3, Z, Z, Z, Z
0, 1, 2, 3, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
001
1, 2, 3, 0, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 0, 3, 2, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
010
2, 3, 0, 1, Z, Z, Z, Z
2, 3, 0, 1, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
011
3, 0, 1, 2, Z, Z, Z, Z
3, 2, 1, 0, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
100
4, 5, 6, 7, Z, Z, Z, Z
4, 5, 6, 7, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
101
5, 6, 7, 4, Z, Z, Z, Z
5, 4, 7, 6, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
110
6, 7, 4, 5, Z, Z, Z, Z
6, 7, 4, 5, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
WRITE
8 (fixed)
READ
WRITE
Notes:
111
7, 4, 5, 6, Z, Z, Z, Z
7, 6, 5, 4, Z, Z, Z, Z
1, 2
0VV
0, 1, 2, 3, X, X, X, X
0, 1, 2, 3, X, X, X, X
1, 3, 4
1VV
4, 5, 6, 7, X, X, X, X
4, 5, 6, 7, X, X, X, X
1, 3, 4
000
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
1
001
1, 2, 3, 0, 5, 6, 7, 4
1, 0, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6
1
010
2, 3, 0, 1, 6, 7, 4, 5
2, 3, 0, 1, 6, 7, 4, 5
1
011
3, 0, 1, 2, 7, 4, 5, 6
3, 2, 1, 0, 7, 6, 5, 4
1
100
4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3
4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1, 2, 3
1
101
5, 6, 7, 4, 1, 2, 3, 0
5, 4, 7, 6, 1, 0, 3, 2
1
110
6, 7, 4, 5, 2, 3, 0, 1
6, 7, 4, 5, 2, 3, 0, 1
1
111
7, 4, 5, 6, 3, 0, 1, 2
7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
1
VVV
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
1, 3
1. Internal READ and WRITE operations start at the same point in time for BC4 as they do
for BL8.
2. Z = Data and strobe output drivers are in tri-state.
3. V = A valid logic level (0 or 1), but the respective input buffer ignores level-on input
pins.
4. X = “Don’t Care.”
DLL RESET
DLL RESET is defined by MR0[8] (see Figure 54 (page 141)). Programming MR0[8] to 1
activates the DLL RESET function. MR0[8] is self-clearing, meaning it returns to a value
of 0 after the DLL RESET function has been initiated.
Anytime the DLL RESET function is initiated, CKE must be HIGH and the clock held
stable for 512 (tDLLK) clock cycles before a READ command can be issued. This is to
allow time for the internal clock to be synchronized with the external clock. Failing to
wait for synchronization can result in invalid output timing specifications, such as
tDQSCK timings.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
142
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 0 (MR0)
Write Recovery
WRITE recovery time is defined by MR0[11:9] (see Figure 54 (page 141)). Write recovery
values of 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, or 12 can be used by programming MR0[11:9]. The user is required to program the correct value of write recovery, which is calculated by dividing
tWR (ns) by tCK (ns) and rounding up a noninteger value to the next integer:
WR (cycles) = roundup (tWR (ns)/tCK (ns)).
Precharge Power-Down (Precharge PD)
The precharge power-down (precharge PD) bit applies only when precharge powerdown mode is being used. When MR0[12] is set to 0, the DLL is off during precharge
power-down, providing a lower standby current mode; however, tXPDLL must be satisfied when exiting. When MR0[12] is set to 1, the DLL continues to run during precharge
power-down mode to enable a faster exit of precharge power-down mode; however, tXP
must be satisfied when exiting (see Power-Down Mode (page 187)).
CAS Latency (CL)
CAS latency (CL) is defined by MR0[6:4], as shown in Figure 54 (page 141). CAS latency
is the delay, in clock cycles, between the internal READ command and the availability of
the first bit of output data. CL can be set to 5 through 14. DDR3 SDRAM do not support
half-clock latencies.
Examples of CL = 6 and CL = 8 are shown below. If an internal READ command is registered at clock edge n, and the CAS latency is m clocks, the data will be available nominally coincident with clock edge n + m. See Speed Bin Tables for the CLs supported at
various operating frequencies.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
143
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 0 (MR0)
Figure 55: READ Latency
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
READ
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
AL = 0, CL = 6
DQS, DQS#
DI
n
DQ
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
DI
n+4
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
READ
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
AL = 0, CL = 8
DQS, DQS#
DI
n
DQ
Transitioning Data
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. For illustration purposes, only CL = 6 and CL = 8 are shown. Other CL values are possible.
2. Shown with nominal tDQSCK and nominal tDSDQ.
144
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 1 (MR1)
Mode Register 1 (MR1)
The mode register 1 (MR1) controls additional functions and features not available in
the other mode registers: Q OFF (OUTPUT DISABLE), TDQS (for the x8 configuration
only), DLL ENABLE/DLL DISABLE, RTT,nom value (ODT), WRITE LEVELING, POSTED
CAS ADDITIVE latency, and OUTPUT DRIVE STRENGTH. These functions are controlled via the bits shown in Figure 56 (page 145). The MR1 register is programmed via the
MRS command and retains the stored information until it is reprogrammed, until RESET# goes LOW, or until the device loses power. Reprogramming the MR1 register will
not alter the contents of the memory array, provided it is performed correctly.
The MR1 register must be loaded when all banks are idle and no bursts are in progress.
The controller must satisfy the specified timing parameters tMRD and tMOD before initiating a subsequent operation.
Figure 56: Mode Register 1 (MR1) Definition
BA2 BA1 BA0 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2
A1 A0
Address bus
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
01 0 1 01 01 01 Q Off TDQS 01 RTT 01 WL RTT ODS
4 3 2
1 0
AL RTT ODS DLL
Mode register 1 (MR1)
Mode Register
M17 M16
0
0
Mode register set 0 (MR0)
M12
Q Off
M11
TDQS
0
1
Mode register set 1 (MR1)
0
Enabled
0
Disabled
1
0
Mode register set 2 (MR2)
1
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
1
Mode register set 3 (MR3)
R TT,nom
(ODT) 2
M0
DLL Enable
0
Enable (normal)
1
Disable
M5 M1 Output Drive St rength
R TT,nom
(ODT) 3
M7 Write Levelization
M9 M6 M2
Non- Writes
Writes
0
0 0 0
R TT,nom disabled
R TT,nom disabled
1
0 0 1
RZQ/4 (60Ω [NOM])
RZQ/4 (60Ω [NOM])
Disable (normal)
Enable
0
0
RZQ/6 (40Ω [NOM])
0
1
RZQ/7 (34Ω [NOM])
1
0
Reserved
1
1
Reserved
0 1 0 RZQ/2 (120Ω [NOM]) RZQ/2 (120Ω [NOM])
0 1 1
Notes:
RZQ/6 (40Ω [NOM])
RZQ/6 (40Ω [NOM])
M4 M3 Additive Latency (AL)
1 0 0 RZQ/12 (20Ω [NOM])
n/a
0
0
Disabled (AL = 0)
1 0 1
RZQ/8 (30Ω [NOM])
n/a
0
1
AL = CL - 1
1 1 0
Reserved
Reserved
1
0
AL = CL - 2
1 1 1
Reserved
Reserved
1
1
Reserved
1. MR1[18, 15:13, 10, 8] are reserved for future use and must be programmed to 0.
2. During write leveling, if MR1[7] and MR1[12] are 1, then all RTT,nom values are available
for use.
3. During write leveling, if MR1[7] is a 1, but MR1[12] is a 0, then only RTT,nom write values
are available for use.
DLL Enable/DLL Disable
The DLL may be enabled or disabled by programming MR1[0] during the LOAD MODE
command, as shown in Figure 56 (page 145). The DLL must be enabled for normal operation. DLL enable is required during power-up initialization and upon returning to normal operation after having disabled the DLL for the purpose of debugging or evaluation. Enabling the DLL should always be followed by resetting the DLL using the appropriate LOAD MODE command.
If the DLL is enabled prior to entering self refresh mode, the DLL is automatically disabled when entering SELF REFRESH operation and is automatically re-enabled and reset
upon exit of SELF REFRESH operation. If the DLL is disabled prior to entering self rePDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
145
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 1 (MR1)
fresh mode, the DLL remains disabled even upon exit of SELF REFRESH operation until
it is re-enabled and reset.
The DRAM is not tested to check—nor does Micron warrant compliance with—normal
mode timings or functionality when the DLL is disabled. An attempt has been made to
have the DRAM operate in the normal mode where reasonably possible when the DLL
has been disabled; however, by industry standard, a few known exceptions are defined:
• ODT is not allowed to be used
• The output data is no longer edge-aligned to the clock
• CL and CWL can only be six clocks
When the DLL is disabled, timing and functionality can vary from the normal operation
specifications when the DLL is enabled (see DLL Disable Mode (page 124)). Disabling
the DLL also implies the need to change the clock frequency (see Input Clock Frequency Change (page 128)).
Output Drive Strength
The DDR3 SDRAM uses a programmable impedance output buffer. The drive strength
mode register setting is defined by MR1[5, 1]. RZQ/7 (34Ω [NOM]) is the primary output
driver impedance setting for DDR3 SDRAM devices. To calibrate the output driver impedance, an external precision resistor (RZQ) is connected between the ZQ ball and
VSSQ. The value of the resistor must be 240Ω ±1%.
The output impedance is set during initialization. Additional impedance calibration updates do not affect device operation, and all data sheet timings and current specifications are met during an update.
To meet the 34Ω specification, the output drive strength must be set to 34Ω during initialization. To obtain a calibrated output driver impedance after power-up, the DDR3
SDRAM needs a calibration command that is part of the initialization and reset procedure.
OUTPUT ENABLE/DISABLE
The OUTPUT ENABLE function is defined by MR1[12], as shown in Figure 56 (page
145). When enabled (MR1[12] = 0), all outputs (DQ, DQS, DQS#) function when in the
normal mode of operation. When disabled (MR1[12] = 1), all DDR3 SDRAM outputs
(DQ and DQS, DQS#) are tri-stated. The output disable feature is intended to be used
during IDD characterization of the READ current and during tDQSS margining (write
leveling) only.
TDQS Enable
Termination data strobe (TDQS) is a feature of the x8 DDR3 SDRAM configuration that
provides termination resistance (RTT) and may be useful in some system configurations.
TDQS is not supported in x4 or x16 configurations. When enabled via the mode register
(MR1[11]), the RTT that is applied to DQS and DQS# is also applied to TDQS and TDQS#.
In contrast to the RDQS function of DDR2 SDRAM, DDR3’s TDQS provides the termination resistance RTT only. The OUTPUT DATA STROBE function of RDQS is not provided
by TDQS; thus, R ON does not apply to TDQS and TDQS#. The TDQS and DM functions
share the same ball. When the TDQS function is enabled via the mode register, the DM
function is not supported. When the TDQS function is disabled, the DM function is provided, and the TDQS# ball is not used. The TDQS function is available in the x8 DDR3
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
146
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 1 (MR1)
SDRAM configuration only and must be disabled via the mode register for the x4 and
x16 configurations.
On-Die Termination
ODT resistance RTT,nom is defined by MR1[9, 6, 2] (see Figure 56 (page 145)). The R TT
termination value applies to the DQ, DM, DQS, DQS#, and TDQS, TDQS# balls. DDR3
supports multiple RTT termination values based on RZQ/n where n can be 2, 4, 6, 8, or
12 and RZQ is 240Ω.
Unlike DDR2, DDR3 ODT must be turned off prior to reading data out and must remain
off during a READ burst. RTT,nom termination is allowed any time after the DRAM is initialized, calibrated, and not performing read access, or when it is not in self refresh
mode. Additionally, write accesses with dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) enabled temporarily replaces RTT,nom with RTT(WR).
The actual effective termination, RTT(EFF), may be different from the RTT targeted due to
nonlinearity of the termination. For RTT(EFF) values and calculations (see On-Die Termination (ODT) (page 197)).
The ODT feature is designed to improve signal integrity of the memory channel by enabling the DDR3 SDRAM controller to independently turn on/off ODT for any or all devices. The ODT input control pin is used to determine when R TT is turned on (ODTL on)
and off (ODTL off), assuming ODT has been enabled via MR1[9, 6, 2].
Timings for ODT are detailed in On-Die Termination (ODT) (page 197).
WRITE LEVELING
The WRITE LEVELING function is enabled by MR1[7], as shown in Figure 56 (page 145).
Write leveling is used (during initialization) to deskew the DQS strobe to clock offset as
a result of fly-by topology designs. For better signal integrity, DDR3 SDRAM memory
modules adopted fly-by topology for the commands, addresses, control signals, and
clocks.
The fly-by topology benefits from a reduced number of stubs and their lengths. However, fly-by topology induces flight time skews between the clock and DQS strobe (and
DQ) at each DRAM on the DIMM. Controllers will have a difficult time maintaining
tDQSS, tDSS, and tDSH specifications without supporting write leveling in systems
which use fly-by topology-based modules. Write leveling timing and detailed operation
information is provided in Write Leveling (page 130).
POSTED CAS ADDITIVE Latency
POSTED CAS ADDITIVE latency (AL) is supported to make the command and data bus
efficient for sustainable bandwidths in DDR3 SDRAM. MR1[4, 3] define the value of AL,
as shown in Figure 57 (page 148). MR1[4, 3] enable the user to program the DDR3
SDRAM with AL = 0, CL - 1, or CL - 2.
With this feature, the DDR3 SDRAM enables a READ or WRITE command to be issued
after the ACTIVATE command for that bank prior to tRCD (MIN). The only restriction is
ACTIVATE to READ or WRITE + AL ≥ tRCD (MIN) must be satisfied. Assuming tRCD
(MIN) = CL, a typical application using this feature sets AL = CL - 1tCK = tRCD (MIN) - 1
tCK. The READ or WRITE command is held for the time of the AL before it is released
internally to the DDR3 SDRAM device. READ latency (RL) is controlled by the sum of
the AL and CAS latency (CL), RL = AL + CL. WRITE latency (WL) is the sum of CAS
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
147
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 2 (MR2)
WRITE latency and AL, WL = AL + CWL (see Mode Register 2 (MR2) (page 148)). Examples of READ and WRITE latencies are shown in Figure 57 (page 148) and Figure 59
(page 149).
Figure 57: READ Latency (AL = 5, CL = 6)
BC4
T0
T1
ACTIVE n
READ n
T2
T6
T11
T12
T13
T14
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
tRCD
(MIN)
DQS, DQS#
AL = 5
CL = 6
DO
n
DQ
DO
n+1
DO
n+2
DO
n+3
RL = AL + CL = 11
Indicates break
in time scale
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
Mode Register 2 (MR2)
The mode register 2 (MR2) controls additional functions and features not available in
the other mode registers. These additional functions are CAS WRITE latency (CWL), AUTO SELF REFRESH (ASR), SELF REFRESH TEMPERATURE (SRT), and DYNAMIC ODT
(RTT(WR)). These functions are controlled via the bits shown in Figure 58. The MR2 is
programmed via the MRS command and will retain the stored information until it is
programmed again or until the device loses power. Reprogramming the MR2 register
will not alter the contents of the memory array, provided it is performed correctly. The
MR2 register must be loaded when all banks are idle and no data bursts are in progress,
and the controller must wait the specified time tMRD and tMOD before initiating a subsequent operation.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
148
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 2 (MR2)
Figure 58: Mode Register 2 (MR2) Definition
BA2 BA1 BA0 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
Address bus
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
6
0 01 01 01 RTT(WR) 01 SRT ASR
Mode register 2 (MR2)
5
01 1
M15 M14
Mode Register
3
M5 M4 M3
2 1 0
01 01 01
CAS Write Latency (CWL)
5 CK (tCK ≥2.5ns)
0
0
Mode register set 0 (MR0)
0
Normal (0°C to 85°C)
0
0
0
0
1
Mode register set 1 (MR1)
1
Extended (0°C to 95°C)
0
0
1
1
0
Mode register set 2 (MR2)
0
1
0
1
1
Mode register set 3 (MR3)
0
1
1
1
0
0
8 CK (1.5ns  tCK ≥1.25ns)
9 CK (1.25ns  tCK ≥1.07ns)
1
0
1
10 CK (1.07ns  tCK ≥0.938ns)
1
1
0
Reserved
1
1
1
Reserved
Dynamic ODT
(R TT(WR) )
M10 M9
0
Note:
M7 Self Refresh Temperature
4
CWL
0
M6 Auto Self Refresh
0
RTT(WR) disabled
1 Enabled: Automatic
RZQ/4
0
1
1
0
RZQ/2
1
1
Reserved
Disabled: Manual
6 CK (2.5ns  tCK ≥1.875ns)
7 CK (1.875ns  tCK ≥1.5ns)
1. MR2[18, 15:11, 8, and 2:0] are reserved for future use and must all be programmed to 0.
CAS WRITE Latency (CWL)
CWL is defined by MR2[5:3] and is the delay, in clock cycles, from the releasing of the
internal write to the latching of the first data in. CWL must be correctly set to the corresponding operating clock frequency (see Figure 58 (page 149)). The overall WRITE latency (WL) is equal to CWL + AL (Figure 56 (page 145)).
Figure 59: CAS WRITE Latency
T0
T1
ACTIVE n
WRITE n
T2
T6
T11
T12
T13
T14
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
tRCD
(MIN)
DQS, DQS#
AL = 5
CWL = 6
DI
n
DQ
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
WL = AL + CWL = 11
Indicates break
in time scale
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
AUTO SELF REFRESH (ASR)
Mode register MR2[6] is used to disable/enable the ASR function. When ASR is disabled,
the self refresh mode’s refresh rate is assumed to be at the normal 85°C limit (sometimes referred to as 1x refresh rate). In the disabled mode, ASR requires the user to en-
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
149
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 2 (MR2)
sure the DRAM never exceeds a T C of 85°C while in self refresh unless the user enables
the SRT feature listed below when the T C is between 85°C and 95°C.
Enabling ASR assumes the DRAM self refresh rate is changed automatically from 1x to
2x when the case temperature exceeds 85°C. This enables the user to operate the DRAM
beyond the standard 85°C limit up to the optional extended temperature range of 95°C
while in self refresh mode.
The standard self refresh current test specifies test conditions to normal case temperature (85°C) only, meaning if ASR is enabled, the standard self refresh current specifications do not apply (see Extended Temperature Usage (page 186)).
SELF REFRESH TEMPERATURE (SRT)
Mode register MR2[7] is used to disable/enable the SRT function. When SRT is disabled,
the self refresh mode’s refresh rate is assumed to be at the normal 85°C limit (sometimes referred to as 1x refresh rate). In the disabled mode, SRT requires the user to ensure the DRAM never exceeds a T C of 85°C while in self refresh mode unless the user enables ASR.
When SRT is enabled, the DRAM self refresh is changed internally from 1x to 2x, regardless of the case temperature. This enables the user to operate the DRAM beyond the
standard 85°C limit up to the optional extended temperature range of 95°C while in self
refresh mode. The standard self refresh current test specifies test conditions to normal
case temperature (85°C) only, meaning if SRT is enabled, the standard self refresh current specifications do not apply (see Extended Temperature Usage (page 186)).
SRT vs. ASR
If the normal case temperature limit of 85°C is not exceeded, then neither SRT nor ASR
is required, and both can be disabled throughout operation. However, if the extended
temperature option of 95°C is needed, the user is required to provide a 2x refresh rate
during (manual) refresh and to enable either the SRT or the ASR to ensure self refresh is
performed at the 2x rate.
SRT forces the DRAM to switch the internal self refresh rate from 1x to 2x. Self refresh is
performed at the 2x refresh rate regardless of the case temperature.
ASR automatically switches the DRAM’s internal self refresh rate from 1x to 2x. However, while in self refresh mode, ASR enables the refresh rate to automatically adjust between 1x to 2x over the supported temperature range. One other disadvantage with ASR
is the DRAM cannot always switch from a 1x to a 2x refresh rate at an exact case temperature of 85°C. Although the DRAM will support data integrity when it switches from a 1x
to a 2x refresh rate, it may switch at a lower temperature than 85°C.
Since only one mode is necessary, SRT and ASR cannot be enabled at the same time.
DYNAMIC ODT
The dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) feature is defined by MR2[10, 9]. Dynamic ODT is enabled
when a value is selected. This new DDR3 SDRAM feature enables the ODT termination
value to change without issuing an MRS command, essentially changing the ODT termination on-the-fly.
With dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) enabled, the DRAM switches from normal ODT (RTT,nom)
to dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) when beginning a WRITE burst and subsequently switches
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
150
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
back to ODT (RTT,nom) at the completion of the WRITE burst. If R TT,nom is disabled, the
RTT,nom value will be High-Z. Special timing parameters must be adhered to when dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) is enabled: ODTLcnw, ODTLcnw4, ODTLcnw8, ODTH4, ODTH8,
and tADC.
Dynamic ODT is only applicable during WRITE cycles. If ODT (R TT,nom) is disabled, dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) is still permitted. RTT,nom and RTT(WR) can be used independent of
one other. Dynamic ODT is not available during write leveling mode, regardless of the
state of ODT (RTT,nom). For details on dynamic ODT operation, refer to Dynamic ODT
(page 200).
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
The mode register 3 (MR3) controls additional functions and features not available in
the other mode registers. Currently defined is the MULTIPURPOSE REGISTER (MPR).
This function is controlled via the bits shown in Figure 60 (page 151). The MR3 is programmed via the LOAD MODE command and retains the stored information until it is
programmed again or until the device loses power. Reprogramming the MR3 register
will not alter the contents of the memory array, provided it is performed correctly. The
MR3 register must be loaded when all banks are idle and no data bursts are in progress,
and the controller must wait the specified time tMRD and tMOD before initiating a subsequent operation.
Figure 60: Mode Register 3 (MR3) Definition
BA2 BA1 BA0 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8
18 17 16
1 1
01
A4 A3
A2
A1 A0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8 7
6
5
4
3
2
1 0
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 MPR MPR_RF
Address bus
Mode register 3 (MR3)
M2
MPR Enable
0
0
Mode register set (MR0)
0
Normal DRAM operations2
0
0
MPR READ Function
Predefined pattern3
0
1
Mode register set 1 (MR1)
1
Dataflow from MPR
0
1
Reserved
1
0
Mode register set 2 (MR2)
1
0
Reserved
1
1
Mode register set 3 (MR3)
1
1
Reserved
M17 M16
Notes:
A7 A6 A5
Mode Register
M1 M0
1. MR3[18 and 15:3] are reserved for future use and must all be programmed to 0.
2. When MPR control is set for normal DRAM operation, MR3[1, 0] will be ignored.
3. Intended to be used for READ synchronization.
MULTIPURPOSE REGISTER (MPR)
The MULTIPURPOSE REGISTER function is used to output a predefined system timing
calibration bit sequence. Bit 2 is the master bit that enables or disables access to the
MPR register, and bits 1 and 0 determine which mode the MPR is placed in. The basic
concept of the multipurpose register is shown in Figure 61 (page 152).
If MR3[2] is a 0, then the MPR access is disabled, and the DRAM operates in normal
mode. However, if MR3[2] is a 1, then the DRAM no longer outputs normal read data
but outputs MPR data as defined by MR3[0, 1]. If MR3[0, 1] is equal to 00, then a predefined read pattern for system calibration is selected.
To enable the MPR, the MRS command is issued to MR3, and MR3[2] = 1. Prior to issuing the MRS command, all banks must be in the idle state (all banks are precharged,
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
151
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
and tRP is met). When the MPR is enabled, any subsequent READ or RDAP commands
are redirected to the multipurpose register. The resulting operation when either a READ
or a RDAP command is issued, is defined by MR3[1:0] when the MPR is enabled (see
Table 78 (page 153)). When the MPR is enabled, only READ or RDAP commands are allowed until a subsequent MRS command is issued with the MPR disabled (MR3[2] = 0).
Power-down mode, self refresh, and any other nonREAD/RDAP commands are not allowed during MPR enable mode. The RESET function is supported during MPR enable
mode.
Figure 61: Multipurpose Register (MPR) Block Diagram
Memory core
MR3[2] = 0 (MPR off)
Multipurpose register
predefined data for READs
MR3[2] = 1 (MPR on)
DQ, DM, DQS, DQS#
Notes:
1. A predefined data pattern can be read out of the MPR with an external READ command.
2. MR3[2] defines whether the data flow comes from the memory core or the MPR. When
the data flow is defined, the MPR contents can be read out continuously with a regular
READ or RDAP command.
Table 77: MPR Functional Description of MR3 Bits
MR3[2]
MR3[1:0]
MPR
MPR READ Function
Function
0
“Don’t Care”
Normal operation, no MPR transaction
All subsequent READs come from the DRAM memory array
All subsequent WRITEs go to the DRAM memory array
1
A[1:0]
(see Table 78 (page 153))
Enable MPR mode, subsequent READ/RDAP commands defined by bits 1 and
2
MPR Functional Description
The MPR JEDEC definition enables either a prime DQ (DQ0 on a x4 and a x8; on a x16,
DQ0 = lower byte and DQ8 = upper byte) to output the MPR data with the remaining
DQs driven LOW, or for all DQs to output the MPR data . The MPR readout supports
fixed READ burst and READ burst chop (MRS and OTF via A12/BC#) with regular READ
latencies and AC timings applicable, provided the DLL is locked as required.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
152
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
MPR addressing for a valid MPR read is as follows:
• A[1:0] must be set to 00 as the burst order is fixed per nibble
• A2 selects the burst order:
– BL8, A2 is set to 0, and the burst order is fixed to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
• For burst chop 4 cases, the burst order is switched on the nibble base along with the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– A2 = 0; burst order = 0, 1, 2, 3
– A2 = 1; burst order = 4, 5, 6, 7
Burst order bit 0 (the first bit) is assigned to LSB, and burst order bit 7 (the last bit) is
assigned to MSB
A[9:3] are a “Don’t Care”
A10 is a “Don’t Care”
A11 is a “Don’t Care”
A12: Selects burst chop mode on-the-fly, if enabled within MR0
A13 is a “Don’t Care”
BA[2:0] are a “Don’t Care”
MPR Register Address Definitions and Bursting Order
The MPR currently supports a single data format. This data format is a predefined read
pattern for system calibration. The predefined pattern is always a repeating 0–1 bit pattern.
Examples of the different types of predefined READ pattern bursts are shown in the following figures.
Table 78: MPR Readouts and Burst Order Bit Mapping
MR3[2]
MR3[1:0]
Function
1
00
READ predefined pattern
for system calibration
1
1
01
10
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
RFU
RFU
Burst
Length
Read
A[2:0]
BL8
000
Burst order: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Predefined pattern: 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1
BC4
000
Burst order: 0, 1, 2, 3
Predefined pattern: 0, 1, 0, 1
BC4
100
Burst order: 4, 5, 6, 7
Predefined pattern: 0, 1, 0, 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Burst Order and Data Pattern
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
153
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
Table 78: MPR Readouts and Burst Order Bit Mapping (Continued)
MR3[2]
MR3[1:0]
Function
Burst
Length
Read
A[2:0]
Burst Order and Data Pattern
1
11
RFU
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
1. Burst order bit 0 is assigned to LSB, and burst order bit 7 is assigned to MSB of the selected MPR agent.
154
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
155
DQ
tMOD
Notes:
0
A[15:13]
DQS, DQS#
0
A12/BC#
0
A10/AP
0
00
A[9:3]
A11
1
A2
1
0
A[1:0]
tRP
MRS
Ta0
3
PREA
T0
Bank address
Command
CK#
CK
NOP
Tc4
NOP
Tc5
NOP
Tc6
tMPRR
MRS
Tc7
1. READ with BL8 either by MRS or OTF.
2. Memory controller must drive 0 on A[2:0].
0
0
Valid 1
Valid
0
0
00
Valid
Valid
Valid
0
NOP
Tc3
02
NOP
Tc2
Valid
NOP
Tc1
02
RL
NOP
Tc0
3
NOP
Tb1
Valid
READ1
Tb0
Figure 62: MPR System Read Calibration with BL8: Fixed Burst Order Single Readout
tMOD
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Tc8
NOP
Tc9
Don’t Care
Valid
Tc10
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
156
DQ
tMOD
Notes:
0
A[15:13]
DQS, DQS#
0
A12/BC#
0
A10/AP
0
00
A[9:3]
A11
1
A2
1
0
MRS
A[1:0]
tRP
Ta
3
PREA
T0
Bank address
Command
CK#
CK
RL
NOP
Tc6
NOP
Tc7
NOP
Tc8
tMPRR
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Tc9
0
00
0
Valid
3
MRS
Tc10
RL
Valid
1. READ with BL8 either by MRS or OTF.
2. Memory controller must drive 0 on A[2:0].
Valid
0
0
NOP
Tc5
Valid 1
NOP
Tc4
Valid
NOP
Tc3
0
NOP
Tc2
Valid
Valid
NOP
Tc1
Valid
Valid
Valid
12
02
Valid
02
02
READ1
Valid
tCCD
Tc0
Valid
READ1
Tb
Figure 63: MPR System Read Calibration with BL8: Fixed Burst Order, Back-to-Back Readout
Valid
Don’t Care
tMOD
Td
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
157
DQ
tMOD
Notes:
0
A[15:13]
DQS, DQS#
0
A12/BC#
0
A10/AP
0
00
A[9:3]
A11
1
A2
1
0
A[1:0]
tRF
MRS
Ta
3
PREA
T0
Bank address
Command
CK#
CK
14
03
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOP
Tc1
NOP
Tc2
RL
NOP
Tc3
READ with BC4 either by MRS or OTF.
Memory controller must drive 0 on A[1:0].
A2 = 0 selects lower 4 nibble bits 0 . . . 3.
A2 = 1 selects upper 4 nibble bits 4 . . . 7.
RL
Valid
Valid 1
Valid 1
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
02
02
Valid
Valid
tCCD
READ1
Tc0
Valid
READ1
Tb
NOP
Tc4
NOP
Tc5
NOP
Tc6
Figure 64: MPR System Read Calibration with BC4: Lower Nibble, Then Upper Nibble
NOP
Tc7
tMPRR
0
0
0
0
00
0
Valid
3
MRS
Tc8
tMOD
NOP
Tc10
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Tc9
Don’t Care
Valid
Td
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
158
DQ
tMOD
Notes:
0
A[15:13]
DQS, DQS#
0
A12/BC#
0
A10/AP
0
00
A[9:3]
A11
1
A2
1
0
A[1:0]
tRF
MRS
Ta
3
PREA
T0
Bank address
Command
CK#
CK
04
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
NOP
Tc1
NOP
Tc2
RL
NOP
Tc3
READ with BC4 either by MRS or OTF.
Memory controller must drive 0 on A[1:0].
A2 = 1 selects upper 4 nibble bits 4 . . . 7.
A2 = 0 selects lower 4 nibble bits 0 . . . 3.
RL
Valid
Valid 1
Valid 1
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
02
02
Valid
Valid
tCCD
READ1
Tc0
Valid
READ1
Tb
NOP
Tc4
NOP
Tc5
NOP
Tc6
Figure 65: MPR System Read Calibration with BC4: Upper Nibble, Then Lower Nibble
NOP
Tc7
tMPRR
0
0
0
0
00
0
Valid
3
MRS
Tc8
tMOD
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Tc9
NOP
Tc10
Don’t Care
Valid
Td
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Mode Register 3 (MR3)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
MODE REGISTER SET (MRS) Command
MPR Read Predefined Pattern
The predetermined read calibration pattern is a fixed pattern of 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1. The
following is an example of using the read out predetermined read calibration pattern.
The example is to perform multiple reads from the multipurpose register to do system
level read timing calibration based on the predetermined and standardized pattern.
The following protocol outlines the steps used to perform the read calibration:
1. Precharge all banks
2. After tRP is satisfied, set MRS, MR3[2] = 1 and MR3[1:0] = 00. This redirects all subsequent reads and loads the predefined pattern into the MPR. As soon as tMRD
and tMOD are satisfied, the MPR is available
3. Data WRITE operations are not allowed until the MPR returns to the normal
DRAM state
4. Issue a read with burst order information (all other address pins are “Don’t Care”):
5.
6.
7.
8.
• A[1:0] = 00 (data burst order is fixed starting at nibble)
• A2 = 0 (for BL8, burst order is fixed as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
• A12 = 1 (use BL8)
After RL = AL + CL, the DRAM bursts out the predefined read calibration pattern
(0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1)
The memory controller repeats the calibration reads until read data capture at
memory controller is optimized
After the last MPR READ burst and after tMPRR has been satisfied, issue MRS,
MR3[2] = 0, and MR3[1:0] = “Don’t Care” to the normal DRAM state. All subsequent read and write accesses will be regular reads and writes from/to the DRAM
array
When tMRD and tMOD are satisfied from the last MRS, the regular DRAM commands (such as activate a memory bank for regular read or write access) are permitted
MODE REGISTER SET (MRS) Command
The mode registers are loaded via inputs BA[2:0], A[13:0]. BA[2:0] determine which
mode register is programmed:
•
•
•
•
BA2 = 0, BA1 = 0, BA0 = 0 for MR0
BA2 = 0, BA1 = 0, BA0 = 1 for MR1
BA2 = 0, BA1 = 1, BA0 = 0 for MR2
BA2 = 0, BA1 = 1, BA0 = 1 for MR3
The MRS command can only be issued (or re-issued) when all banks are idle and in the
precharged state (tRP is satisfied and no data bursts are in progress). The controller
must wait the specified time tMRD before initiating a subsequent operation such as an
ACTIVATE command (see Figure 52 (page 139)). There is also a restriction after issuing
an MRS command with regard to when the updated functions become available. This
parameter is specified by tMOD. Both tMRD and tMOD parameters are shown in Figure
52 (page 139) and Figure 53 (page 140). Violating either of these requirements will result
in unspecified operation.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
159
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ZQ CALIBRATION Operation
ZQ CALIBRATION Operation
The ZQ CALIBRATION command is used to calibrate the DRAM output drivers (RON)
and ODT values (RTT) over process, voltage, and temperature, provided a dedicated
240Ω (±1%) external resistor is connected from the DRAM’s ZQ ball to V SSQ.
DDR3 SDRAM require a longer time to calibrate RON and ODT at power-up initialization
and self refresh exit, and a relatively shorter time to perform periodic calibrations.
DDR3 SDRAM defines two ZQ CALIBRATION commands: ZQCL and ZQCS. An example
of ZQ calibration timing is shown below.
All banks must be precharged and tRP must be met before ZQCL or ZQCS commands
can be issued to the DRAM. No other activities (other than issuing another ZQCL or
ZQCS command) can be performed on the DRAM channel by the controller for the duration of tZQinit or tZQoper. The quiet time on the DRAM channel helps accurately calibrate RON and ODT. After DRAM calibration is achieved, the DRAM should disable the
ZQ ball’s current consumption path to reduce power.
ZQ CALIBRATION commands can be issued in parallel to DLL RESET and locking time.
Upon self refresh exit, an explicit ZQCL is required if ZQ calibration is desired.
In dual-rank systems that share the ZQ resistor between devices, the controller must not
enable overlap of tZQinit, tZQoper, or tZQCS between ranks.
Figure 66: ZQ CALIBRATION Timing (ZQCL and ZQCS)
T0
T1
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Tb0
Tb1
Tc0
Tc1
Tc2
ZQCL
NOP
NOP
NOP
Valid
Valid
ZQCS
NOP
NOP
NOP
Valid
Address
Valid
Valid
Valid
A10
Valid
Valid
Valid
CK#
CK
Command
CKE
1
Valid
Valid
1
Valid
ODT
2
Valid
Valid
2
Valid
DQ
3
Activities
3
High-Z
tZQinit
or tZQoper
High-Z
tZQCS
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Activities
Don’t Care
1. CKE must be continuously registered HIGH during the calibration procedure.
2. ODT must be disabled via the ODT signal or the MRS during the calibration procedure.
3. All devices connected to the DQ bus should be High-Z during calibration.
160
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ACTIVATE Operation
ACTIVATE Operation
Before any READ or WRITE commands can be issued to a bank within the DRAM, a row
in that bank must be opened (activated). This is accomplished via the ACTIVATE command, which selects both the bank and the row to be activated.
After a row is opened with an ACTIVATE command, a READ or WRITE command may
be issued to that row, subject to the tRCD specification. However, if the additive latency
is programmed correctly, a READ or WRITE command may be issued prior to tRCD
(MIN). In this operation, the DRAM enables a READ or WRITE command to be issued
after the ACTIVATE command for that bank, but prior to tRCD (MIN) with the requirement that (ACTIVATE-to-READ/WRITE) + AL ≥ tRCD (MIN) (see Posted CAS Additive
Latency). tRCD (MIN) should be divided by the clock period and rounded up to the next
whole number to determine the earliest clock edge after the ACTIVATE command on
which a READ or WRITE command can be entered. The same procedure is used to convert other specification limits from time units to clock cycles.
When at least one bank is open, any READ-to-READ command delay or WRITE-toWRITE command delay is restricted to tCCD (MIN).
A subsequent ACTIVATE command to a different row in the same bank can only be issued after the previous active row has been closed (precharged). The minimum time interval between successive ACTIVATE commands to the same bank is defined by tRC.
A subsequent ACTIVATE command to another bank can be issued while the first bank is
being accessed, which results in a reduction of total row-access overhead. The minimum time interval between successive ACTIVATE commands to different banks is defined by tRRD. No more than four bank ACTIVATE commands may be issued in a given
tFAW (MIN) period, and the tRRD (MIN) restriction still applies. The tFAW (MIN) parameter applies, regardless of the number of banks already opened or closed.
Figure 67: Example: Meeting tRRD (MIN) and tRCD (MIN)
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T8
T9
T10
T11
Command
ACT
NOP
NOP
ACT
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
RD/WR
Address
Row
Row
Col
BA[2:0]
Bank x
Bank y
Bank y
CK#
CK
tRRD
tRCD
Indicates break
in time scale
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
161
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
ACTIVATE Operation
Figure 68: Example: tFAW
CK#
T0
T1
T4
T5
T8
T9
T10
T11
T19
T20
ACT
NOP
ACT
NOP
ACT
NOP
ACT
NOP
NOP
ACT
CK
Command
Address
BA[2:0]
Row
Row
Row
Row
Row
Bank a
Bank b
Bank c
Bank d
Bank ey
tRRD
tFAW
Indicates break
in time scale
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
162
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
READ Operation
READ bursts are initiated with a READ command. The starting column and bank addresses are provided with the READ command and auto precharge is either enabled or
disabled for that burst access. If auto precharge is enabled, the row being accessed is
automatically precharged at the completion of the burst. If auto precharge is disabled,
the row will be left open after the completion of the burst.
During READ bursts, the valid data-out element from the starting column address is
available READ latency (RL) clocks later. RL is defined as the sum of posted CAS additive
latency (AL) and CAS latency (CL) (RL = AL + CL). The value of AL and CL is programmable in the mode register via the MRS command. Each subsequent data-out element is
valid nominally at the next positive or negative clock edge (that is, at the next crossing
of CK and CK#). Figure 69 shows an example of RL based on a CL setting of 8 and an AL
setting of 0.
Figure 69: READ Latency
T0
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T12
READ
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
Address
Bank a,
Col n
CL = 8, AL = 0
DQS, DQS#
DO
n
DQ
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
1. DO n = data-out from column n.
2. Subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO n.
DQS, DQS# is driven by the DRAM along with the output data. The initial LOW state on
DQS and HIGH state on DQS# is known as the READ preamble (tRPRE). The LOW state
on DQS and the HIGH state on DQS#, coincident with the last data-out element, is
known as the READ postamble (tRPST). Upon completion of a burst, assuming no other
commands have been initiated, the DQ goes High-Z. A detailed explanation of tDQSQ
(valid data-out skew), tQH (data-out window hold), and the valid data window are depicted in Figure 80 (page 171). A detailed explanation of tDQSCK (DQS transition skew
to CK) is also depicted in Figure 80 (page 171).
Data from any READ burst may be concatenated with data from a subsequent READ
command to provide a continuous flow of data. The first data element from the new
burst follows the last element of a completed burst. The new READ command should be
issued tCCD cycles after the first READ command. This is shown for BL8 in Figure 70
(page 165). If BC4 is enabled, tCCD must still be met, which will cause a gap in the data
output, as shown in Figure 71 (page 165). Nonconsecutive READ data is reflected in
Figure 72 (page 166). DDR3 SDRAM does not allow interrupting or truncating any
READ burst.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
163
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Data from any READ burst must be completed before a subsequent WRITE burst is allowed. An example of a READ burst followed by a WRITE burst for BL8 is shown in Figure 73 (page 166) (BC4 is shown in Figure 74 (page 167)). To ensure the READ data is
completed before the WRITE data is on the bus, the minimum READ-to-WRITE timing
is RL + tCCD - WL + 2 tCK.
A READ burst may be followed by a PRECHARGE command to the same bank, provided
auto precharge is not activated. The minimum READ-to-PRECHARGE command spacing to the same bank is four clocks and must also satisfy a minimum analog time from
the READ command. This time is called tRTP (READ-to-PRECHARGE). tRTP starts AL
cycles later than the READ command. Examples for BL8 are shown in Figure 75 (page
167) and BC4 in Figure 76 (page 168). Following the PRECHARGE command, a subsequent command to the same bank cannot be issued until tRP is met. The PRECHARGE
command followed by another PRECHARGE command to the same bank is allowed.
However, the precharge period will be determined by the last PRECHARGE command
issued to the bank.
If A10 is HIGH when a READ command is issued, the READ with auto precharge function is engaged. The DRAM starts an auto precharge operation on the rising edge, which
is AL + tRTP cycles after the READ command. DRAM support a tRAS lockout feature (see
Figure 78 (page 168)). If tRAS (MIN) is not satisfied at the edge, the starting point of the
auto precharge operation will be delayed until tRAS (MIN) is satisfied. If tRTP (MIN) is
not satisfied at the edge, the starting point of the auto precharge operation is delayed
until tRTP (MIN) is satisfied. In case the internal precharge is pushed out by tRTP, tRP
starts at the point at which the internal precharge happens (not at the next rising clock
edge after this event). The time from READ with auto precharge to the next ACTIVATE
command to the same bank is AL + (tRTP + tRP)*, where * means rounded up to the next
integer. In any event, internal precharge does not start earlier than four clocks after the
last 8n-bit prefetch.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
164
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Bank,
Col n
Address2
NOP
T1
Notes:
RL = 5
NOP
T3
Bank,
Col b
READ
T4
165
Bank,
Col n
Address2
DQ3
DQS, DQS#
READ
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
NOP
T1
Notes:
tCCD
NOP
T2
tRPRE
NOP
T5
DO
n
DO
n+1
NOP
T6
DO
n+3
RL = 5
DO
n+2
DO
n+4
NOP
T7
DO
n+5
NOP
T8
DO
n+6
DO
n+7
NOP
T9
DO
b
DO
b+1
NOP
T10
DO
b+2
DO
b+3
NOP
T11
DO
b+4
DO
b+5
NOP
T12
DO
b+7
Transitioning Data
DO
b+6
tRPST
NOP
T13
Don’t Care
NOP
T14
Bank,
Col b
READ
T4
tRPRE
NOP
DO
n
DO
n+1
NOP
T6
RL = 5
DO
n+2
DO
n+3
tRPST
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
tRPRE
NOP
T9
DO
b
DO
b+1
NOP
T10
DO
b+2
DO
b+3
tRPST
NOP
T11
NOP
T13
Transitioning Data
NOP
T12
Don’t Care
NOP
T14
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. The BC4 setting is activated by either MR0[1:0] = 10 or MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 0 during READ command at T0
and T4.
3. DO n (or b) = data-out from column n (or column b).
4. BC4, RL = 5 (CL = 5, AL = 0).
RL = 5
NOP
T3
T5
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. The BL8 setting is activated by either MR0[1:0] = 00 or MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 1 during READ command at T0
and T4.
3. DO n (or b) = data-out from column n (or column b).
4. BL8, RL = 5 (CL = 5, AL = 0).
tCCD
NOP
T2
Figure 71: Consecutive READ Bursts (BC4)
DQ3
DQS, DQS#
READ
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
Figure 70: Consecutive READ Bursts (BL8)
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
NOP
T1
Notes:
NOP
T2
1.
2.
3.
4.
CL = 8
NOP
T4
166
DQ3
DQS, DQS#
Address2
Command1
CK
CK#
Bank,
Col n
READ
T0
NOP
T2
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
NOP
T5
Notes:
NOP
T6
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
DO
n
CL = 8
NOP
T9
NOP
T10
NOP
T11
NOP
T12
NOP
T13
DO
b
NOP
T14
DO
n
DO
n+1
DO
n+2
Bank,
Col b
WRITE
T6
DO
n+3
DO
n+4
NOP
T7
DO
n+5
NOP
T9
DO
n+7
tRPST
WL = 5
DO
n+6
NOP
T8
NOP
T10
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T11
DI
n+1
tBL
DI
DI
n+2 n+3
NOP
T12
DI
n+5
NOP
T16
DI
n+6
NOP
Don’t Care
DI
n+7
tWPST
tWR
tWR
NOP
T15
Transitioning Data
T14
Transitioning Data
DI
n+4
= 4 clocks
NOP
T13
NOP
T15
Don’t Care
NOP
T17
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. The BL8 setting is activated by either MR0[1:0] = 00 or MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 1 during the READ command at
T0, and the WRITE command at T6.
3. DO n = data-out from column, DI b = data-in for column b.
4. BL8, RL = 5 (AL = 0, CL = 5), WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
RL = 5
tRPRE
READ-to-WRITE command delay = RL + tCCD + 2tCK - WL
NOP
T1
Bank a,
Col b
READ
T5
AL = 0, RL = 8.
DO n (or b) = data-out from column n (or column b).
Seven subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO n.
Seven subsequent elements of data-out appear in the programmed order following DO b.
NOP
T3
Figure 73: READ (BL8) to WRITE (BL8)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
READ
Bank a,
Col n
Address
T0
Command
CK
CK#
Figure 72: Nonconsecutive READ Bursts
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
167
NOP
T1
NOP
T2
NOP
T3
WRITE
Bank,
Col n
DQ
DQS, DQS#
READ
Bank a,
Col n
Address
T0
Command
CK
CK#
T4
Notes:
NOP
T1
tRTP
tRAS
NOP
T2
NOP
T5
DO
n
DO
n+ 1
NOP
T7
DO
n+3
tRPST
WL = 5
DO
n+ 2
NOP
T6
NOP
T8
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T9
DI
n+ 1
DI
n+2
NOP
T10
= 4 clocks
DI
n+ 3
tWPST
tBL
NOP
T11
NOP
T12
tWR
tWTR
NOP
T14
Transitioning Data
NOP
T13
Don’t Care
NOP
T15
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
Bank a,
(or all)
PRE
T5
NOP
T6
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
DO
n
DO
n+1
tRP
DO
n+2
NOP
T9
DO
n+3
DO
n+4
NOP
T10
DO
n+5
DO
n+6
NOP
T11
DO
n+7
NOP
T12
Bank a,
Row b
ACT
T13
NOP
T14
NOP
T15
Transitioning Data
NOP
T16
Don’t Care
NOP
T17
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. The BC4 OTF setting is activated by MR0[1:0] and A12 = 0 during READ command at T0 and WRITE command at
T4.
3. DO n = data-out from column n; DI n = data-in from column b.
4. BC4, RL = 5 (AL - 0, CL = 5), WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
RL = 5
tRPRE
Bank,
Col b
READ-to-WRITE command delay = RL + tCCD/2 + 2tCK - WL
READ
T0
Figure 75: READ to PRECHARGE (BL8)
DQ3
DQS, DQS#
Address2
Command1
CK
CK#
Figure 74: READ (BC4) to WRITE (BC4) OTF
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
NOP
T1
tRTP
tRAS
NOP
T2
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
Bank a,
(or all)
PRE
T5
NOP
T6
Address
168
NOP
T1
NOP
T2
AL = 5
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
tRAS
NOP
T5
NOP
T6
DQ
DQS, DQS#
READ
Bank a,
Col n
Address
T0
Command
CK
CK#
NOP
T1
AL = 4
NOP
T2
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
NOP
T5
tRTP
tRAS
(MIN)
NOP
T6
T7
NOP
Figure 78: READ with Auto Precharge (AL = 4, CL = 6)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
READ
Bank a,
Col n
T0
Command
CK
CK#
Figure 77: READ to PRECHARGE (AL = 5, CL = 6)
DQ
DQS, DQS#
READ
Bank a,
Col n
Address
T0
Command
CK
CK#
Figure 76: READ to PRECHARGE (BC4)
(MIN)
DO
n
CL = 6
NOP
T7
tRTP
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
T8
T10
NOP
T9
Bank a,
(or all)
PRE
T9
NOP
DO
n+3
CL = 6
DO
n+2
NOP
T8
NOP
DO
n+1
tRP
NOP
T9
NOP
T10
NOP
T10
NOP
T11
DO
n
T11
NOP
DO
n
DO
n+2
T11
NOP
DO
n+1
NOP
T12
DO
n+3
DO
n+1
Bank a,
Row b
ACT
T13
DO
n+2
DO
n+3
NOP
T13
NOP
T13
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
T12
tRP
NOP
T12
NOP
T14
tRP
NOP
Transitioning Data
NOP
T14
Transitioning Data
NOP
T16
Transitioning Data
NOP
T15
Don’t Care
Bank a,
Row b
ACT
Ta0
Don’t Care
Bank a,
Row b
ACT
T15
Don’t Care
NOP
T17
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
DQS to DQ output timing is shown in Figure 79 (page 170). The DQ transitions between
valid data outputs must be within tDQSQ of the crossing point of DQS, DQS#. DQS must
also maintain a minimum HIGH and LOW time of tQSH and tQSL. Prior to the READ
preamble, the DQ balls will either be floating or terminated, depending on the status of
the ODT signal.
Figure 80 (page 171) shows the strobe-to-clock timing during a READ. The crossing
point DQS, DQS# must transition within ±tDQSCK of the clock crossing point. The data
out has no timing relationship to CK, only to DQS, as shown in Figure 80 (page 171).
Figure 80 (page 171) also shows the READ preamble and postamble. Typically, both
DQS and DQS# are High-Z to save power (VDDQ). Prior to data output from the DRAM,
DQS is driven LOW and DQS# is HIGH for tRPRE. This is known as the READ preamble.
The READ postamble, tRPST, is one half clock from the last DQS, DQS# transition. During the READ postamble, DQS is driven LOW and DQS# is HIGH. When complete, the
DQ is disabled or continues terminating, depending on the state of the ODT signal. Figure 83 (page 173) demonstrates how to measure tRPST.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
169
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
All DQ collectively
DQ3 (first data no longer valid)
DQ3 (last data valid)
Notes:
Bank,
Col n
Address2
DQS, DQS#
READ
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
NOP
T2
RL = AL + CL
NOP
T3
(MAX)
(MIN)
tRPRE
tLZDQ
tDQSQ
NOP
T4
NOP
T6
tDQSQ
(MAX)
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
tRPST
NOP
T9
DO
n+1
DO
n+2
Data valid
DO
n+3
DO
n+4
DO
n+5
DO
n+6
DO
n+7
tQH
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
n+1
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
n+3
n+1
n+2
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
Data valid
DO
n
DO
n
tQH
DO
n
NOP
T5
tHZDQ
Don’t Care
(MAX)
NOP
T10
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. The BL8 setting is activated by either MR0[1, 0] = 0, 0 or MR0[0, 1] = 0, 1 and A12 = 1 during READ command at
T0.
3. DO n = data-out from column n.
4. BL8, RL = 5 (AL = 0, CL = 5).
5. Output timings are referenced to VDDQ/2 and DLL on and locked.
6. tDQSQ defines the skew between DQS, DQS# to data and does not define DQS, DQS# to CK.
7. Early data transitions may not always happen at the same DQ. Data transitions of a DQ can be early or late within
a burst.
NOP
T1
Figure 79: Data Output Timing – tDQSQ and Data Valid Window
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
170
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
tHZ
and tLZ transitions occur in the same access time as valid data transitions. These
parameters are referenced to a specific voltage level that specifies when the device output is no longer driving tHZDQS and tHZDQ, or begins driving tLZDQS, tLZDQ. Figure
81 (page 172) shows a method of calculating the point when the device is no longer
driving tHZDQS and tHZDQ, or begins driving tLZDQS, tLZDQ, by measuring the signal
at two different voltages. The actual voltage measurement points are not critical as long
as the calculation is consistent. The parameters tLZDQS, tLZDQ, tHZDQS, and tHZDQ
are defined as single-ended.
Figure 80: Data Strobe Timing – READs
RL measured
to this point
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
CK
CK#
tDQSCK
tLZDQS
tDQSCK
(MIN)
(MIN)
tQSH
tDQSCK
(MIN)
tQSL
tQSH
tDQSCK
(MIN)
tHZDQS
(MIN)
(MIN)
tQSL
DQS, DQS#
early strobe
tRPST
tRPRE
Bit 0
tLZDQS
Bit 1
tDQSCK
(MAX)
Bit 2
Bit 3
tDQSCK
(MAX)
Bit 4
Bit 5
tDQSCK
(MAX)
Bit 6
Bit 7
tDQSCK
(MAX)
tHZDQS
(MAX)
(MAX)
tRPST
DQS, DQS#
late strobe
tRPRE
tQSH
Bit 0
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
tQSL
Bit 1
tQSH
Bit 2
171
tQSL
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Figure 81: Method for Calculating tLZ and tHZ
VOH - xmV
VTT + 2xmV
VOH - 2xmV
VTT + xmV
tLZDQS, tLZDQ
tHZDQS, tHZDQ
T2
T1
tHZDQS, tHZDQ
VOL + 2xmV
VTT - xmV
VOL + xmV
VTT - 2xmV
T1
T2
tLZDQS, tLZDQ
end point = 2 × T1 - T2
begin point = 2 × T1 - T2
1. Within a burst, the rising strobe edge is not necessarily fixed at tDQSCK (MIN) or tDQSCK
(MAX). Instead, the rising strobe edge can vary between tDQSCK (MIN) and tDQSCK
(MAX).
2. The DQS HIGH pulse width is defined by tQSH, and the DQS LOW pulse width is defined
by tQSL. Likewise, tLZDQS (MIN) and tHZDQS (MIN) are not tied to tDQSCK (MIN) (early
strobe case), and tLZDQS (MAX) and tHZDQS (MAX) are not tied to tDQSCK (MAX) (late
strobe case); however, they tend to track one another.
3. The minimum pulse width of the READ preamble is defined by tRPRE (MIN). The minimum pulse width of the READ postamble is defined by tRPST (MIN).
Notes:
Figure 82: tRPRE Timing
CK
VTT
CK#
tA
tB
DQS
VTT
Single-ended signal provided
as background information
tC
tD
VTT
DQS#
Single-ended signal provided
as background information
T1
begins
tRPRE
DQS - DQS#
tRPRE
T2
ends
Resulting differential
signal relevant for
tRPRE specification
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
0V
tRPRE
172
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
READ Operation
Figure 83: tRPST Timing
CK
VTT
CK#
tA
DQS
Single-ended signal, provided
as background information
t
VTT
B
tC
tD
DQS#
VTT
Single-ended signal, provided
as background information
tRPST
DQS - DQS#
Resulting differential
signal relevant for
tRPST specification
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
T1
begins
tRPST
0V
T2
ends
tRPST
173
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
WRITE Operation
WRITE bursts are initiated with a WRITE command. The starting column and bank addresses are provided with the WRITE command, and auto precharge is either enabled or
disabled for that access. If auto precharge is selected, the row being accessed is precharged at the end of the WRITE burst. If auto precharge is not selected, the row will
remain open for subsequent accesses. After a WRITE command has been issued, the
WRITE burst may not be interrupted. For the generic WRITE commands used in Figure
86 (page 176) through Figure 94 (page 181), auto precharge is disabled.
During WRITE bursts, the first valid data-in element is registered on a rising edge of
DQS following the WRITE latency (WL) clocks later and subsequent data elements will
be registered on successive edges of DQS. WRITE latency (WL) is defined as the sum of
posted CAS additive latency (AL) and CAS WRITE latency (CWL): WL = AL + CWL. The
values of AL and CWL are programmed in the MR0 and MR2 registers, respectively. Prior
to the first valid DQS edge, a full cycle is needed (including a dummy crossover of DQS,
DQS#) and specified as the WRITE preamble shown in Figure 86 (page 176). The half
cycle on DQS following the last data-in element is known as the WRITE postamble.
The time between the WRITE command and the first valid edge of DQS is WL clocks
±tDQSS. Figure 87 (page 177) through Figure 94 (page 181) show the nominal case
where tDQSS = 0ns; however, Figure 86 (page 176) includes tDQSS (MIN) and tDQSS
(MAX) cases.
Data may be masked from completing a WRITE using data mask. The data mask occurs
on the DM ball aligned to the WRITE data. If DM is LOW, the WRITE completes normally. If DM is HIGH, that bit of data is masked.
Upon completion of a burst, assuming no other commands have been initiated, the DQ
will remain High-Z, and any additional input data will be ignored.
Data for any WRITE burst may be concatenated with a subsequent WRITE command to
provide a continuous flow of input data. The new WRITE command can be tCCD clocks
following the previous WRITE command. The first data element from the new burst is
applied after the last element of a completed burst. Figure 87 (page 177) and Figure 88
(page 177) show concatenated bursts. An example of nonconsecutive WRITEs is shown
in Figure 89 (page 178).
Data for any WRITE burst may be followed by a subsequent READ command after tWTR
has been met (see Figure 90 (page 178), Figure 91 (page 179), and Figure 92 (page
180)).
Data for any WRITE burst may be followed by a subsequent PRECHARGE command,
providing tWR has been met, as shown in Figure 93 (page 181) and Figure 94 (page
181).
Both tWTR and tWR starting time may vary, depending on the mode register settings
(fixed BC4, BL8 versus OTF).
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
174
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Figure 84: tWPRE Timing
CK
VTT
CK#
T1
begins
tWPRE
DQS - DQS#
0V
tWPRE
T2
Resulting differential
signal relevant for
tWPRE specification
tWPRE
ends
Figure 85: tWPST Timing
CK
VTT
CK#
tWPST
DQS - DQS#
Resulting differential
signal relevant for
tWPST specification
0V
T1
begins
tWPST
T2
ends
tWPST
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
175
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Figure 86: WRITE Burst
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
Command1
WRITE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Address2
Bank,
Col n
CK#
CK
WL = AL + CWL
tDQSS
tWPRE
(MIN)
tDQSS tDSH
tDSH
tDSH
tDSH tWPST
DQS, DQS#
tDQSH
tDQSL
tDQSH
DI
n
DQ3
tDQSS
DI
n+1
tWPRE
(NOM)
tDQSL
tDQSH
DI
n+2
tDQSL
DI
n+3
tDSH
tDQSH
DI
n+4
tDQSL
DI
n+5
tDSH
tDQSH
DI
n+6
tDQSL
DI
n+7
tDSH
tDSH
tWPST
tDQSH
tDQSL
DQS, DQS#
tDQSH
tDQSL
tDQSH
tDSS
tDQSH
tDSS
DI
n
DQ3
tDQSL
DI
n+1
tDQSL
tDQSH
tDQSL
tDSS
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
tDSS
DI
n+4
DI
n+5
tDSS
DI
n+6
DI
n+7
tDQSS
tDQSS
tWPRE
(MAX)
tWPST
DQS, DQS#
tDQSH
tDQSL
tDQSH
tDSS
DI
n
DQ3
tDQSL
tDQSH
tDSS
DI
n+1
tDQSL
tDQSH
tDSS
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
tDQSL
tDQSH
tDSS
DI
n+4
DI
n+5
tDQSL
tDSS
DI
n+6
DI
n+7
Transitioning Data
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at
these times.
2. The BL8 setting is activated by either MR0[1:0] = 00 or MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 1 during
the WRITE command at T0.
3. DI n = data-in for column n.
4. BL8, WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
5. tDQSS must be met at each rising clock edge.
6. tWPST is usually depicted as ending at the crossing of DQS, DQS#; however, tWPST actually ends when DQS no longer drives LOW and DQS# no longer drives HIGH.
176
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Valid
Address2
NOP
T1
Notes:
tCCD
NOP
T2
Valid
WRITE
T4
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T5
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
NOP
T6
177
Valid
Address2
DQ3
DQS, DQS#
WRITE
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
NOP
T1
Notes:
tCCD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NOP
T2
WL = 5
DI
n+3
DI
n+4
NOP
T7
DI
n+5
DI
n+6
NOP
T8
DI
n+7
DI
b
NOP
T9
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
NOP
T10
tBL
DI
b+3
DI
b+4
= 4 clocks
NOP
T11
DI
b+5
DI
b+6
NOP
T12
Transitioning Data
DI
b+7
tWPST
NOP
T13
NOP
Don’t Care
tWTR
tWR
T14
Valid
WRITE
T4
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T5
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
NOP
T6
WL = 5
DI
n+3
tWPST
NOP
NOP
T8
tWPRE
DI
b
NOP
T9
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
NOP
T10
DI
b+3
tWPST
tBL
= 4 clocks
NOP
T11
NOP
T12
Transitioning Data
NOP
T13
NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
BC4, WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
DI n (or b) = data-in for column n (or column b).
The BC4 setting is activated by MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 0 during the WRITE command at T0 and T4.
If set via MRS (fixed) tWR and tWTR would start T11 (2 cycles earlier).
WL = 5
NOP
T3
T7
NOP
Don’t Care
tWTR
tWR
T14
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. The BL8 setting is activated by either MR0[1:0] = 00 or MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 1 during the WRITE commands at
T0 and T4.
3. DI n (or b) = data-in for column n (or column b).
4. BL8, WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
WL = 5
NOP
T3
Figure 88: Consecutive WRITE (BC4) to WRITE (BC4) via OTF
DQ3
DQS, DQS#
WRITE
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
Figure 87: Consecutive WRITE (BL8) to WRITE (BL8)
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Valid
NOP
T1
Notes:
NOP
T2
NOP
T4
1.
2.
3.
4.
178
DQ4
DQS, DQS#
Address3
Command1
CK
CK#
Valid
WRITE
T0
Notes:
NOP
T1
Valid
WRITE
T5
NOP
T6
DI
n
NOP
T7
DI
n+1
NOP
T9
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
DI
n+4
WL = CWL + AL = 7
NOP
T8
DI
n+5
DI
n+6
NOP
T10
DI
n+7
NOP
T11
DI
b
NOP
T12
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
NOP
T13
DI
b+3
DI
b+4
NOP
T14
DI
b+5
WL = 5
NOP
T3
NOP
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T5
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
NOP
T6
DI
n+3
DI
n+4
NOP
T7
DI
n+5
DI
n+6
NOP
T8
DI
n+7
tWPST
NOP
T10
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
T9
NOP
T11
Transitioning Data
tWTR2
DI
b+7
NOP
T16
Transitioning Data
DI
b+6
NOP
T15
Don’t Care
Valid
READ
Ta0
Don't Care
NOP
T17
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. tWTR controls the WRITE-to-READ delay to the same device and starts with the first rising clock edge after the last
write data shown at T9.
3. The BL8 setting is activated by either MR0[1:0] = 00 or MR0[1:0] = 01 and MR0[12] = 1 during the WRITE command
at T0. The READ command at Ta0 can be either BC4 or BL8, depending on MR0[1:0] and the A12 status at Ta0.
4. DI n = data-in for column n.
5. RL = 5 (AL = 0, CL = 5), WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
NOP
T2
T4
DI n (or b) = data-in for column n (or column b).
Seven subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following DO n.
Each WRITE command may be to any bank.
Shown for WL = 7 (CWL = 7, AL = 0).
WL = CWL + AL = 7
NOP
T3
Figure 90: WRITE (BL8) to READ (BL8)
DM
DQ
DQS, DQS#
WRITE
Address
T0
Command
CK
CK#
Figure 89: Nonconsecutive WRITE to WRITE
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Valid
Address3
DQ4
DQS, DQS#
WRITE
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
Notes:
NOP
T1
WL = 5
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T5
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
NOP
T6
DI
n+3
tWPST
NOP
T7
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
T8
Transitioning Data
tWTR2
NOP
T9
Don’t Care
Valid
READ
Ta0
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. tWTR controls the WRITE-to-READ delay to the same device and starts with the first rising clock edge after the last
write data shown at T7.
3. The fixed BC4 setting is activated by MR0[1:0] = 10 during the WRITE command at T0 and the READ command at
Ta0.
4. DI n = data-in for column n.
5. BC4 (fixed), WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5), RL = 5 (AL = 0, CL = 5).
NOP
T2
Figure 91: WRITE to READ (BC4 Mode Register Setting)
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
179
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Valid
Address3
DQ4
DQS, DQS#
WRITE
T0
Command1
CK
CK#
Notes:
NOP
T1
WL = 5
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
tWPRE
DI
n
NOP
T5
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
NOP
T6
NOP
= 4 clocks
DI
n+3
tWPST
tBL
T7
NOP
T8
NOP
T9
Indicates break
in time scale
tWTR2
NOP
T10
Transitioning Data
NOP
T11
RL = 5
Don’t Care
Valid
READ
Tn
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at these times.
2. tWTR controls the WRITE-to-READ delay to the same device and starts after tBL.
3. The BC4 OTF setting is activated by MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 0 during the WRITE command at T0 and the READ
command at Tn.
4. DI n = data-in for column n.
5. BC4, RL = 5 (AL = 0, CL = 5), WL = 5 (AL = 0, CWL = 5).
NOP
T2
Figure 92: WRITE (BC4 OTF) to READ (BC4 OTF)
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
180
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Figure 93: WRITE (BL8) to PRECHARGE
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
Ta0
Ta1
Command
WRITE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
PRE
Address
Valid
CK#
CK
Valid
tWR
WL = AL + CWL
DQS, DQS#
DI
n
DQ BL8
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
DI
n+4
DI
n+5
DI
n+6
DI
n+7
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
1. DI n = data-in from column n.
2. Seven subsequent elements of data-in are applied in the programmed order following
DO n.
3. Shown for WL = 7 (AL = 0, CWL = 7).
Figure 94: WRITE (BC4 Mode Register Setting) to PRECHARGE
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
Ta0
Ta1
Command
WRITE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
PRE
Address
Valid
CK#
CK
Valid
tWR
WL = AL + CWL
DQS, DQS#
DI
n
DQ BC4
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at
these times.
2. The write recovery time (tWR) is referenced from the first rising clock edge after the last
write data is shown at T7. tWR specifies the last burst WRITE cycle until the PRECHARGE
command can be issued to the same bank.
3. The fixed BC4 setting is activated by MR0[1:0] = 10 during the WRITE command at T0.
4. DI n = data-in for column n.
5. BC4 (fixed), WL = 5, RL = 5.
181
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Figure 95: WRITE (BC4 OTF) to PRECHARGE
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
WRITE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Tn
CK#
CK
Command1
PRE
tWR2
Address3
Bank,
Col n
Valid
tWPRE
tWPST
DQS, DQS#
DI
n
DQ4
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
WL = 5
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
1. NOP commands are shown for ease of illustration; other commands may be valid at
these times.
2. The write recovery time (tWR) is referenced from the rising clock edge at T9. tWR specifies the last burst WRITE cycle until the PRECHARGE command can be issued to the same
bank.
3. The BC4 setting is activated by MR0[1:0] = 01 and A12 = 0 during the WRITE command
at T0.
4. DI n = data-in for column n.
5. BC4 (OTF), WL = 5, RL = 5.
DQ Input Timing
Figure 86 (page 176) shows the strobe-to-clock timing during a WRITE burst. DQS,
DQS# must transition within 0.25tCK of the clock transitions, as limited by tDQSS. All
data and data mask setup and hold timings are measured relative to the DQS, DQS#
crossing, not the clock crossing.
The WRITE preamble and postamble are also shown in Figure 86 (page 176). One clock
prior to data input to the DRAM, DQS must be HIGH and DQS# must be LOW. Then for
a half clock, DQS is driven LOW (DQS# is driven HIGH) during the WRITE preamble,
tWPRE. Likewise, DQS must be kept LOW by the controller after the last data is written
to the DRAM during the WRITE postamble, tWPST.
Data setup and hold times are also shown in Figure 86 (page 176). All setup and hold
times are measured from the crossing points of DQS and DQS#. These setup and hold
values pertain to data input and data mask input.
Additionally, the half period of the data input strobe is specified by tDQSH and tDQSL.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
182
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
WRITE Operation
Figure 96: Data Input Timing
DQS, DQS#
tWPRE
DQ
tDQSH
tWPST
tDQSL
DI
b
DM
tDS
tDH
tDS
tDH
Transitioning Data
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
183
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
PRECHARGE Operation
PRECHARGE Operation
Input A10 determines whether one bank or all banks are to be precharged and, in the
case where only one bank is to be precharged, inputs BA[2:0] select the bank.
When all banks are to be precharged, inputs BA[2:0] are treated as “Don’t Care.” After a
bank is precharged, it is in the idle state and must be activated prior to any READ or
WRITE commands being issued.
SELF REFRESH Operation
The SELF REFRESH operation is initiated like a REFRESH command except CKE is LOW.
The DLL is automatically disabled upon entering SELF REFRESH and is automatically
enabled and reset upon exiting SELF REFRESH.
All power supply inputs (including V REFCA and V REFDQ) must be maintained at valid levels upon entry/exit and during self refresh mode operation. V REFDQ may float or not
drive V DDQ/2 while in self refresh mode under certain conditions:
•
•
•
•
VSS < V REFDQ < V DD is maintained.
VREFDQ is valid and stable prior to CKE going back HIGH.
The first WRITE operation may not occur earlier than 512 clocks after V REFDQ is valid.
All other self refresh mode exit timing requirements are met.
The DRAM must be idle with all banks in the precharge state (tRP is satisfied and no
bursts are in progress) before a self refresh entry command can be issued. ODT must
also be turned off before self refresh entry by registering the ODT ball LOW prior to the
self refresh entry command (see On-Die Termination (ODT) ( for timing requirements).
If RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are disabled in the mode registers, ODT can be a “Don’t Care.”
After the self refresh entry command is registered, CKE must be held LOW to keep the
DRAM in self refresh mode.
After the DRAM has entered self refresh mode, all external control signals, except CKE
and RESET#, are “Don’t Care.” The DRAM initiates a minimum of one REFRESH command internally within the tCKE period when it enters self refresh mode.
The requirements for entering and exiting self refresh mode depend on the state of the
clock during self refresh mode. First and foremost, the clock must be stable (meeting
tCK specifications) when self refresh mode is entered. If the clock remains stable and
the frequency is not altered while in self refresh mode, then the DRAM is allowed to exit
self refresh mode after tCKESR is satisfied (CKE is allowed to transition HIGH tCKESR
later than when CKE was registered LOW). Since the clock remains stable in self refresh
mode (no frequency change), tCKSRE and tCKSRX are not required. However, if the
clock is altered during self refresh mode (if it is turned-off or its frequency changes),
then tCKSRE and tCKSRX must be satisfied. When entering self refresh mode, tCKSRE
must be satisfied prior to altering the clock's frequency. Prior to exiting self refresh
mode, tCKSRX must be satisfied prior to registering CKE HIGH.
When CKE is HIGH during self refresh exit, NOP or DES must be issued for tXS time. tXS
is required for the completion of any internal refresh already in progress and must be
satisfied before a valid command not requiring a locked DLL can be issued to the device. tXS is also the earliest time self refresh re-entry may occur. Before a command requiring a locked DLL can be applied, a ZQCL command must be issued, tZQOPER timing must be met, and tXSDLL must be satisfied. ODT must be off during tXSDLL.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
184
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
SELF REFRESH Operation
Figure 97: Self Refresh Entry/Exit Timing
T0
T1
T2
Ta0
Tb0
Tc0
Tc1
Td0
Te0
Tf0
Valid
Valid
CK#
CK
tCKSRX1
tCKSRE1
tIS
tIH
tCPDED
tIS
CKE
tCKESR
(MIN)1
tIS
ODT2
Valid
ODTL
RESET#2
Command
NOP
SRE (REF)3
NOP4
SRX (NOP)
NOP5
Address
tRP8
Valid 6
Valid 7
Valid
Valid
tXS6, 9
tXSDLL7, 9
Enter self refresh mode
(synchronous)
Exit self refresh mode
(asynchronous)
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. The clock must be valid and stable, meeting tCK specifications at least tCKSRE after entering self refresh mode, and at least tCKSRX prior to exiting self refresh mode, if the
clock is stopped or altered between states Ta0 and Tb0. If the clock remains valid and
unchanged from entry and during self refresh mode, then tCKSRE and tCKSRX do not
apply; however, tCKESR must be satisfied prior to exiting at SRX.
2. ODT must be disabled and RTT off prior to entering self refresh at state T1. If both
RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are disabled in the mode registers, ODT can be a “Don’t Care.”
3. Self refresh entry (SRE) is synchronous via a REFRESH command with CKE LOW.
4. A NOP or DES command is required at T2 after the SRE command is issued prior to the
inputs becoming “Don’t Care.”
5. NOP or DES commands are required prior to exiting self refresh mode until state Te0.
6. tXS is required before any commands not requiring a locked DLL.
7. tXSDLL is required before any commands requiring a locked DLL.
8. The device must be in the all banks idle state prior to entering self refresh mode. For
example, all banks must be precharged, tRP must be met, and no data bursts can be in
progress.
9. Self refresh exit is asynchronous; however, tXS and tXSDLL timings start at the first rising
clock edge where CKE HIGH satisfies tISXR at Tc1. tCKSRX timing is also measured so that
tISXR is satisfied at Tc1.
185
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Extended Temperature Usage
Extended Temperature Usage
Micron’s DDR3 SDRAM support the optional extended case temperature (TC) range of
0°C to 95°C. Thus, the SRT and ASR options must be used at a minimum.
The extended temperature range DRAM must be refreshed externally at 2x (double refresh) anytime the case temperature is above 85°C (and does not exceed 95°C). The external refresh requirement is accomplished by reducing the refresh period from 64ms to
32ms. However, self refresh mode requires either ASR or SRT to support the extended
temperature. Thus, either ASR or SRT must be enabled when T C is above 85°C or self
refresh cannot be used until T C is at or below 85°C. Table 79 summarizes the two extended temperature options and Table 80 summarizes how the two extended temperature
options relate to one another.
Table 79: Self Refresh Temperature and Auto Self Refresh Description
Field
MR2 Bits
Description
Self Refresh Temperature (SRT)
SRT
7
If ASR is disabled (MR2[6] = 0), SRT must be programmed to indicate TOPER during self refresh:
*MR2[7] = 0: Normal operating temperature range (0°C to 85°C)
*MR2[7] = 1: Extended operating temperature range (0°C to 95°C)
If ASR is enabled (MR2[7] = 1), SRT must be set to 0, even if the extended temperature range is
supported
*MR2[7] = 0: SRT is disabled
Auto Self Refresh (ASR)
ASR
6
When ASR is enabled, the DRAM automatically provides SELF REFRESH power management functions, (refresh rate for all supported operating temperature values)
* MR2[6] = 1: ASR is enabled (M7 must = 0)
When ASR is not enabled, the SRT bit must be programmed to indicate TOPER during SELF REFRESH
operation
* MR2[6] = 0: ASR is disabled; must use manual self refresh temperature (SRT)
Table 80: Self Refresh Mode Summary
MR2[6] MR2[7]
(ASR)
(SRT) SELF REFRESH Operation
Permitted Operating Temperature
Range for Self Refresh Mode
0
0
Self refresh mode is supported in the normal temperature
range
0
1
Self refresh mode is supported in normal and extended temper- Normal and extended (0°C to 95°C)
ature ranges; When SRT is enabled, it increases self refresh
power consumption
1
0
Self refresh mode is supported in normal and extended temper- Normal and extended (0°C to 95°C)
ature ranges; Self refresh power consumption may be temperature-dependent
1
1
Illegal
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
186
Normal (0°C to 85°C)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Power-Down Mode
Power-down is synchronously entered when CKE is registered LOW coincident with a
NOP or DES command. CKE is not allowed to go LOW while an MRS, MPR, ZQCAL,
READ, or WRITE operation is in progress. CKE is allowed to go LOW while any of the
other legal operations (such as ROW ACTIVATION, PRECHARGE, auto precharge, or REFRESH) are in progress. However, the power-down IDD specifications are not applicable
until such operations have completed. Depending on the previous DRAM state and the
command issued prior to CKE going LOW, certain timing constraints must be satisfied
(as noted in Table 81). Timing diagrams detailing the different power-down mode entry
and exits are shown in Figure 98 (page 189) through Figure 107 (page 193).
Table 81: Command to Power-Down Entry Parameters
DRAM Status
Last Command Prior to
CKE LOW1
Parameter (Min)
Parameter Value
Figure
Idle or active
ACTIVATE
tACTPDEN
1tCK
Figure 105 (page 192)
Idle or active
PRECHARGE
tPRPDEN
1tCK
READ or READAP
tRDPDEN
Active
WRITE: BL8OTF, BL8MRS,
BC4OTF
tWRPDEN
Active
WRITE: BC4MRS
Active
Active
WRITEAP: BL8OTF, BL8MRS,
BC4OTF
Active
WRITEAP: BC4MRS
tWRAPDEN
Figure 106 (page 193)
1tCK
Figure 101 (page 190)
tWR/tCK
Figure 102 (page 191)
WL + 2tCK + tWR/tCK
Figure 102 (page 191)
RL +
WL +
4tCK
4tCK
+
1tCK
Figure 103 (page 191)
WL + 2tCK + WR + 1tCK
Figure 103 (page 191)
WL +
4tCK
+
+ WR +
Idle
REFRESH
tREFPDEN
Power-down
REFRESH
tXPDLL
Greater of 10tCK or 24ns
Figure 108 (page 194)
Idle
MODE REGISTER SET
tMRSPDEN
tMOD
Figure 107 (page 193)
Note:
1tCK
Figure 104 (page 192)
1. If slow-exit mode precharge power-down is enabled and entered, ODT becomes asynchronous tANPD prior to CKE going LOW and remains asynchronous until tANPD +
tXPDLL after CKE goes HIGH.
Entering power-down disables the input and output buffers, excluding CK, CK#, ODT,
CKE, and RESET#. NOP or DES commands are required until tCPDED has been satisfied, at which time all specified input/output buffers are disabled. The DLL should be in
a locked state when power-down is entered for the fastest power-down exit timing. If
the DLL is not locked during power-down entry, the DLL must be reset after exiting
power-down mode for proper READ operation as well as synchronous ODT operation.
During power-down entry, if any bank remains open after all in-progress commands are
complete, the DRAM will be in active power-down mode. If all banks are closed after all
in-progress commands are complete, the DRAM will be in precharge power-down
mode. Precharge power-down mode must be programmed to exit with either a slow exit
mode or a fast exit mode. When entering precharge power-down mode, the DLL is
turned off in slow exit mode or kept on in fast exit mode.
The DLL also remains on when entering active power-down. ODT has special timing
constraints when slow exit mode precharge power-down is enabled and entered. Refer
to Asynchronous ODT Mode (page 211) for detailed ODT usage requirements in slow
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
187
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
exit mode precharge power-down. A summary of the two power-down modes is listed in
Table 82 (page 188).
While in either power-down state, CKE is held LOW, RESET# is held HIGH, and a stable
clock signal must be maintained. ODT must be in a valid state but all other input signals
are “Don’t Care.” If RESET# goes LOW during power-down, the DRAM will switch out of
power-down mode and go into the reset state. After CKE is registered LOW, CKE must
remain LOW until tPD (MIN) has been satisfied. The maximum time allowed for powerdown duration is tPD (MAX) (9 × tREFI).
The power-down states are synchronously exited when CKE is registered HIGH (with a
required NOP or DES command). CKE must be maintained HIGH until tCKE has been
satisfied. A valid, executable command may be applied after power-down exit latency,
tXP, and tXPDLL have been satisfied. A summary of the power-down modes is listed below.
For specific CKE-intensive operations, such as repeating a power-down-exit-to-refreshto-power-down-entry sequence, the number of clock cycles between power-down exit
and power-down entry may not be sufficient to keep the DLL properly updated. In addition to meeting tPD when the REFRESH command is used between power-down exit
and power-down entry, two other conditions must be met. First, tXP must be satisfied
before issuing the REFRESH command. Second, tXPDLL must be satisfied before the
next power-down may be entered. An example is shown in Figure 108 (page 194).
Table 82: Power-Down Modes
MR0[12]
DLL State
PowerDown Exit
Active (any bank open)
“Don’t Care”
On
Fast
tXP
to any other valid command
Precharged
(all banks precharged)
1
On
Fast
tXP
to any other valid command
Slow
tXPDLL
DRAM State
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
0
Off
188
Relevant Parameters
to commands that require the DLL to be
locked (READ, RDAP, or ODT on);
tXP to any other valid command
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Figure 98: Active Power-Down Entry and Exit
T0
T1
T2
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
NOP
NOP
NOP
Valid
CK#
CK
Command
tCK
tCH
tCL
NOP
Valid
NOP
tPD
tIS
CKE
Address
tIH
tIH
tCKE
tIS
(MIN)
Valid
Valid
tXP
tCPDED
Enter power-down
mode
Exit power-down
mode
Indicates break
in time scale
Don’t Care
Figure 99: Precharge Power-Down (Fast-Exit Mode) Entry and Exit
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
NOP
NOP
Ta0
Ta1
NOP
Valid
CK#
CK
t
t
CK
t
CH
Command
NOP
CL
NOP
t
t
CPDED
t
t
IS
CKE (MIN)
IH
CKE
t
IS
t
t
PD
Enter power-down
mode
XP
Exit power-down
mode
Indicates break
in time scale
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
189
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Figure 100: Precharge Power-Down (Slow-Exit Mode) Entry and Exit
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
Ta
NOP
NOP
Ta1
Tb
CK#
CK
tCK
Command
tCH
tCL
NOP
PRE
NOP
tCKE
tCPDED
Valid 1
Valid 2
(MIN)
tXP
tIH
tIS
CKE
tXPDLL
tIS
tPD
Enter power-down
mode
Exit power-down
mode
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
Don’t Care
1. Any valid command not requiring a locked DLL.
2. Any valid command requiring a locked DLL.
Figure 101: Power-Down Entry After READ or READ with Auto Precharge (RDAP)
CK#
T0
T1
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
Ta5
Ta6
READ/
RDAP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Ta7
Ta8
Ta9
Ta10
Ta11
Ta12
CK
Command
NOP
tIS
NOP
tCPDED
CKE
Address
Valid
tPD
RL = AL + CL
DQS, DQS#
DQ BL8
DQ BC4
DI
n
DI
DI
n+1 n+2
DI
n
DI
n+1
DI
n+3
DI
n+4
DI
n+ 5
DI
n+6
DI
n+7
DI
DI
n+2 n+3
tRDPDEN
Power-down or
self refresh entry
Indicates break
in time scale
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
190
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Figure 102: Power-Down Entry After WRITE
CK#
T0
T1
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
Ta5
Ta6
Ta7
Tb0
WRITE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Tb1
Tb2
Tb3
Tb4
CK
Command
NOP
tIS
NOP
tCPDED
CKE
Address
Valid
tWR
WL = AL + CWL
tPD
DQS, DQS#
DQ BL8
DI
n
DI
DI
n+1 n+2
DI
n+3
DQ BC4
DI
n
DI
n+1
DI
n+3
DI
n+2
DI
n+4
DI
DI
n+5 n+6
DI
n+7
tWRPDEN
Power-down or
self refresh entry1
Indicates break
in time scale
Note:
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
1. CKE can go LOW 2tCK earlier if BC4MRS.
Figure 103: Power-Down Entry After WRITE with Auto Precharge (WRAP)
CK#
T0
T1
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
Ta5
Ta6
Ta7
Tb0
Tb1
Tb2
WRAP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Tb3
Tb4
CK
Command
tIS
tCPDED
CKE
Address
Valid
A10
WR1
WL = AL + CWL
tPD
DQS, DQS#
DQ BL8
DI
n
DI
n+1
DI
DI
DI
n+2 n+3 n+4
DQ BC4
DI
n
DI
n+1
DI
DI
n+2 n+3
DI
n+5
DI
n+6
DI
n+7
tWRAPDEN
Start internal
precharge
Power-down or
self refresh entry2
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Transitioning Data
Don’t Care
1. tWR is programmed through MR0[11:9] and represents tWRmin (ns)/tCK rounded up to
the next integer tCK.
2. CKE can go LOW 2tCK earlier if BC4MRS.
191
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Figure 104: REFRESH to Power-Down Entry
T0
T1
T2
T3
Ta0
NOP
NOP
Ta1
Ta2
Tb0
CK#
CK
tCK
Command
tCH
tCL
REFRESH
NOP
tCPDED
NOP
tCKE
Valid
(MIN)
tPD
tIS
CKE
tREFPDEN
tXP
tRFC
(MIN)
(MIN)1
Indicates break
in time scale
Note:
Don’t Care
1. After CKE goes HIGH during tRFC, CKE must remain HIGH until tRFC is satisfied.
Figure 105: ACTIVATE to Power-Down Entry
T0
T1
T2
T3
NOP
NOP
T4
T5
T6
T7
CK#
CK
Command
Address
tCK
tCH
tCL
ACTIVE
Valid
tCPDED
tIS
tPD
CKE
tACTPDEN
Don’t Care
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
192
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Figure 106: PRECHARGE to Power-Down Entry
T0
T1
T2
T3
NOP
NOP
T4
T5
T6
T7
CK#
CK
tCK
Command
tCH
tCL
PRE
All/single
bank
Address
tCPDED
tIS
tPD
CKE
tPREPDEN
Don’t Care
Figure 107: MRS Command to Power-Down Entry
T0
T1
T2
Ta0
Ta1
Ta2
Ta3
Ta4
CK#
CK
tCK
Command
MRS
Address
Valid
tCH
NOP
tCPDED
tCL
NOP
NOP
NOP
tMRSPDEN
NOP
tPD
tIS
CKE
Indicates break
in time scale
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
193
Don’t Care
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Power-Down Mode
Figure 108: Power-Down Exit to Refresh to Power-Down Entry
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
Ta0
NOP
REFRESH
Ta1
Tb0
CK#
CK
Command
tCK
tCH
NOP
tCL
NOP
NOP
tCPDED
NOP
NOP
tXP1
tIH
tIS
CKE
tIS
tPD
tXPDLL2
Enter power-down
mode
Enter power-down
mode
Exit power-down
mode
Indicates break
in time scale
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. tXP must be satisfied before issuing the command.
2. tXPDLL must be satisfied (referenced to the registration of power-down exit) before the
next power-down can be entered.
194
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
RESET Operation
RESET Operation
The RESET signal (RESET#) is an asynchronous reset signal that triggers any time it
drops LOW, and there are no restrictions about when it can go LOW. After RESET# goes
LOW, it must remain LOW for 100ns. During this time, the outputs are disabled, ODT
(RTT) turns off (High-Z), and the DRAM resets itself. CKE should be driven LOW prior to
RESET# being driven HIGH. After RESET# goes HIGH, the DRAM must be re-initialized
as though a normal power-up was executed. All counters, except refresh counters, on
the DRAM are reset, and data stored in the DRAM is assumed unknown after RESET#
has gone LOW.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
195
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
RESET Operation
Figure 109: RESET Sequence
System RESET
(warm boot)
Stable and
valid clock
T0
T1
tCK
Tc0
Tb0
Ta0
Td0
CK#
CK
tCL
tCL
t CKSRX1
T = 100ns (MIN)
RESET#
tIOZ
= 20ns
T = 10ns (MIN)
tIS
Valid
CKE
tIS
tIS
Static LOW in case RTT_Nom is enabled at time Ta0, otherwise static HIGH or LOW
ODT
Valid
tIS
MRS
MRS
MRS
MRS
Address
Code
Code
Code
Code
A10
Code
Code
Code
Code
BA0 = L
BA1 = H
BA2 = L
BA0 = H
BA1 = H
BA2 = L
BA0 = H
BA1 = L
BA2 = L
BA0 = L
BA1 = L
BA2 = L
Command
NOP
Valid
ZQCL
DM
BA[2:0]
DQS
DQ
RTT
Valid
Valid
A10 = H
Valid
High-Z
High-Z
High-Z
T = 500μs (MIN)
MR2
All voltage
supplies valid
and stable
tMRD
tMRD
tXPR
MR3
DRAM ready
for external
commands
tMRD
MR1 with
DLL ENABLE
tMOD
MR0 with
DLL RESET
ZQCAL
tZQinit
tDLLK
Normal
operation
Indicates break
in time scale
Note:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. The minimum time required is the longer of 10ns or 5 clocks.
196
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
On-Die Termination (ODT)
On-Die Termination (ODT)
On-die termination (ODT) is a feature that enables the DRAM to enable/disable and
turn on/off termination resistance for each DQ, DQS, DQS#, and DM for the x4 and x8
configurations (and TDQS, TDQS# for the x8 configuration, when enabled). ODT is applied to each DQ, UDQS, UDQS#, LDQS, LDQS#, UDM, and LDM signal for the x16 configuration.
ODT is designed to improve signal integrity of the memory channel by enabling the
DRAM controller to independently turn on/off the DRAM’s internal termination resistance for any grouping of DRAM devices. ODT is not supported during DLL disable
mode (simple functional representation shown below). The switch is enabled by the internal ODT control logic, which uses the external ODT ball and other control information.
Figure 110: On-Die Termination
ODT
To other
circuitry
such as
RCV,
...
VDDQ/2
RTT
Switch
DQ, DQS, DQS#,
DM, TDQS, TDQS#
Functional Representation of ODT
The value of RTT (ODT termination resistance value) is determined by the settings of
several mode register bits (see Table 88 (page 202)). The ODT ball is ignored while in
self refresh mode (must be turned off prior to self refresh entry) or if mode registers
MR1 and MR2 are programmed to disable ODT. ODT is comprised of nominal ODT and
dynamic ODT modes and either of these can function in synchronous or asynchronous
mode (when the DLL is off during precharge power-down or when the DLL is synchronizing). Nominal ODT is the base termination and is used in any allowable ODT state.
Dynamic ODT is applied only during writes and provides OTF switching from no RTT or
RTT,nom to RTT(WR).
The actual effective termination, RTT(EFF), may be different from RTT targeted due to
nonlinearity of the termination. For RTT(EFF) values and calculations, see Table 33 (page
60).
Nominal ODT
ODT (NOM) is the base termination resistance for each applicable ball; it is enabled or
disabled via MR1[9, 6, 2] (see Mode Register 1 (MR1) Definition), and it is turned on or
off via the ODT ball.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
197
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
On-Die Termination (ODT)
Table 83: Truth Table – ODT (Nominal)
Note 1 applies to the entire table
MR1[9, 6, 2]
ODT Pin
DRAM Termination State
DRAM State
Notes
000
0
RTT,nom disabled, ODT off
Any valid
2
000
1
RTT,nom disabled, ODT on
Any valid except self refresh, read
3
000–101
0
RTT,nom enabled, ODT off
Any valid
2
000–101
1
RTT,nom enabled, ODT on
Any valid except self refresh, read
3
110 and 111
X
RTT,nom reserved, ODT on or off
Illegal
Notes:
1. Assumes dynamic ODT is disabled (see Dynamic ODT (page 200) when enabled).
2. ODT is enabled and active during most writes for proper termination, but it is not illegal
for it to be off during writes.
3. ODT must be disabled during reads. The RTT,nom value is restricted during writes. Dynamic ODT is applicable if enabled.
Nominal ODT resistance RTT,nom is defined by MR1[9, 6, 2], as shown in Mode Register 1
(MR1) Definition. The R TT,nom termination value applies to the output pins previously
mentioned. DDR3 SDRAM supports multiple RTT,nom values based on RZQ/n where n
can be 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 and RZQ is 240Ω. RTT,nom termination is allowed any time after the
DRAM is initialized, calibrated, and not performing read access, or when it is not in self
refresh mode.
Write accesses use RTT,nom if dynamic ODT (RTT(WR)) is disabled. If RTT,nom is used during writes, only RZQ/2, RZQ/4, and RZQ/6 are allowed (see Table 87 (page 201)). ODT
timings are summarized in Table 84 (page 198), as well as listed in the Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions table.
Examples of nominal ODT timing are shown in conjunction with the synchronous
mode of operation in Synchronous ODT Mode (page 206).
Table 84: ODT Parameters
Symbol
Description
Begins at
Definition for All
DDR3L Speed Bins
Unit
±tAON
CWL + AL - 2
tCK
CWL + AL - 2
tCK
Defined to
ODTLon
ODT synchronous turn-on delay
ODT registered HIGH
RTT(ON)
ODTLoff
ODT synchronous turn-off delay
ODT registered HIGH
RTT(OFF) ±tAOF
tAONPD
ODT asynchronous turn-on delay
ODT registered HIGH
RTT(ON)
2–8.5
ns
tAOFPD
ODT asynchronous turn-off delay
ODT registered HIGH
RTT(OFF)
2–8.5
ns
ODT registered
LOW
4tCK
tCK
ODTH4
ODT minimum HIGH time after ODT ODT registered HIGH
assertion or write (BC4)
or write registration
with ODT HIGH
ODTH8
ODT minimum HIGH time after
write (BL8)
Write registration
with ODT HIGH
ODT registered
LOW
6tCK
tCK
tAON
ODT turn-on relative to ODTLon
completion
Completion of
ODTLon
RTT(ON)
See Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions table
ps
tAOF
ODT turn-off relative to ODTLoff
completion
Completion of
ODTLoff
RTT(OFF)
0.5tCK ± 0.2tCK
tCK
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
198
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
On-Die Termination (ODT)
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
199
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Dynamic ODT
Dynamic ODT
In certain application cases, and to further enhance signal integrity on the data bus, it is
desirable that the termination strength of the DDR3 SDRAM can be changed without
issuing an MRS command, essentially changing the ODT termination on the fly. With
dynamic ODT RTT(WR)) enabled, the DRAM switches from nominal ODT RTT,nom) to dynamic ODT RTT(WR)) when beginning a WRITE burst and subsequently switches back to
nominal ODT RTT,nom) at the completion of the WRITE burst. This requirement is supported by the dynamic ODT feature, as described below.
Dynamic ODT Special Use Case
When DDR3 devices are architect as a single rank memory array, dynamic ODT offers a
special use case: the ODT ball can be wired high (via a current limiting resistor preferred) by having RTT,nom disabled via MR1 and RTT(WR) enabled via MR2. This will allow
the ODT signal not to have to be routed yet the DRAM can provide ODT coverage during write accesses.
When enabling this special use case, some standard ODT spec conditions may be violated: ODT is sometimes suppose to be held low. Such ODT spec violation (ODT not
LOW) is allowed under this special use case. Most notably, if Write Leveling is used, this
would appear to be a problem since RTT(WR) can not be used (should be disabled) and
RTT(NOM) should be used. For Write leveling during this special use case, with the DLL
locked, then RTT(NOM) maybe enabled when entering Write Leveling mode and disabled
when exiting Write Leveling mode. More so, R TT(NOM) must be enabled when enabling
Write Leveling, via same MR1 load, and disabled when disabling Write Leveling, via
same MR1 load if RTT(NOM) is to be used.
ODT will turn-on within a delay of ODTLon + tAON + tMOD + 1CK (enabling via MR1)
or turn-off within a delay of ODTLoff + tAOF + tMOD + 1CK. As seen in the table below,
between the Load Mode of MR1 and the previously specified delay, the value of ODT is
uncertain. this means the DQ ODT termination could turn-on and then turn-off again
during the period of stated uncertainty.
Table 85: Write Leveling with Dynamic ODT Special Case
Begin RTT,nom Uncertainty
MR1 load mode command:
End RTT,nom Uncertainty
ODTLon +
tAON
ODTLoff +
tAOFF
+
tMOD
+
tMOD
+ 1CK
I/Os
RTT,nom Final State
DQS, DQS#
Drive RTT,nom value
DQs
No RTT,nom
DQS, DQS#
No RTT,nom
DQs
No RTT,nom
Enable Write Leveling and RTT(NOM)
MR1 load mode command:
+ 1CK
Disable Write Leveling and RTT(NOM)
Functional Description
The dynamic ODT mode is enabled if either MR2[9] or MR2[10] is set to 1. Dynamic
ODT is not supported during DLL disable mode so RTT(WR) must be disabled. The dynamic ODT function is described below:
• Two RTT values are available—RTT,nom and RTT(WR).
– The value for RTT,nom is preselected via MR1[9, 6, 2].
– The value for RTT(WR) is preselected via MR2[10, 9].
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
200
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Dynamic ODT
• During DRAM operation without READ or WRITE commands, the termination is controlled.
– Nominal termination strength RTT,nom is used.
– Termination on/off timing is controlled via the ODT ball and latencies ODTLon and
ODTLoff.
• When a WRITE command (WR, WRAP, WRS4, WRS8, WRAPS4, WRAPS8) is registered,
and if dynamic ODT is enabled, the ODT termination is controlled.
– A latency of ODTLcnw after the WRITE command: termination strength R TT,nom
switches to RTT(WR)
– A latency of ODTLcwn8 (for BL8, fixed or OTF) or ODTLcwn4 (for BC4, fixed or OTF)
after the WRITE command: termination strength R TT(WR) switches back to RTT,nom.
– On/off termination timing is controlled via the ODT ball and determined by ODTLon, ODTLoff, ODTH4, and ODTH8.
– During the tADC transition window, the value of RTT is undefined.
ODT is constrained during writes and when dynamic ODT is enabled (see the table below, Dynamic ODT Specific Parameters). ODT timings listed in the ODT Parameters table in On-Die Termination (ODT) also apply to dynamic ODT mode.
Table 86: Dynamic ODT Specific Parameters
Definition for All
DDR3L Speed
Bins
Unit
Symbol
Description
Begins at
Defined to
ODTLcnw
Change from RTT,nom to
RTT(WR)
Write registration
RTT switched from RTT,nom
to RTT(WR)
WL - 2
tCK
ODTLcwn4
Change from RTT(WR) to
RTT,nom (BC4)
Write registration
RTT switched from RTT(WR)
to RTT,nom
4tCK + ODTL off
tCK
ODTLcwn8
Change from RTT(WR) to
RTT,nom (BL8)
Write registration
RTT switched from RTT(WR)
to RTT,nom
6tCK + ODTL off
tCK
tADC
RTT change skew
ODTLcnw completed
RTT transition complete
0.5tCK ± 0.2tCK
tCK
Table 87: Mode Registers for RTT,nom
MR1 (RTT,nom)
M9
M6
M2
RTT,nom (RZQ)
RTT,nom (Ohm)
RTT,nom Mode Restriction
0
0
0
Off
Off
n/a
0
0
1
RZQ/4
60
Self refresh
0
1
0
RZQ/2
120
0
1
1
RZQ/6
40
1
0
0
RZQ/12
20
1
0
1
RZQ/8
30
1
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
201
Self refresh, write
n/a
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Dynamic ODT
Table 87: Mode Registers for RTT,nom (Continued)
MR1 (RTT,nom)
M9
M6
M2
RTT,nom (RZQ)
RTT,nom (Ohm)
RTT,nom Mode Restriction
1
1
1
Reserved
Reserved
n/a
Note:
1. RZQ = 240Ω. If RTT,nom is used during WRITEs, only RZQ/2, RZQ/4, RZQ/6 are allowed.
Table 88: Mode Registers for RTT(WR)
MR2 (RTT(WR))
M10
M9
0
0
RTT(WR) (RZQ)
Dynamic ODT off: WRITE does not affect RTT,nom
RTT(WR) (Ohm)
0
1
RZQ/4
60
1
0
RZQ/2
120
1
1
Reserved
Reserved
Table 89: Timing Diagrams for Dynamic ODT
Figure and Page
Title
Figure 111 (page 203)
Dynamic ODT: ODT Asserted Before and After the WRITE, BC4
Figure 112 (page 203)
Dynamic ODT: Without WRITE Command
Figure 113 (page 204)
Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted Together with WRITE Command for 6 Clock Cycles, BL8
Figure 114 (page 205)
Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted with WRITE Command for 6 Clock Cycles, BC4
Figure 115 (page 205)
Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted with WRITE Command for 4 Clock Cycles, BC4
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
202
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
NOP
T0
NOP
T1
Notes:
NOP
T3
Valid
WRS4
T4
ODTH4
NOP
T6
RTT,nom
ODTLcnw
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAON
tAON
NOP
T5
WL
203
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RTT
ODT
Address
Command
CK#
CK
Valid
T0
Notes:
Valid
T1
tADC
tADC
(MAX)
(MIN)
NOP
T8
ODTLcwn4
NOP
T7
DI
n
NOP
T9
DI
n+ 1
RTT(WR)
DI
n+ 2
NOP
T10
DI
n+ 3
NOP
T11
(MAX)
(MIN)
tADC
tADC
NOP
T12
NOP
T13
T15
NOP
NOP
T16
Transitioning
ODTLoff
RTT,nom
NOP
T14
Don’t Care
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAOF
tAOF
NOP
T17
Valid
T3
(MIN)
(MAX)
Valid
T4
Valid
T5
Valid
RTT,nom
Valid
T7
T9
(MAX)
Valid
T10
Transitioning
tAOF
tAOF
(MIN)
Valid
ODTLoff
Valid
T8
Don’t Care
Valid
T11
1. AL = 0, CWL = 5. RTT,nom is enabled and RTT(WR) is either enabled or disabled.
2. ODTH4 is defined from ODT registered HIGH to ODT registered LOW; in this example, ODTH4 is satisfied. ODT registered LOW at T5 is also legal.
tAON
tAON
ODTH4
ODTLon
Valid
T2
T6
1. Via MRS or OTF. AL = 0, CWL = 5. RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are enabled.
2. ODTH4 applies to first registering ODT HIGH and then to the registration of the WRITE command. In this example,
ODTH4 is satisfied if ODT goes LOW at T8 (four clocks after the WRITE command).
ODTH4
ODTLon
NOP
T2
Figure 112: Dynamic ODT: Without WRITE Command
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RTT
ODT
Address
Command
CK#
CK
Figure 111: Dynamic ODT: ODT Asserted Before and After the WRITE, BC4
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Dynamic ODT
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RTT
ODT
Address
Command
CK
CK#
NOP
T0
Notes:
Valid
WRS8
T1
204
ODTLon
ODTLcnw
NOP
T3
WL
ODTH8
NOP
T4
tAON
(MAX)
(MIN)
tADC
NOP
T5
ODTLcwn8
DI
b
NOP
T6
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
RTT(WR)
NOP
T7
DI
b+3
DI
b+ 4
NOP
T8
DI
b+5
ODTLoff
DI
b+6
NOP
T9
DI
b+ 7
(MAX)
tAOF
Transitioning
tAOF
NOP
T10
(MIN)
Don’t Care
NOP
T11
1. Via MRS or OTF; AL = 0, CWL = 5. If RTT,nom can be either enabled or disabled, ODT can be HIGH. RTT(WR) is enabled.
2. In this example, ODTH8 = 6 is satisfied exactly.
NOP
T2
Figure 113: Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted Together with WRITE Command for 6 Clock Cycles, BL8
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Dynamic ODT
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Dynamic ODT
Figure 114: Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted with WRITE Command for 6 Clock Cycles, BC4
T0
T1
T2
NOP
WRS4
NOP
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
ODTLcnw
Address
Valid
ODTH4
ODTLoff
ODT
ODTLon
tADC
tADC
(MAX)
RTT(WR)
RTT
tAON
tADC
(MIN)
tAOF
(MIN)
RTT,nom
tAOF
(MAX)
(MIN)
(MAX)
ODTLcwn4
DQS, DQS#
DI
n
DQ
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
WL
Transitioning
Notes:
Don’t Care
1. Via MRS or OTF. AL = 0, CWL = 5. RTT,nom and RTT(WR) are enabled.
2. ODTH4 is defined from ODT registered HIGH to ODT registered LOW, so in this example,
ODTH4 is satisfied. ODT registered LOW at T5 is also legal.
Figure 115: Dynamic ODT: ODT Pin Asserted with WRITE Command for 4 Clock Cycles, BC4
T0
T1
T2
NOP
WRS4
NOP
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
CK#
CK
Command
ODTLcnw
Address
Valid
ODTLoff
ODTH4
ODT
tADC
ODTLon
tAOF
(MAX)
(MIN)
RTT(WR)
RTT
tAON
tAOF
(MIN)
(MAX)
ODTLcwn4
DQS, DQS#
WL
DI
n
DQ
DI
n+1
DI
n+2
DI
n+3
Transitioning
Notes:
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Don’t Care
1. Via MRS or OTF. AL = 0, CWL = 5. RTT,nom can be either enabled or disabled. If disabled,
ODT can remain HIGH. RTT(WR) is enabled.
2. In this example ODTH4 = 4 is satisfied exactly.
205
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Synchronous ODT Mode
Synchronous ODT Mode
Synchronous ODT mode is selected whenever the DLL is turned on and locked and
when either RTT,nom or RTT(WR) is enabled. Based on the power-down definition, these
modes are:
•
•
•
•
•
Any bank active with CKE HIGH
Refresh mode with CKE HIGH
Idle mode with CKE HIGH
Active power-down mode (regardless of MR0[12])
Precharge power-down mode if DLL is enabled by MR0[12] during precharge powerdown
ODT Latency and Posted ODT
In synchronous ODT mode, RTT turns on ODTLon clock cycles after ODT is sampled
HIGH by a rising clock edge and turns off ODTLoff clock cycles after ODT is registered
LOW by a rising clock edge. The actual on/off times varies by tAON and tAOF around
each clock edge (see Table 90 (page 207)). The ODT latency is tied to the WRITE latency
(WL) by ODTLon = WL - 2 and ODTLoff = WL - 2.
Since write latency is made up of CAS WRITE latency (CWL) and additive latency (AL),
the AL programmed into the mode register (MR1[4, 3]) also applies to the ODT signal.
The device’s internal ODT signal is delayed a number of clock cycles defined by the AL
relative to the external ODT signal. Thus, ODTLon = CWL + AL - 2 and ODTLoff = CWL +
AL - 2.
Timing Parameters
Synchronous ODT mode uses the following timing parameters: ODTLon, ODTLoff,
ODTH4, ODTH8, tAON, and tAOF. The minimum R TT turn-on time (tAON [MIN]) is the
point at which the device leaves High-Z and ODT resistance begins to turn on. Maximum RTT turn-on time (tAON [MAX]) is the point at which ODT resistance is fully on.
Both are measured relative to ODTLon. The minimum R TT turn-off time (tAOF [MIN]) is
the point at which the device starts to turn off ODT resistance. The maximum R TT turn
off time (tAOF [MAX]) is the point at which ODT has reached High-Z. Both are measured
from ODTLoff.
When ODT is asserted, it must remain HIGH until ODTH4 is satisfied. If a WRITE command is registered by the DRAM with ODT HIGH, then ODT must remain HIGH until
ODTH4 (BC4) or ODTH8 (BL8) after the WRITE command (see Figure 117 (page 208)).
ODTH4 and ODTH8 are measured from ODT registered HIGH to ODT registered LOW
or from the registration of a WRITE command until ODT is registered LOW.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
206
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
207
RTT
ODT
CKE
CK#
CK
T0
T1
T3
T5
T6
T7
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAON
tAON
T8
Completion of ODTLoff
Completion of ODTLon
T9
AL = 3
ODT registered HIGH or write registration with ODT HIGH
tCK
6tCK
T11
T12
RTT,nom
ODTLoff = CWL + AL - 2
T10
RTT(OFF)
RTT(ON)
CWL - 2
ODT registered LOW
T14
Transitioning
T13
t
(MAX)
Don’t Care
tAOF
AOF (MIN)
T15
0.5tCK ± 0.2tCK
tCK
ps
tCK
4tCK
ODT registered LOW
See Electrical Characteristics and AC Operating Conditions table
tCK
CWL +AL - 2
RTT(OFF) ±tAOF
RTT(ON)
tCK
Unit
CWL + AL - 2
Definition for All
DDR3L Speed Bins
±tAON
Defined to
1. AL = 3; CWL = 5; ODTLon = WL = 6.0; ODTLoff = WL - 2 = 6. RTT,nom is enabled.
ODTLon = CWL + AL - 2
ODTH4 (MIN)
AL = 3
Note:
T2
T4
ODT turn-off relative to ODTLoff
completion
tAOF
Figure 116: Synchronous ODT
ODT turn-on relative to ODTLon
completion
ODT minimum HIGH time after WRITE Write registration with ODT HIGH
(BL8)
ODTH8
tAON
ODT minimum HIGH time after ODT
assertion or WRITE (BC4)
ODTH4
ODT registered HIGH
ODT synchronous turn-off delay
ODTLoff
ODT registered HIGH
Begins at
ODT synchronous turn-on delay
Description
ODTLon
Symbol
Table 90: Synchronous ODT Parameters
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Synchronous ODT Mode
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
RTT
ODT
Command
CKE
CK#
CK
NOP
T0
NOP
T1
Notes:
NOP
T2
NOP
T4
NOP
T5
NOP
T6
ODTH4 (MIN)
NOP
T8
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAON
tAON
ODTH4
NOP
T9
RTT,nom
tAOF
ODTLon = WL - 2
ODTLoff = WL - 2
WRS4
T7
tAOF
(MIN)
NOP
T10
(MAX)
tAON
NOP
T11
(MIN)
tAON
(MAX)
NOP
T12
NOP
T14
RTT,nom
ODTLoff = WL - 2
NOP
T13
NOP
T16
Transitioning
NOP
T15
Don’t Care
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAOF
tAOF
NOP
T17
WL = 7. RTT,nom is enabled. RTT(WR) is disabled.
ODT must be held HIGH for at least ODTH4 after assertion (T1).
ODT must be kept HIGH ODTH4 (BC4) or ODTH8 (BL8) after the WRITE command (T7).
ODTH is measured from ODT first registered HIGH to ODT first registered LOW or from the registration of the
WRITE command with ODT HIGH to ODT registered LOW.
5. Although ODTH4 is satisfied from ODT registered HIGH at T6, ODT must not go LOW before T11 as ODTH4 must
also be satisfied from the registration of the WRITE command at T7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ODTLon = WL - 2
ODTH4
NOP
T3
Figure 117: Synchronous ODT (BC4)
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Synchronous ODT Mode
208
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Synchronous ODT Mode
ODT Off During READs
Because the device cannot terminate and drive at the same time, RTT must be disabled
at least one-half clock cycle before the READ preamble by driving the ODT ball LOW (if
either RTT,nom or RTT(WR) is enabled). RTT may not be enabled until the end of the postamble, as shown in the following example.
Note: ODT may be disabled earlier and enabled later than shown in Figure 118
(page 210).
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
209
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
Valid
DQ
DQS, DQS#
RTT
ODT
READ
Address
T0
Command
CK#
CK
NOP
T1
Note:
NOP
T2
NOP
T5
NOP
T6
RL = AL + CL
RTT,nom
ODTLoff = CWL + AL - 2
NOP
T4
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
NOP
T9
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAOF
tAOF
NOP
T11
DI
b
DI
b+1
DI
b+2
NOP
T12
ODTLon = CWL + AL - 2
NOP
T10
DI
b+3
DI
b+4
NOP
T13
DI
b+5
DI
b+6
NOP
T14
tAON
NOP
T17
Don’t Care
(MAX)
RTT,nom
NOP
T16
Transitioning
DI
b+7
NOP
T15
1. ODT must be disabled externally during READs by driving ODT LOW. For example, CL = 6; AL = CL - 1 = 5; RL = AL
+ CL = 11; CWL = 5; ODTLon = CWL + AL - 2 = 8; ODTLoff = CWL + AL - 2 = 8. RTT,nom is enabled. RTT(WR) is a “Don’t
Care.”
NOP
T3
Figure 118: ODT During READs
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Synchronous ODT Mode
210
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous ODT Mode
Asynchronous ODT Mode
Asynchronous ODT mode is available when the DRAM runs in DLL on mode and when
either RTT,nom or RTT(WR) is enabled; however, the DLL is temporarily turned off in precharged power-down standby (via MR0[12]). Additionally, ODT operates asynchronously when the DLL is synchronizing after being reset. See Power-Down Mode (page 187)
for definition and guidance over power-down details.
In asynchronous ODT timing mode, the internal ODT command is not delayed by AL
relative to the external ODT command. In asynchronous ODT mode, ODT controls RTT
by analog time. The timing parameters tAONPD and tAOFPD replace ODTLon/tAON
and ODTLoff/tAOF, respectively, when ODT operates asynchronously.
The minimum RTT turn-on time (tAONPD [MIN]) is the point at which the device termination circuit leaves High-Z and ODT resistance begins to turn on. Maximum RTT turnon time (tAONPD [MAX]) is the point at which ODT resistance is fully on. tAONPD
(MIN) and tAONPD (MAX) are measured from ODT being sampled HIGH.
The minimum RTT turn-off time (tAOFPD [MIN]) is the point at which the device termination circuit starts to turn off ODT resistance. Maximum RTT turn-off time (tAOFPD
[MAX]) is the point at which ODT has reached High-Z. tAOFPD (MIN) and tAOFPD
(MAX) are measured from ODT being sampled LOW.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
211
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
T0
T1
Note:
T2
tIS
T4
(MIN)
tAONPD
tAONPD
T5
1. AL is ignored.
tIH
T3
(MAX)
T6
T7
T8
T9
Description
Asynchronous RTT turn-on delay (power-down with DLL off)
Asynchronous RTT turn-off delay (power-down with DLL off)
Symbol
tAONPD
tAOFPD
Table 91: Asynchronous ODT Timing Parameters for All Speed Bins
RTT
ODT
CKE
CK#
CK
Figure 119: Asynchronous ODT Timing with Fast ODT Transition
RTT,nom
T10
tIH
T11
tIS
T12
2
2
Min
T14
(MAX)
(MIN)
tAOFPD
tAOFPD
T13
Max
8.5
8.5
T16
Transitioning
T15
ns
ns
Unit
Don’t Care
T17
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous ODT Mode
212
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous ODT Mode
Synchronous to Asynchronous ODT Mode Transition (Power-Down Entry)
There is a transition period around power-down entry (PDE) where the DRAM’s ODT
may exhibit either synchronous or asynchronous behavior. This transition period occurs if the DLL is selected to be off when in precharge power-down mode by the setting
MR0[12] = 0. Power-down entry begins tANPD prior to CKE first being registered LOW,
and ends when CKE is first registered LOW. tANPD is equal to the greater of ODTLoff +
1tCK or ODTLon + 1tCK. If a REFRESH command has been issued, and it is in progress
when CKE goes LOW, power-down entry ends tRFC after the REFRESH command, rather than when CKE is first registered LOW. Power-down entry then becomes the greater
of tANPD and tRFC - REFRESH command to CKE registered LOW.
ODT assertion during power-down entry results in an RTT change as early as the lesser
of tAONPD (MIN) and ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MIN), or as late as the greater of tAONPD
(MAX) and ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MAX). ODT de-assertion during power-down entry
can result in an RTT change as early as the lesser of tAOFPD (MIN) and ODTLoff × tCK +
tAOF (MIN), or as late as the greater of tAOFPD (MAX) and ODTLoff × tCK + tAOF (MAX).
Table 92 (page 214) summarizes these parameters.
If AL has a large value, the uncertainty of the state of RTT becomes quite large. This is
because ODTLon and ODTLoff are derived from the WL; and WL is equal to CWL + AL.
Figure 120 (page 214) shows three different cases:
• ODT_A: Synchronous behavior before tANPD.
• ODT_B: ODT state changes during the transition period with tAONPD (MIN) <
ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MIN) and tAONPD (MAX) > ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MAX).
• ODT_C: ODT state changes after the transition period with asynchronous behavior.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
213
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
WL - 1 (greater of ODTLoff + 1 or ODTLon + 1)
214
DRAM RTT C
asynchronous
ODT C
asynchronous
DRAM RTT B
asynchronous
or synchronous
ODT B
asynchronous
or synchronous
DRAM RTT A
synchronous
ODT A
synchronous
Command
CKE
CK#
CK
NOP
T0
REF
T1
Note:
NOP
T2
RTT,nom
T5
tANPD
NOP
ODTLoff
NOP
T4
NOP
T6
NOP
T8
NOP
T9
RTT,nom
(MAX)
PDE transition period
(MIN)
(MIN)
tAOF
tAOF
tRFC
NOP
T7
1. AL = 0; CWL = 5; ODTL(off) = WL - 2 = 3.
RTT,nom
NOP
T3
NOP
T11
(MIN)
(MAX)
NOP
T12
ODTLoff + tAOFPD (MAX)
tAOFPD
tAOFPD
ODTLoff + tAOFPD (MIN)
NOP
T10
NOP
Ta0
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
T13
Figure 120: Synchronous to Asynchronous Transition During Precharge Power-Down (DLL Off) Entry
tANPD
tAOFPD
NOP
Ta3
Don’t Care
(MAX)
(MIN)
NOP
Ta2
tAOFPD
Transitioning
NOP
Ta1
Greater of: tAOFPD (MAX) (8.5ns) or
ODTLoff × tCK + tAOF (MAX)
Lesser of: tAOFPD (MIN) (2ns) or
ODTLoff × tCK + tAOF (MIN)
+ tXPDLL
- refresh to CKE LOW
Max
ODT to RTT turn-off delay
(ODTLoff = WL - 2)
tANPD
or
tRFC
Greater of: tAONPD (MAX) (8.5ns) or
ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MAX)
Greater of:
tANPD
Lesser of: tAONPD (MIN) (2ns) or
ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MIN)
Min
ODT to RTT turn-on delay
(ODTLon = WL - 2)
Power-down exit transition period
(power-down exit)
Power-down entry transition period
(power-down entry)
Description
Table 92: ODT Parameters for Power-Down (DLL Off) Entry and Exit Transition Period
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous ODT Mode
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (PowerDown Exit)
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (Power-Down Exit)
The DRAM’s ODT can exhibit either asynchronous or synchronous behavior during
power-down exit (PDX). This transition period occurs if the DLL is selected to be off
when in precharge power-down mode by setting MR0[12] to 0. Power-down exit begins
tANPD prior to CKE first being registered HIGH, and ends tXPDLL after CKE is first registered HIGH. tANPD is equal to the greater of ODTLoff + 1tCK or ODTLon + 1tCK. The
transition period is tANPD + tXPDLL.
ODT assertion during power-down exit results in an RTT change as early as the lesser of
tAONPD (MIN) and ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MIN), or as late as the greater of tAONPD
(MAX) and ODTLon × tCK + tAON (MAX). ODT de-assertion during power-down exit
may result in an RTT change as early as the lesser of tAOFPD (MIN) and ODTLoff × tCK +
tAOF (MIN), or as late as the greater of tAOFPD (MAX) and ODTLoff × tCK + tAOF (MAX).
Table 92 (page 214) summarizes these parameters.
If AL has a large value, the uncertainty of the RTT state becomes quite large. This is because ODTLon and ODTLoff are derived from WL, and WL is equal to CWL + AL. Figure
121 (page 216) shows three different cases:
• ODT C: Asynchronous behavior before tANPD.
• ODT B: ODT state changes during the transition period, with tAOFPD (MIN) < ODTLoff × tCK + tAOF (MIN), and ODTLoff × tCK + tAOF (MAX) > tAOFPD (MAX).
• ODT A: ODT state changes after the transition period with synchronous response.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
215
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
DRAM RTT C
synchronous
ODT C
synchronous
ODT B
asynchronous
or synchronous
RTT B
asynchronous
or synchronous
DRAM RTT A
asynchronous
ODT A
asynchronous
COMMAND
CKE
CK#
CK
T0
RTT,nom
T1
(MIN)
tANPD
Ta0
NOP
Ta1
NOP
Ta2
tAOFPD
NOP
Ta3
NOP
Ta5
(MIN)
tXPDLL
NOP
Ta6
(MAX)
RTT,nom
ODTLoff + tAOF (MAX)
tAOFPD
ODTLoff + tAOF (MIN)
PDX transition period
NOP
Ta4
1. CL = 6; AL = CL - 1; CWL = 5; ODTLoff = WL - 2 = 8.
RTT,nom
(MAX)
Note:
tAOFPD
tAOFPD
T2
NOP
Tb0
NOP
Tb1
NOP
Tb2
Tc1
NOP
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Tc0
Figure 121: Asynchronous to Synchronous Transition During Precharge Power-Down (DLL Off) Exit
Transitioning
ODTLoff
NOP
Tc2
(MIN)
(MAX)
NOP
Td1
Don’t Care
tAOF
tAOF
NOP
Td0
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (PowerDown Exit)
216
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (PowerDown Exit)
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (Short CKE Pulse)
If the time in the precharge power-down or idle states is very short (short CKE LOW
pulse), the power-down entry and power-down exit transition periods overlap. When
overlap occurs, the response of the DRAM’s RTT to a change in the ODT state can be
synchronous or asynchronous from the start of the power-down entry transition period
to the end of the power-down exit transition period, even if the entry period ends later
than the exit period.
If the time in the idle state is very short (short CKE HIGH pulse), the power-down exit
and power-down entry transition periods overlap. When this overlap occurs, the response of the DRAM’s RTT to a change in the ODT state may be synchronous or asynchronous from the start of power-down exit transition period to the end of the powerdown entry transition period.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
217
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
218
REF
T0
Note:
NOP
T1
tANPD
NOP
T3
NOP
T5
NOP
T7
(MIN)
tANPD
tRFC
T8
NOP
NOP
T9
PDX transition period
PDE transition period
NOP
T6
Short CKE low transition period (R TT change asynchronous or synchronous)
NOP
T4
1. AL = 0, WL = 5, tANPD = 4.
NOP
T2
tXPDLL
NOP
Ta1
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Ta0
Command
CK#
CK
NOP
T0
Note:
NOP
T1
tANPD
NOP
T3
NOP
T4
NOP
T5
NOP
T6
tXPDLL
tANPD
NOP
T7
NOP
T8
1. AL = 0, WL = 5, tANPD = 4.
Short CKE HIGH transition period (RTT change asynchronous or synchonous)
NOP
T2
NOP
T9
Ta1
NOP
Indicates break
in time scale
NOP
Ta0
Figure 123: Transition Period for Short CKE HIGH Cycles with Entry and Exit Period Overlapping
EKC
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
CKE
Command
CK#
CK
Figure 122: Transition Period for Short CKE LOW Cycles with Entry and Exit Period Overlapping
Transitioning
NOP
Ta2
Ta3
NOP
Ta3
NOP
Transitioning
NOP
Ta2
Don’t Care
NOP
Ta4
Don’t Care
NOP
Ta4
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (PowerDown Exit)
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
4Gb: x4, x8, x16 DDR3L SDRAM
Asynchronous to Synchronous ODT Mode Transition (PowerDown Exit)
8000 S. Federal Way, P.O. Box 6, Boise, ID 83707-0006, Tel: 208-368-4000
www.micron.com/products/support Sales inquiries: 800-932-4992
Micron and the Micron logo are trademarks of Micron Technology, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This data sheet contains minimum and maximum limits specified over the power supply and temperature range set forth herein.
Although considered final, these specifications are subject to change, as further product development and data characterization sometimes occur.
PDF: 09005aef85af8fa8
4Gb_DDR3L.pdf - Rev. M 08/15 EN
219
Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice.
© 2009 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.